JP2016107009A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine comprising a projector and a screen, capable of creating a novel entertainment property.SOLUTION: When a predetermined game state shift condition is established, a game state is shifted from a first game state to a second game state. On the other hand, when a predetermined game state shift condition is established, a screen state is switched from a first screen state to a second screen state. Then, after the predetermined game state shift condition is established, when a start command signal output from start command means is detected, a pattern variable display is started, while waiting passing of time required for switching of the screen state from the first screen state to the second screen state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 178

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventional gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines are generally equipped with a liquid crystal display device, and a variety of images are displayed on the liquid crystal display device according to the game situation, thereby boosting the progress of the game, It improves the player's expectation for the development of the game.

  Here, it is considered that when the display screen of the liquid crystal display device is enlarged, it is possible to enhance such a production effect and improve the interest of the game, but usually the liquid crystal display device is expensive, There was a problem that the price of the gaming machine would rise with the increase in the size of the display screen.

  Therefore, in recent years, it has been proposed to use a projector that is cheaper than a liquid crystal display device in order to enlarge the display screen (see Patent Document 1). In a gaming machine using such a projector, the video projected by the projector appears on the screen, so that the gaming machine can be reduced in price while providing a realistic and powerful performance.

JP-A-6-35066

  The present inventor has come up with the idea that new entertainment properties can be created by elaborating the screen in the process of earnestly examining the gaming machine using the projector as described above. It was.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to create new entertainment characteristics in a gaming machine including a projector and a screen.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) Symbol display means (for example, reels RL, RC, RR, and main display window DD4) capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols;
Start command means (for example, start lever DD6 and start switch 1006S) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal lottery means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, the main CPU 1031 for executing the process of FIG. 157),
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, variation control means (for example, the process in step S7 in FIG. 154 and the process in FIG. 178) for displaying the symbol in the symbol display means. Main CPU 1031) to execute,
Stop command means (for example, stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, and stop switches 1007LS, 1007CS, 1007RS) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, a stop control means for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variation display is performed by the fluctuation control means (For example, the main CPU 1031 that executes the process of FIG. 158);
A projector capable of projecting an image (for example, projector mechanism B2);
One or a plurality of screens (for example, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (for example, cabinet G) containing the screen and having an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (for example, an upper door mechanism UD) provided with a visual recognition area (for example, an upper display window UD1) that is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and that allows the display surface of the screen to be visually recognized
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface of the screen by emitting light including the image from the projector (for example, the sub CPU 1071 that executes the processing of step S1325 and step S1336 in FIG. 179);
A screen state indicating an arrangement state of the one or more screens by driving at least one of the screens (for example, the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1) by a driving mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screens. Is switched from one screen state to another screen state (for example, the normal screen state, the bonus screen state, and the ART screen state) (for example, FIG. 180). A sub CPU 1071) that executes the processing of step S1403, step S1424 of FIG. 181 and step S1443 of FIG. 182;
When a predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, a game is changed from a first game state to a second game state among a plurality of game states (for example, a general game state, a BB game state, and an ART game state). Game state transition means (for example, the main CPU 1031 that executes the processing of step S1122 in FIG. 173, step S1144 in FIG. 174, step S1222 in FIG. 175, and step S1244 in FIG. 176) for transitioning the state;
The screen state switching means is
When the predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied, a gaming state transition screen state switching unit (for example, for switching the screen state from the first screen state of the plurality of screen states to the second screen state) 180. The sub CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1403 of FIG.
The fluctuation control means (for example, the main CPU 1031 that executes the process of FIG. 178)
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected after the predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, the screen state switching means during the game state transition causes the second screen from the first screen state. Waiting for the time required for the screen state to switch to the screen state to elapse, and starting the variable display of the symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (1), when a predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. On the other hand, according to the invention of (1), the screen can take a plurality of screen states, and when a predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, the screen state is changed from the first screen state to the second screen state. The screen state can be switched. Then, after a predetermined game state transition condition is established, when a start command signal output from the start command means is detected (start operation is performed by the player), the first screen state to the second screen After the time required for the screen state to be switched to the state has elapsed, the symbol variation display is started.

  Normally, in a gaming machine, when a start operation is performed by a player and a symbol variation display is started, an effect is performed in conjunction with the symbol variation display. Here, after the predetermined game state transition condition is established, if the symbol variation display is started before the screen state is switched from the first screen state to the second screen state, the symbol variation display There is a possibility that a shift occurs in the correspondence with the performance. In this regard, according to the invention of (1), since the change display of the symbol is started after the time required for switching the screen state elapses, such a situation can be avoided.

(2) Symbol display means (for example, reels RL, RC, RR, and main display window DD4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (for example, start lever DD6 and start switch 1006S) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal lottery means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, the main CPU 1031 for executing the process of FIG. 157),
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, variation control means (for example, the process in step S7 in FIG. 154 and the process in FIG. 178) for displaying the symbol in the symbol display means. Main CPU 1031) to execute,
Stop command means (for example, stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, and stop switches 1007LS, 1007CS, 1007RS) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, a stop control means for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variation display is performed by the fluctuation control means (For example, the main CPU 1031 that executes the process of FIG. 158);
A projector capable of projecting an image (for example, projector mechanism B2);
N (N is an integer of 2 or more) screens (for example, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (for example, cabinet G) containing the N screens and having an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (for example, an upper door mechanism UD) provided with a visual recognition area (for example, an upper display window UD1) that is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and that allows the display surface of the screen to be visually recognized
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface irradiated with the light by emitting light including the image from the projector (for example, the sub CPU 1071 that executes the processing of step S1325 and step S1336 in FIG. 179). When,
At least one of the screens (for example, the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1) is driven by a drive mechanism to change the position of the screen, thereby changing the screen state indicating the arrangement state of the N screens. , Screen state switching means for switching from one screen state to another screen state (for example, normal screen state, bonus screen state, and ART screen state) (for example, FIG. 180). A sub CPU 1071) that executes the processing of step S1403, step S1424 of FIG. 181 and step S1443 of FIG. 182;
When a predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, a game is changed from a first game state to a second game state among a plurality of game states (for example, a general game state, a BB game state, and an ART game state). Game state transition means (for example, the main CPU 1031 that executes the processing of step S1122 in FIG. 173, step S1144 in FIG. 174, step S1222 in FIG. 175, and step S1244 in FIG. 176) for transitioning the state;
When the N screens are expressed as a first screen to an Nth screen, and the N screen states are expressed as a first screen state to an Nth screen state, the Kth screen state (K is 1 to N) are arranged such that the N screens are arranged so that the light emitted from the projector is irradiated onto the display surface of the Kth screen and the display surface is visible through the viewing area. The state
The screen state switching means is
When the predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, a screen state switching means (for example, a game state transition state) that switches the screen state from the first screen state of the N screen states to the second screen state (for example, , A sub CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1403 of FIG.
The fluctuation control means (for example, the main CPU 1031 that executes the process of FIG. 178)
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected after the predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, the screen state switching means during the game state transition causes the second screen from the first screen state. Waiting for the time required for the screen state to switch to the screen state to elapse, and starting the variable display of the symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (2), when a predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. On the other hand, according to the invention of (2), the screen can take a plurality of (N) screen states. When a predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, the screen state is the first screen. The state is switched to the second screen state. Then, after a predetermined game state transition condition is established, when a start command signal output from the start command means is detected (start operation is performed by the player), the first screen state to the second screen After the time required for the screen state to be switched to the state has elapsed, the symbol variation display is started.

  Normally, in a gaming machine, when a start operation is performed by a player and a symbol variation display is started, an effect is performed in conjunction with the symbol variation display. Here, after the predetermined game state transition condition is established, if the symbol variation display is started before the screen state is switched from the first screen state to the second screen state, the symbol variation display There is a possibility that a shift occurs in the correspondence with the performance. In this regard, according to the invention of (2), such a situation can be avoided because the display of the variation of the symbol is started after the time required for switching the screen state elapses.

  According to the present invention, new entertainment can be created in a gaming machine including a projector and a screen.

It is a perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a schematic layout diagram inside the housing of the gaming machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a rear screen mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side board of the screen housing | casing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation state of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of a gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened. It is a disassembled perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a perspective view when a display unit is attached to a cabinet. FIG. 41 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view taken along the line ZZ in FIG. 40, omitting functional components housed in the housing of the display unit, and disposed above the gaming machine when the gaming machine is installed on the island facility. It is the figure showing also about the fixed board member of the island equipment. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a perspective sectional view of a display unit and a cabinet. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a reel screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation range of a front screen mechanism, and the operation range of a reel screen mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side board of the screen housing | casing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation state of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism and a front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism, a reel screen drive mechanism, and a movable body base. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism and a reel screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view for demonstrating a sensor mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is a sequence diagram which concerns on operation | movement of a front screen mechanism. It is a figure explaining the control sequence of the drive motor of a front screen drive mechanism at the time of driving a front screen mechanism from a front standby position to a front exposure position. It is a sequence diagram concerning operation of a reel screen mechanism. It is a figure explaining the control sequence of the drive motor of a reel screen drive mechanism at the time of driving a reel screen mechanism from a reel standby position to a reel exposure position. It is a figure explaining the drive procedure of a front screen mechanism and a reel screen mechanism regarding an origin return operation | movement. It is a perspective view of a cabinet and a medal supply port. It is a perspective view of a cabinet, a medal supply port, and a medal supply mechanism. It is a perspective view of a medal supply mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a medal supply mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows arrangement | positioning of a back wall, a medal supply port, a medal supply mechanism, and a scaler apparatus. It is a front view of the gaming machine in a state where the lower door mechanism is opened. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is sectional drawing of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a front view, a top view, and a right side view of the coin guard. It is a front view of the gaming machine in a state where the lower door mechanism is opened. It is explanatory drawing of the state in which the hopper guide mechanism was attached to the bottom plate. It is the upper side figure and front view of a hopper guide mechanism. It is a perspective view of the hopper mechanism HP. It is explanatory drawing at the time of attaching the hopper mechanism HP normally. It is explanatory drawing at the time of attaching the hopper mechanism HP normally. It is explanatory drawing at the time of making the hopper mechanism HP approach accidentally. It is a detailed view of the inside of the cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is explanatory drawing of a sheet metal. It is explanatory drawing of a sheet metal. It is a front view of the cabinet of the state which opened the upper door mechanism and the lower dora mechanism. It is a side view of the cabinet in the state where the upper door mechanism and the lower drag mechanism are opened. It is a perspective view of the cabinet in the state where the lower drum mechanism was opened. It is explanatory drawing of an upper door locking mechanism. It is explanatory drawing of the upper door lock mechanism in a locked state. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine with the lower door mechanism removed from the cabinet. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine in a state where the lower door mechanism is opened. It is detail drawing of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a side view of the state which made the speaker DD25 and the power supply device face. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded view of the operation part and locking part of the maximum BET button. It is the figure which looked at the largest BET button fixed to the 2nd base part from the inside of a cabinet. It is sectional drawing of a 2nd base part. It is an exploded view of an operation part. It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine in a state where the lower door mechanism is opened. It is a back perspective view of a lower door mechanism. It is an exploded view of lower door DD1, reel unit RU, and main control board MS. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of attaching a main control board to a reel unit. It is attachment explanatory drawing of the reel unit to a lower door mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a reel apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of a reel unit. It is a perspective view of a motor mounting plate, a reel index, and a sensor part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a detection piece and a detection state. It is a perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor part. It is an exploded perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor part. It is an exploded perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment position of the base member with respect to a motor attachment board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment position of the sensor with respect to a base member. It is a top view of the gaming machine in a state where the upper door mechanism is opened. It is a perspective view of the game machine of the state where the upper door mechanism was removed from the cabinet. It is explanatory drawing of an upper side hinge mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of an irradiation light apparatus and a decoration unit. It is sectional drawing of a decoration unit. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of an upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of an upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a partially exploded perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is sectional drawing of a left panel mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide structure of a left light-guide plate. It is a perspective view of a panel base, a top lens cover, and an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of a top lens cover and an upper left panel mechanism. It is a figure which shows the function flow of a pachislot. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a main control circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a subcontrol circuit. It is a figure which shows a symbol arrangement | positioning table. It is a figure which shows a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows a table at the time of a bonus action | operation. It is a figure which shows an internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows an internal winning combination determination table. (A) is a figure showing an internal winning combination storing area. (B) is a figure which shows a carryover combination storage area. (C) is a diagram showing an operating flag storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of demonstration transfer performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus operation | movement check process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus completion | finish check process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the ART operation | movement check process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the ART completion | finish check process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task performed in a subcontrol circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the effect registration task performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a figure for demonstrating a demonstration image | video. It is a figure for demonstrating a demonstration image | video. It is a figure for demonstrating a demonstration image | video. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of demonstration transfer performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of demo cancellation | release performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus operation | movement check process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus completion | finish check process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the ART operation | movement check process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the ART completion | finish check process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the screen state change process at the time of game state transition performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the screen state return process at the time of demo cancellation | release performed in a subcontrol circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the screen state change process at the time of demonstration transfer performed in a sub-control circuit. (A) is a figure for demonstrating a demonstration image | video. (B) is a figure which shows a shutter accessory. (C) is a figure for demonstrating the image | video which concerns on the effect in game. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of a reel screen mechanism. It is a figure which shows the effect using a reel screen mechanism. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation using a fixed screen mechanism and a reel screen mechanism. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation using a fixed screen mechanism and a reel screen mechanism. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation using a reel screen mechanism. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation using a reel screen mechanism. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation using a reel screen mechanism. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation using a reel screen mechanism.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The gaming machine is a so-called pachislot machine. A gaming machine is a gaming machine that uses a gaming medium such as a card storing information on gaming value assigned to or attached to a player in addition to coins, medals, gaming balls or tokens, In the following description, it is assumed that medals are used.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. The direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as the front-rear direction or the thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as the left-right direction or the width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the up-down direction or the height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the appearance of the gaming machine 1 is constituted by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a cabinet 21 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD disposed at the upper front of the cabinet 21, and a lower door mechanism DD disposed at the lower front of the cabinet 21. ing. The cabinet 21 accommodates equipment used in the game (for example, a reel (or a drum)). As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 21. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 21 can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit A is provided inside the cabinet 21 on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 211 in the cabinet 21. The intermediate support plate 211 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 21. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping apparatus having an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. .

  Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. For example, the position (projection distance or angle) of an object that is a screen described later is used. Etc.) and an image corresponding to the production information generated based on the shape is projected, thereby enabling an advanced and powerful production.

(Display unit A: Irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward, and a screen that is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and that has the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 disposed obliquely downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: Irradiation light device B: Projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is disposed at the rear part in the cabinet 21. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 arranged horizontally. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is disposed so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Further, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are disposed on the right and left sides of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The exhaust heat mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct through which air is circulated and a fan that sends out air. By blowing out the air to the rear, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forced to the rear. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, vent holes 21 a of the cabinet 21 are arranged in the air flow direction in the heat removal mechanisms B <b> 23 and B <b> 24. As a result, the exhaust heat mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly exhaust the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with air to the outside through the vent hole 21a.

(Display unit A: Irradiation light device B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (in the direction of emission of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 accommodated in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular front surface. At each corner portion of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface with the angle adjustment hole B311 as a center. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, a mirror holding part B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding part B313 is formed in the center part, and is formed in a size that does not overlap with the angle adjustment hole B311 and the attachment hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding part B313. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and attachment holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and the attachment holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 and the attachment holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding part B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding part B313 and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is disposed so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding part B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11, and this screw passes through the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws that pass through the angle adjustment holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are provided on the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. Screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

  When the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screwing with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344, so that the optical mirror is interposed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is sandwiched. As described above, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by rotating the screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner portions of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance to B3, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 can be finely adjusted.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding unit B11, so that the reflector holding unit B11 and the mirror holder B31 Is sandwiched between. And the screw penetrated from angle adjustment hole B111 of reflector holding part B11 has penetrated the spring concerned. Thereby, even if the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11 by the biasing force of the spring. It can be prevented that the screw head protrudes from the angle adjustment hole B111 and the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw is destroyed.

(Display unit A: Irradiation light device B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are accommodated in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes a horizontally disposed upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 disposed on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13 and B13 disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward from the cabinet 21 of FIG. At the center of the front side of the upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 is formed so as to protrude forward, and the above-described mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the protrusion so that the angle can be adjusted. .

  Moreover, side wall part B13 * B13 has the protrusion part B131 protruded in the horizontal direction from the lower end part. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet 21, and is set to a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 21. Has been. On the other hand, the second protrusion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the rear space from the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet 21, and is larger than the width of the rear space. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, the side walls B13 and B13 are formed such that the width of the second protrusion B131b is wider than the width of the first protrusion B131a. Thereby, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet 21.

  A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal having a plurality of holes formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed to be substantially evenly distributed over the entire surface of the porous plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set such that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has a front side upper part B15a, a middle side inclined part B15b, and a rear side lower part B15c. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined part B15b is formed by being bent obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper part B15a. The lower part B15c is formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined part B15b.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall parts B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from the lower side with the upper part B15a and cover the lower part with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. Yes. As shown in FIG. 10, a front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is disposed below the perforated plate B15.

  As will be described in detail later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position that is disposed on the upper side that is a standby posture that prohibits the appearance of an image by irradiation light, and a lower side that is an exposure posture that permits the appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is in an inclined posture that is close to and substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the porous plate B15, and air present in the space portion reaches the porous plate B15 without flow resistance, By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and increase the cooling efficiency.

  Further, the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the player's line-of-sight position is the center of the screen device C in the vertical and horizontal directions. Even if the irradiation light device B is looked up from the position of the line of sight, the inside of the irradiation light device B is not visually observed by the perforated plate B15.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. Thereby, the display unit A can unitarily handle the irradiation light device B and the screen device C as a unit.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen casing C10. As shown also in FIG. 15, the screen casing C10 includes a horizontally disposed bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. Accordingly, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper side where the irradiation light device B is located are formed. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen casing C10 are independently formed in a predetermined shape, and a predetermined functional component such as a fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. Has been. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be shared as a whole, it is possible to share the unit for each plate member of the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4. Moreover, since the partial change for every board | plate member is possible, it is possible to change a specification easily for every model of the game machine 1. FIG.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Bottom plate C1)
More specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, there is a central placement portion C11 disposed at the center, and a right placement portion C12 and a left placement portion C13 disposed in the left-right direction around the center placement portion C11. Yes. These placement portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The center placement portion C11 places the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 position the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. It is placed as possible.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip end portion is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side C14. As shown in FIG. 5, when the display unit A is assembled while being mounted on the intermediate support plate 211 of the cabinet 21, the front side portion C <b> 14 comes into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate 211, thereby It is possible to perform backward positioning. The display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 21 by being screwed to the front side of the cabinet 21 through the through hole C141 of the front side C14. It is possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen casing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The opening portions C21 and C31 for operation are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction coincides with the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is assembled in the cabinet 21, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 21 in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. . Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 21 releases the screw fastening of the display unit A to the cabinet 21 and removes the screw. Then, the hand is extended into the cabinet 21 to hold the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands, and the display unit A is taken out of the cabinet 21. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 17, the hand is reached from one operation opening C21 of the removed display unit A into the screen device C, and the crank gear E21 that is visible in the horizontal direction is rotated from the operation opening C21. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, a hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet 21 into the space between the side wall 212 of the cabinet 21 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and the operation opening C21 is reached. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 can be unlocked without removing the display unit A from the cabinet 21.

  Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor housing portion C22 houses the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a relay substrate CK is provided on the back surface. The relay substrate CK collects a plurality of signal lines in the display unit A and enables wiring to the outside of the display unit A at one place. The relay board CK is provided in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21 by being provided on the back face of the back plate C4. That is, the relay substrate CK is disposed in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 2111 of the intermediate support plate 211 that supports the display unit A is disposed below the relay substrate CK, and a signal line of the relay substrate CK is inserted therethrough.

  Thus, the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, thereby facilitating the wiring work and making it unnecessary to secure an installation space for the relay substrate CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the device C is expanded.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 18, the opening C41 for operation is formed in the backplate C4. The operation opening C41 is disposed at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is incorporated into the cabinet 21, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet 21. After that, reaching out from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 visible in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen casing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for causing an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. Detailed structures of the screen mechanisms D, E1, and F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen position relationship)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided to be rotatable between a front exposure position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that an image of the irradiated light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided so as to be rotatable between a reel exposure position and a reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set so that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists ahead of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that an image by irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is made shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are different in the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 so that the overlapping of the operation areas due to the rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set higher than the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. Thereby, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

  The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is present at the standby position. Thereby, interference at the time of rotation of screen mechanism E1 * F1 is prevented.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed to the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 by screw fastening. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection part D1, a right reflection part D2, a left reflection part D3, and a lower reflection part D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

  In addition, if the fixed screen mechanism D is a structure which has a reflective surface of several different angles with respect to the optical axis of irradiation light, it may have a reflective part of 2 surfaces, 3 surfaces, 5 surfaces, for example, Or you may provide the reflection part of the curved or circular-arc-shaped reflective surface in which the curvature center point located in the front side becomes an angle continuously different with respect to an optical axis.

  The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface opposed to the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed in the upper front portion of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. It is set to be. The right side reflection part D2 and the left side reflection part D3 are joined to the right side part and the left side part of the front reflection part D1, and are arranged symmetrically about the front reflection part D1. The right side reflection part D2 and the left side reflection part D3 are arranged such that the width between the front end parts is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflection part D1. As a result, the right-side reflection part D2 and the left-side reflection part D3 make the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface easier to face in the direction of the front reflection part D1, so that a part of the irradiation light appears in front while the image by the irradiation light appears. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflection part D1. In addition, with respect to the lower surface reflection portion D4, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface is easily directed toward the front reflection portion D1, a part of the irradiation light is caused to appear in the direction of the front reflection portion D1 while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D described above, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, which will be described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting surface of the irradiation light is made smaller than the amount of light reflected by the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D is prevented from being blurred due to light mixing due to irregular reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the other reflection parts D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the lightness of the front reflection part D1. In this case, since the reflection to the front reflection part D1 of the irradiation light in the other reflection parts D2, D3, and D4 can be reduced, white blur can be reduced while causing an image to appear strongly in the front reflection part D1.

As brightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as other colors can be expressed by relative values with white as a reference.

  The lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If it is lower than the brightness of a surface, it will not specifically limit. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value lower by about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) than the brightness of the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. What is necessary is just to make it black rather than the color of the coating material apply | coated to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the coating material applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1. What added the black pigment to the coating material apply | coated to a base material should just be used.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only a white pigment among white pigment and black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both a white pigment and a black pigment may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment (for example, 5 to 25% (or 5% to 25%) (or the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is higher than the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). In addition, as a coating material applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, a conventionally known screen coating material can be appropriately employed and can be adjusted according to a screen type (for example, a diffusion type or a reflection type). .

  Note that the black pigment is not dispersed in the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but before the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is molded. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored to lower the brightness of the base material itself.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing irregular reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as peripheral walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4), and the interior of the screen casing C10. It is desirable that the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) disposed in the panel is also lowered. The brightness of these members is desirably lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen for the surrounding wall. The lower the better. That is, it is desirable that the color of the surrounding wall is closer to black.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support E12 having patterns such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has a projection surface E11a formed in a flat shape so that an image without distortion appears when the irradiation light is irradiated.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. In addition, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of a deep part and a shallow part. The shallow portion is realized by a stepped portion E121a formed at the peripheral portion of the front screen support base E12 and a stepped portion E121b formed linearly at both ends in the short direction passing through the center portion.

  Accordingly, the front screen member E11 accommodated in the holding recess E121 is abutted and supported by the stepped portion E121a at the peripheral edge and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  Further, the front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 configured as described above are formed separately and then integrated by bonding with an adhesive. Thus, the front screen mechanism E1 is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to sink marks on the projection surface E11a.

  Note that the method for fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening may be employed.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 are each produced by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that can cause sink marks when injection molding is performed is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is coupled to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported on the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 15 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 is capable of rotating the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) with the intermediate position E22a as the rotation center.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 25, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint of the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture. Is set to On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint at the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side is inclined more forward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape when viewed from the side. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and in the slide groove E22b, a surface corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 is set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (distance between the two straight portions) is substantially equal to the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 contacts the upper end surface (surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end portion of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, and the intermediate position E22a and the slide member in the crank member E22. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

  As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force is applied in the direction in which the lower region of the crank member E22 is rotated, the rotation center position in the direction in which all components of this force are applied. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The motor shaft gear E24 is connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor E25. Thereby, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. As shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is an intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26 when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a one-degree-of-freedom two-joint link is formed in which the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface. When the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates about the intermediate position E22a, and the upper region of the crank member E22 rotates. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is in the stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, and gradually increases to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposure posture (FIG. 27). After the maximum speed is reached, the vehicle gradually decelerates and becomes the stop state 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are reached. Thus, the rotation can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failures and wear due to overloading of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

  As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 so that the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. Yes.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 made of a curved plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. And a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end.

  The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape that approximates the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface that is the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position. Further, the surface of the reel screen portion F11 is formed with a pattern at the peripheral edge, and the inner peripheral area of the peripheral edge is a projection surface. On the projection surface, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, an image can appear by irradiation of irradiation light.

  One end portions of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a protruding portion (not shown). The protruding portion protrudes in the horizontal direction outside the reel screen support portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to serve as a rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The gaming machine is a so-called pachislot machine. A gaming machine is a gaming machine that uses a gaming medium such as a card storing information on gaming value assigned to or attached to a player in addition to coins, medals, gaming balls or tokens, In the following description, it is assumed that medals are used.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. The direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as the front-rear direction or the thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as the left-right direction or the width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the up-down direction or the height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the appearance of the gaming machine 1 is configured by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD disposed at the upper front of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD disposed at the lower front of the cabinet G. have.

  In addition, two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction are formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire gaming machine 1, and the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 33, the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G so as to be replaceable. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping apparatus having an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. .

  Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. For example, the position (projection distance or angle) of an object that is a screen described later is used. Etc.) and an image corresponding to the production information generated based on the shape is projected, thereby enabling an advanced and powerful production.

  The display unit A has a housing A1 with an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 includes a projector cover B1 of the irradiation light device B and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. Although details will be described later, the screen casing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen casing C10.

(Display unit A: Irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 34, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward, and a screen that is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and that has the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 disposed obliquely downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: Irradiation light device B: Projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is disposed at the rear part in the cabinet G. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 arranged horizontally. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is disposed so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Further, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are disposed on the right and left sides of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The exhaust heat mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct through which air is circulated and a fan that sends out air. By blowing out the air to the rear, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forced to the rear. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 30, a vent hole G3a of the cabinet G is arranged in the air flow direction in the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the exhaust heat mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly exhaust the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with air to the outside through the vent hole G3a.

(Display unit A: Irradiation light device B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 34, a mirror mechanism B3 is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 (the emission direction of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 35, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 accommodated in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 36, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a plate shape with a rectangular front surface. At each corner portion of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface with the angle adjustment hole B311 as a center. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, a mirror holding part B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding part B313 is formed in the center part, and is formed in a size that does not overlap with the angle adjustment hole B311 and the attachment hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding part B313. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and attachment holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and the attachment holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 and the attachment holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding part B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding part B313 and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is disposed so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding part B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11, and this screw passes through the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws that pass through the angle adjustment holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are provided on the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. Screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

  When the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screwing with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344, so that the optical mirror is interposed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is sandwiched. As described above, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by rotating the screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner portions of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance to B3, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 can be finely adjusted.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding unit B11, so that the reflector holding unit B11 and the mirror holder B31 Is sandwiched between. And the screw penetrated from angle adjustment hole B111 of reflector holding part B11 has penetrated the spring concerned. Thereby, even if the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11 by the biasing force of the spring. It can be prevented that the screw head protrudes from the angle adjustment hole B111 and the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw is destroyed.

(Display unit A: Irradiation light device B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 38, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are accommodated in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 that is inclined upward from the rear to the front at the front part thereof. As shown in FIG. 39, the projector cover B1 is arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall part B12 arranged horizontally, the reflector holding part B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall part B12, and the upper wall part B12. Side wall portions B13 and B13. As for upper wall part B12, the front part protrudes ahead rather than cabinet G (refer to Drawing 33). At the center of the front part of the upper wall part B12, a reflector holding part B11 is formed so as to protrude forward, and the above mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the protrusion so that the angle can be adjusted. Yes.

  Moreover, side wall part B13 * B13 has protrusion part B131 protruded in the left-right horizontal direction from the lower end part. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet G. The distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the first protrusions B131a protruding from the side walls B13, B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the opening of the cabinet G. On the other hand, the second projecting portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the rear space from the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet G. The distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the second protrusions B131b protruding from the side walls B13, B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the space part behind the cabinet G. That is, the side walls B13 and B13 are formed such that the distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the second protrusion B131b is larger than the distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the first protrusion B131a. Thus, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet G.

  Further, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at the tip of the second protrusion B131b. When the projector cover B1 is fixed to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 33), screws are screwed into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 through the screw holes B131C. Further, since the projecting portions B131 project in the horizontal direction from the lower end portions of the side wall portions B13 and B13, the projecting portions B131 and the side wall portions B13 are provided with concave portions from the front ends thereof at both end portions of the projector cover B1. B132 is continuously formed rearward.

  As shown in FIG. 40, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, a space BS is defined by the recess B132 and the cabinet G. Further, the shape of the upper wall portion B12 and the side wall portion B13 of the projector cover B1 is such that the distance between the lower end portion of each side wall portion B13 and the front end portion of the second protruding portion B131b protruding from the lower end portion is the first. 2 The front part is configured to be larger than the rear part of the protruding part B131b (see FIG. 39). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes larger than the rear space. When the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the front space of the space BS are at least partially overlapped when viewed from above. This space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the gaming machine 1 on the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when installing and fixing a gaming machine on an island facility, a fixed plate member OC of the island facility is disposed above the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G. The space BS is a space in which nails extending from the plate member G42 attached to the upper surface wall G4 to the fixed plate member OC of the island facility can be driven from the cabinet G.

  As described above, even when the display unit A is accommodated in the cabinet G with almost no gap between the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 and the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G, the display unit A A space BS for installing and fixing work on the island facility is secured between the cabinet G and the cabinet G. As a result, it becomes possible for an operator to perform a nailing operation using the space BS from the front side of the cabinet G where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, and as a result, the display unit A can be damaged. In the state where the display unit A is accommodated in the cabinet G, the gaming machine 1 can be nailed to the fixed plate member OC of the island facility.

  Further, the nail for nailing the gaming machine 1 and the fixed plate member OC is driven not to the metal cabinet G but to the wooden plate member G42 which is softer than the cabinet. Can be installed on island facilities.

  As a modification, the material of the plate member G42 is not limited to wood, and various materials can be adopted as long as the material is a soft member softer than the cabinet G. Further, the fixing method of the gaming machine 1 to the island facility is not limited to nail fastening, and various fixing methods such as screwing can be employed.

(Display unit A: Irradiation light device B: Perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 42, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal having a plurality of holes formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed to be substantially evenly distributed over the entire surface of the porous plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set such that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. The perforated plate B15 has a front side upper part B15a, a middle side inclined part B15b, and a rear side lower part B15c. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined part B15b is formed by being bent obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper part B15a. The lower part B15c is formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined part B15b.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall parts B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from the lower side with the upper part B15a and cover the lower part with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. Yes. Further, the inclined portion B15b is disposed so as to surround the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 when viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 38, the inclination angle of the inclined portion B15b (inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane) is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface B2a1. A front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

  As will be described in detail later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position that is disposed on the upper side that is a standby posture that prohibits the appearance of an image by irradiation light, and a lower side that is an exposure posture that permits the appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is in an inclined posture that is close to and substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the porous plate B15, and air present in the space portion reaches the porous plate B15 without flow resistance, By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and increase the cooling efficiency.

  Further, the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the player's line-of-sight position is the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the screen device C. Even if the irradiation light device B is looked up from the position of the line of sight, the inside of the irradiation light device B is not visually observed by the perforated plate B15.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 44, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. For example, as described above, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through the screw holes B131C formed in the protrusion B131 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the display unit A can unitarily handle the irradiation light device B and the screen device C as a unit.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen casing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for causing an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have different shapes from each other in order to diversify the image expression. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. Note that the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are larger and heavier in the front screen mechanism E1. For this reason, when the front screen mechanism E1 is driven, a larger driving force is required than when the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven. The detailed structures of the screen mechanisms D, E1, and F1 and the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10)
As described above, the screen device C includes the box-shaped screen casing C10. As shown in FIG. 45, the screen casing C10 includes a horizontally disposed bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected on the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected on the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. Accordingly, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper side where the irradiation light device B is located are formed. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen casing C10 are separately molded into a predetermined shape, and predetermined functional parts such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. Has been. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be shared as a whole, it is possible to share the unit for each plate member of the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4. In addition, since the plate member can be partially exchanged, the specification can be easily changed for each model of the gaming machine 1. The functional components positioned and arranged with respect to each plate member will be described in detail later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape that is rectangular when viewed from above. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, there is a central placement portion C11 disposed at the center, and a right placement portion C12 and a left placement portion C13 disposed in the left-right direction around the center placement portion C11. Yes. These placement portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The center placement portion C11 places the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 mounts the right movable body base C5 so as to be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left placement portion C13 places the left movable body base C6 so that the left movable body base C6 can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6. In addition, a pattern is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness on the side surface in the left-right direction of each of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6. That is, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 also function as a decorative member. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 can be positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip end portion is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side C14. When the display unit A is assembled while being mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 33) of the cabinet G, the front side C14 is brought into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1 to move backward in the cabinet G. It is possible to perform positioning. The display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet G by being screwed to the front side of the cabinet G through the through hole C141 of the front side C14. It is possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen casing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The opening portions C21 and C31 for operation are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction coincides with the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is assembled in the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. . Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet G releases the screw fastening of the display unit A to the cabinet G and removes the screw. Then, the hand is extended into the cabinet G, the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A are held with both hands, and the display unit A is taken out of the cabinet G. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, a hand is reached from one operation opening C21 of the detached display unit A into the screen device C, and the crank gear E21 that is visible in the horizontal direction is rotated from the operation opening C21. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, the hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and the operation opening C21 is reached. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 can be unlocked without removing the display unit A from the cabinet G.

  Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged by the motor housing portion C22. Further, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 respectively include a first support portion C23 that rotatably supports the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 in the front screen drive mechanism E2, and an intermediate gear E23 in the front screen drive mechanism E2. A second support portion C24 that rotatably supports the shaft member E3 that is the gear shaft is formed. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are disposed between the right movable body base C5 and the right side plate C2 in the left-right direction. Further, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is disposed between the left movable body base C6 and the left side plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 48, the back plate C4 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a recess CO for positioning and arranging the relay board CK is formed in the lower part of the back surface thereof. The relay substrate CK is a relay for relaying wiring (not shown) between various functional components (for example, the projector mechanism B2) in the display unit A and various functional components (such as the main control substrate MS) other than the display unit A. It is a substrate.

  An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is disposed at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is incorporated into the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G. After that, reaching out from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 visible in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

  Further, the back plate C4 is disposed in front of the rear ends of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. Thus, as shown in FIG. 49, when the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3 of the screen device C, and The space GS is defined by the back plate C4. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. As a result, even if the relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, the space GS can prevent the relay board CK from interfering with the back wall G3 of the cabinet G.

  A through hole G11 is formed at a position facing the space GS in the intermediate support plate G1. The through hole G11 is formed so that the opening surrounds the relay substrate CK in a top view. The relay board CK is arranged so that the connector CK1 to which wiring from a device (main control board MS or the like) housed in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected faces the through hole G11. Thereby, the electrical connection between the relay substrate CK of the display unit A and the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is made by inserting the wiring from the device accommodated in the lower space through the through hole G11. This can be done by connecting to CK1.

  Thus, the relay substrate CK is arranged outside the screen device C, thereby facilitating the wiring work and making it unnecessary to secure an installation space for the relay substrate CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the screen device C is expanded. Moreover, it becomes easy to discharge | emit the heat | fever which generate | occur | produces from the relay board | substrate CK outside the apparatus through the vent hole G3a formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. FIG.

  Moreover, the wiring which connects the relay board CK arrange | positioned in the upper space of the cabinet G, and the apparatus accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through-hole G11 formed in the rear part of the intermediate support plate G1. Therefore, it becomes easy to arrange wiring behind various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, the degree of freedom in wiring can be increased.

  Since the relay board CK is arranged at the rear part in the cabinet G, it is difficult for light to reach the relay board CK. As a result, it is difficult to connect the wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. It can be. Therefore, in order to facilitate the connection of the wiring from the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes below the intermediate support plate G1 through the through hole G11. It may be configured to protrude. Further, the color of the connector CK1 may be a color with high light reflectance (for example, white).

  As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned on the right side plate C2, and the gear shaft E21a and the shaft member E3 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are positioned on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay substrate CK is positioned with respect to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the drive mechanisms F2 and E2, and the relay board CK are positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2 and C3, and the back plate C4, and are different from each other. It is positioned on the plate. Therefore, even if the display unit A as a whole cannot be shared between models, it can be shared between models on a board basis. As a result, the display unit can be manufactured at a lower cost than the case where the display unit is manufactured for each model.

  Moreover, since each board C1-C4 of the screen housing | casing C10 is connected by screw fastening, it can cancel | release connection of each board C1-C4 by loosening a screw. That is, the screen casing C10 is assembled so that the plates C1 to C4 can be replaced. As a result, the functional parts of the display unit can be exchanged on a plate-by-plate basis. Therefore, it is possible to change the specifications of the display unit A while reusing functional parts that are not subject to exchange of the display unit A. .

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right movable body base C5 is disposed on the left inner side of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Further, the left movable body base C6 is disposed on the right inner side of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A. As a result, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, which are decorative members, can make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the drive mechanisms E2 and F2. As a result, the beauty of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Moreover, since the recessed part for arrange | positioning the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 is formed in the baseplate C1, it becomes possible to position these at the baseplate C1 easily.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen position relationship)
As shown in FIG. 50, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 51, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided to be rotatable between a front exposure position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that an image of the irradiated light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes the projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set so that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists ahead of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that an image by irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the axial direction of the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the axis direction of the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 coincide with the left-right direction. The operation ranges by rotation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 partially overlap each other. Therefore, when one screen of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed in the overlapping range where the operation ranges overlap, the other screen is brought into contact with the screen.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is made shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The front standby position is disposed outside the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel standby position is disposed outside the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, each of the front standby position and the reel standby position is arranged in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range.

  On the other hand, the front exposure position is disposed within the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel exposure position is disposed within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, each of the front exposure position and the reel exposure position is disposed in an overlapping range in the operation range. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be disposed at the reel exposed position. Further, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be disposed at the front exposure position.

  The rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 are set so that the overlapping of the operation ranges due to the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is minimized. It is different. Specifically, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is set higher than the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. Specifically, the rotation center axis FG is disposed above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 disposed at the front exposure position. Thereby, since the distance between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG can be shortened, the operation range between the front standby position and the front exposure position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced. By reducing the operation range in this way, it is possible to increase the size of the front screen mechanism E1 even in a limited space in the display unit A. Note that both the rotation center axis FG and the rotation center axis RG are arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is present at the standby position. Thereby, interference at the time of rotation of screen mechanism E1 * F1 is prevented. Details of operations of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 by screw fastening. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection part D1, a right reflection part D2, a left reflection part D3, and a lower reflection part D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are projection surfaces onto which the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. Yes.

  In addition, if the fixed screen mechanism D is a structure which has a reflective surface of several different angles with respect to the optical axis of irradiation light, it may have a reflective part of 2 surfaces, 3 surfaces, 5 surfaces, for example, Or you may provide the reflection part of the curved or circular-arc-shaped reflective surface in which the curvature center point located in the front side becomes an angle continuously different with respect to an optical axis.

  The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface opposed to the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed in the upper front portion of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. It is set to be. The right side reflection part D2 and the left side reflection part D3 are joined to the right side part and the left side part of the front reflection part D1, and are arranged symmetrically about the front reflection part D1. The right side reflection part D2 and the left side reflection part D3 are arranged such that the width between the front end parts is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflection part D1. As a result, the right-side reflection part D2 and the left-side reflection part D3 make the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface easier to face in the direction of the front reflection part D1, so that a part of the irradiation light appears in front while the image by the irradiation light appears. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflection part D1. In addition, with respect to the lower surface reflection portion D4, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface is easily directed toward the front reflection portion D1, a part of the irradiation light is caused to appear in the direction of the front reflection portion D1 while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D described above, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, which will be described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting surface of the irradiation light is made smaller than the amount of light reflected by the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D is prevented from being blurred due to light mixing due to irregular reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the other reflection parts D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the lightness of the front reflection part D1. In this case, since the reflection to the front reflection part D1 of the irradiation light in the other reflection parts D2, D3, and D4 can be reduced, white blur can be reduced while causing an image to appear strongly in the front reflection part D1.

As brightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as other colors can be expressed by relative values with white as a reference.

  The lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If it is lower than the brightness of a surface, it will not specifically limit. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value lower by about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) than the brightness of the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. What is necessary is just to make it black rather than the color of the coating material apply | coated to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the coating material applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1. What added the black pigment to the coating material apply | coated to a base material should just be used.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only a white pigment among white pigment and black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both a white pigment and a black pigment may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment (for example, 5 to 25% (or 5% to 25%) (or the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is higher than the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). In addition, as a coating material applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, a conventionally known screen coating material can be appropriately employed and can be adjusted according to a screen type (for example, a diffusion type or a reflection type). .

  Note that the black pigment is not dispersed in the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but before the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is molded. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored to lower the brightness of the base material itself.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing irregular reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as peripheral walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4), and the interior of the screen casing C10. It is desirable that the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) disposed in the panel is also lowered. The brightness of these members is desirably lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen for the surrounding wall. The lower the better. That is, it is desirable that the color of the surrounding wall is closer to black.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 54, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support base E12 having patterns such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying screen paint to a thin flat panel. Thereby, as for the front screen member E11, the projection surface E11a is formed in flat shape.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. In addition, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of a deep part and a shallow part. The shallow portion is realized by a stepped portion E121a formed at the peripheral portion of the front screen support base E12 and a stepped portion E121b formed linearly at both ends in the short direction passing through the center portion.

  Accordingly, the front screen member E11 accommodated in the holding recess E121 is abutted and supported by the stepped portion E121a at the peripheral edge and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  Further, the front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 configured as described above are formed separately and then integrated by bonding with an adhesive. Thus, the front screen mechanism E1 is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to sink marks on the projection surface E11a.

  Note that the method for fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening may be employed.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 are each produced by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that can cause sink marks when injection molding is performed is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. 45 and 46, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position (when in the standby posture), the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end portion toward the front end portion. It is configured as such. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2.

  As described above, the posture of the front screen mechanism E1 when placed at the front standby position is set to an inclined posture in which the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end portion toward the front end portion, thereby being parallel to the horizontal plane. Compared to the case of the posture, it is possible to suppress the irradiation light irradiated by the irradiation light device B from being obstructed by the front screen mechanism E1. Thereby, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when placed at the front standby position can be brought closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be enlarged even in a limited space of the display unit A. In addition, since the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has the inclined surface B2a1 as described above, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when placed at the front standby position is determined with respect to the projector mechanism B2. You can get closer. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be further increased in size.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has an upper end (one end) located at the upper position when the front end is disposed at the front exposed position (in the exposed posture) on the back of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. It is connected to.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the crank member E22 is pivotally supported by the right movable body base C5 (see FIG. 45) at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 can rotate the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) with the intermediate position E22a as the rotation center. The intermediate position E22a coincides with the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1.

  As described above, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 disposed at the front exposure position. The crank member E22 has an upper end portion (one end portion) connected to a position where the upper end portion (one end portion) becomes an upper portion when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position (in the exposure posture) on the rear surface of the right end portion. . With the above configuration, the operation range between the front standby position and the front exposure position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced, so that the front screen mechanism E1 can be increased in size.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 57, the center line in the upper region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint of the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture. Is set to On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint at the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side is inclined more forward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape when viewed from the side. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and in the slide groove E22b, a surface corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 is set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (distance between the two straight portions) is substantially equal to the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 contacts the upper end surface (surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end portion of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. As shown in FIG. 55, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right side plate C2. The gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 has a line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b between the intermediate position E22a and the slide member E26 in the crank member E22 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point.

  Thereby, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force is applied in a direction in which the lower region of the crank member E22 is rotated, the gear shaft E21a is applied in the direction in which all components of the force are applied. Exists and acts as a fixed end, so that the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is pivotally supported by the right movable body base C5 and the second support portion C24 of the right side plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The motor shaft gear E24 is connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor E25. Thereby, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. As shown in FIGS. 58 and 60, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, a line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b is slid from the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line connecting the center point of the member E26, the tangential direction of the turning trajectory is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26 when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a one-degree-of-freedom two-joint link is formed in which the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface. When the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates about the intermediate position E22a, and the upper region of the crank member E22 rotates. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the main control board MS.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is in the stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, and gradually increases to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposure posture (see FIG. 59). ), The vehicle gradually decelerates and becomes a stop state 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are reached. Thus, the rotation can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failures and wear due to overloading of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

  As shown in FIG. 61, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically.

  The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are coupled via a shaft member E3.

  Specifically, the shaft member E3 extends in the left-right direction, and intermediate gears E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected to both ends thereof. Further, the shaft member E3 is disposed in a space between the back plate C4 and the fixed screen mechanism D behind the fixed screen mechanism D (see FIG. 53).

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. As the motor shaft gear E24 rotates, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the shaft member E3 rotate together. Then, the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, whereby the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated about the rotation center axis FG, and the front standby position is set. It moves between front exposure positions.

  As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B by the shaft member E3, the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is applied to the two crank members E22. It becomes possible to transmit evenly. Therefore, compared with the case where these intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3, it is possible to prevent the driving load from being concentrated on one of the two crank members E22. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B arranged on the right side of the fixed screen mechanism D, the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D is not hindered.

  In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as the rotation shaft of the front screen mechanism E1. For this reason, the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of the shaft member E3 increases, and it becomes possible to arrange | position the shaft member E3 so that arrangement | positioning of other supplements, such as the fixed screen mechanism D, may not be inhibited. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the extra items while maintaining the rotation range and size of the front screen mechanism E1 at a desired level.

  Further, since the shaft member E3 is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D, the light projected on the fixed screen mechanism D is not hindered by the shaft member E3. Further, since the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, compared with the case where it is disposed rearward of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Thus, the length between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG (the length of the crank member E22) can be shortened. For this reason, even when the space in the cabinet G is limited and the display unit A cannot be enlarged, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained to a desired level.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is formed of a curved flat plate. The reel screen mechanism F1 has a circular arc shape when viewed from the side, which is curved in a shape that approximates the rotation direction. On the surface of the reel screen mechanism F1, a pattern is formed on the peripheral edge, and an inner peripheral area of the peripheral edge is a projection surface F1a. This projection surface F1a is an arcuate surface that protrudes upstream in the irradiation direction of light from the projector mechanism B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position. In addition, a pattern is formed on the rear surface on the rotation center side in the reel screen mechanism F1. The pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between the reel standby position and the reel exposure position by the driving force of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, the projection surface F1a can appear an image by irradiation with irradiation light.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21 and F21, an arcuate gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 and F21 is connected to the back surface of the right end portion and the back surface of the left end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1. Further, support shafts F21a and F21a projecting outward in the left-right direction are formed on the outer surfaces of the other end portions of the two arm members F21 and F21. These support shafts F21a and F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. Thereby, the two arm members F21 can be rotated about the support shafts F21a and F21a as the rotation center. The support shafts F21a and F21a coincide with the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The arcuate gear F22 is fixed to the distal end portion of the support shaft F21a arranged on the right side of the two support shafts F21a and F21a. A motor shaft gear F23 is meshed with the arcuate gear F22. The motor shaft gear F23 is connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor F24. The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the main control board MS.

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven under the control of the main control board MS, the motor shaft gear E24 rotates. As the motor shaft gear E24 rotates, the arcuate gear F22 rotates. Then, the arm member F21 is rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the arcuate gear F22, whereby the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated about the rotation center axis RG, and the reel standby position and the reel exposure position. Will work between.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Sensor mechanism CS)
As described above, the operation ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 partially overlap each other (see FIG. 53). Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different drive mechanisms. That is, the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is not linked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to grasp the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from the origin position with the front standby position as the origin position. ing. Similarly, the reel standby position is set as the origin position, and the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is grasped based on the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from the origin position.

  However, if the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not normally performed, or if the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is manually moved while the power is shut off, the main control is performed. The substrate MS cannot grasp the exact positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, they may interfere with each other.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism CS for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, the main control board MS performs a return operation for returning the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the origin position (standby position) based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism CS.

  The crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a light shielding portion E22d in the upper region and a light shielding portion E22e in the lower region. A light shielding portion F1b is formed on the rear surface of the right end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The sensor mechanism CS has three sensors CS1 to CS3. These sensors CS1 to CS3 are transmissive optical sensors, and are formed in a substantially U shape as shown in FIG. One end of the U-shaped open side is a light emitting unit that emits light, and the other end is a light receiving unit that receives light. These sensors CS1 to CS3 output a Low signal to the main control board MS when the light receiving unit receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit, and the light emitted from the light emitting unit is blocked and the light receiving unit When light cannot be received, a Hi signal is output to the main control board MS.

  The sensor CS1 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 exists at the front standby position. The sensor CS1 is fixedly disposed on the rotation locus of the light shielding portion E22d in the crank member E22. Specifically, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position (see FIG. 65), the sensor CS1 sandwiches the light shielding portion E22d between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, and the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby state. When it does not exist at the position (see FIG. 66), the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit are fixedly disposed at a position where the light shielding unit E22d is not sandwiched. Accordingly, the sensor CS1 outputs a Hi signal to the main control board MS when the front screen mechanism E1 exists at the front standby position, and a Low signal when it does not exist at the front standby position.

  The sensor CS2 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 is present at the front exposure position. This sensor CS2 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light shielding portion E22e in the crank member E22. Specifically, when the front screen mechanism E1 exists at the front exposure position (see FIG. 66), the sensor CS2 sandwiches the light shielding portion E22e between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, and the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position. When not present (see FIG. 65), the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion are fixedly arranged at positions where the light-shielding portion E22e is not sandwiched. Therefore, the sensor CS2 outputs a Hi signal to the main control board MS when the front screen mechanism E1 exists at the front exposure position, and outputs a Low signal when it does not exist at the front exposure position.

  The sensor CS3 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 is present at the reel standby position. The sensor CS3 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light shielding portion F1b in the reel screen mechanism F1. Specifically, the sensor CS2 sandwiches the light shielding portion F1b between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion when the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position (see FIG. 65), and the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position. When not present (see FIG. 67), the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part are fixedly arranged at positions where the light-shielding part F1b is not sandwiched. Accordingly, the sensor CS3 outputs a Hi signal to the main control board MS when the reel screen mechanism F1 exists at the reel standby position, and outputs a Low signal when it does not exist at the reel standby position.

  In the above configuration, the detection signals from the sensors CS1 and CS2 indicate whether the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, the front exposure position, or an intermediate position between them. Yes. The detection signal from the sensor CS3 indicates whether the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at a position other than the reel standby position or the reel standby position.

  Further, as described above, since the front standby position and the reel standby position are arranged in the overlapping range in the operation range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposure position, The reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be disposed at the reel exposure position. For this reason, when the sensor CS2 detects that the front screen is present at the front exposed position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not present at the reel exposed position.

(Operation control of front screen mechanism E1)
Next, prior to describing the return-to-origin operation, operation control during normal operation of each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. The main control board MS controls the drive motor E25 to rotate the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposure position. The turning operation of the front screen mechanism E1 is executed on condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is present at the reel standby position.

  As mentioned earlier, the main control board MS grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 with the front standby position as the origin position and the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from this origin position. For example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the number of steps is 210, it can be recognized that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position. In this embodiment, when the number of steps is 20-21, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal, and when the number of steps is 190-191, the detection of the sensor CS2 The signal switches between a Hi signal and a Low signal.

  The main control board MS controls the rotation direction and rotation speed of the front screen mechanism E1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and pulse width of the drive motor E25. Hereinafter, in the drive motor E25, the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is in the positive direction, and the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position is in the negative direction. And

  FIG. 69 shows an example of a control sequence of the drive motor E25 when the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated from the front standby position to the front exposure position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor E25 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the previous excitation phase (procedure 1), and then the drive motor E25 has a pulse width of 2.2 ms in the + direction. To drive 210 steps (procedure 2). As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 rotates from the front standby position to the front exposure position. Thereafter, the drive motor E25 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the previous excitation phase (procedure 3). The above is the control sequence for rotating the front standby position to the front exposure position. The control sequence for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is a sequence in which the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 according to the procedure 2 in the control sequence of FIG. do it.

(Operation control of reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, normal operation control of the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. The main control board MS controls the drive motor F24 to rotate the reel screen mechanism F1 between the reel standby position and the reel exposure position. This rotation operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is executed on condition that the front screen mechanism E1 is present at the front standby position.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the main control board MS uses the reel standby position as the origin position, and grasps the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 by the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from this origin position. For example, when the number of steps is 140, it can be grasped that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps is 1-2, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal.

  The main control board MS controls the rotation direction and rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and pulse width of the drive motor F24. Hereinafter, in the drive motor F24, the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is positive, and the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position is negative. And

  FIG. 71 shows an example of a control sequence of the drive motor F24 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the previous excitation phase (procedure 1), and then the drive motor F24 is set to 8 in the positive direction with a pulse width of 4 ms. The number of steps is driven (procedure 2). Thereby, the rotation of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is started, and the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is accelerated. Thereafter, the drive motor F24 is driven 122 steps in the positive direction with a pulse width of 3 ms (procedure 3). Thereafter, the drive motor F24 is driven 122 steps in the positive direction with a pulse width of 5 ms (procedure 4). Thereby, the rotational speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is decelerated. Then, the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the previous excitation phase (procedure 5). The above is the control sequence for rotating the reel from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. In the control sequence for rotating the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position, the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 according to steps 2 to 4 in the control sequence of FIG. A sequence may be used.

  As described above, the main control board MS drives the front screen mechanism E1 on the condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position, and the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position. Since the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven on the condition, interference when the screen mechanisms are rotated can be prevented.

(Origin return operation of front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, the origin return operation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. This home position return operation is executed at a predetermined timing such as when the power is cut off.

  Here, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches from the Hi signal to the Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is driven in the + direction by several steps from the origin position in the positive direction (see FIG. 68). Therefore, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 may not coincide with the origin position. Similarly, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 may not coincide with the origin position. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the origin return operation related to the front screen mechanism E1 is performed, and even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the reel screen mechanism F1 The origin return operation is performed.

  Further, the main control board MS is capable of executing the four basic operations of operations 1 to 4 by driving the drive motor F24 and the drive motor E25 in the origin return operation. Operations 1 and 2 are operations related to the front screen mechanism E1, and operations 3 and 4 are operations related to the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The operation 1 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal. Specifically, the operation 1 is an operation of driving the drive motor E25 in the + direction by about 30 to 40 steps. Thereby, the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

  The operation 2 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is a Low signal. Specifically, the operation 2 is an operation in which the drive motor E25 is driven in the negative direction, and is stopped by driving 20 steps after the signal output from the sensor CS1 is switched from the Low signal to the Hi signal. As mentioned earlier, when the number of steps of the drive motor E25 is 20-21 when the front standby position is the origin position, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing this operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 can be reliably returned to the origin position.

  The operation 3 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal. Specifically, this is an operation of driving the drive motor F24 in the + direction by about 10 to 20 steps. Thereby, the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

  The operation 4 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is a Low signal. Specifically, the operation 4 is an operation in which the drive motor F24 is driven in the negative direction, and the signal output from the sensor CS3 is driven and stopped by one step after the signal is switched from the Low signal to the Hi signal. As mentioned earlier, when the number of steps of the drive motor F24 is 1-2 when the reel standby position is set to the origin position, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing this operation 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the origin position.

  As shown in FIG. 72, since the sensor mechanism CS has three sensors CS1 to CS3, there are eight combinations of detection states of these sensors CS1 to CS3 in total. Here, since the front screen mechanism E1 is not disposed at the front standby position and the front exposure position at the same time, of the eight types of sensor states, the two types of sensor CS1 and sensor CS2 both output Hi signals. In the sensor state (state 1 and state 2), an abnormality such as a failure of the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 has occurred. Accordingly, when both the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 output the Hi signal, the main control board MS determines that an abnormality has occurred, and notifies the abnormality by sound or video through a speaker, a monitor, or the like.

  In the memory of the main control board MS, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen according to six sensor states (states 3 to 8) excluding the above two sensor states among the eight sensor states of the sensor mechanism CS. Six types of driving procedures for the mechanism F1 are stored. These six types of driving procedures are determined so that the screen mechanisms do not interfere as much as possible. Hereinafter, a driving procedure according to each of the six types of sensor states will be described.

  When the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS3 output a Hi signal and the sensor CS2 outputs a Low signal (state 3), both the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are out of the operating range of the other screen mechanism. Is arranged. Accordingly, in the driving procedure according to the state 3, the main control board MS first performs the operations 1 and 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 3 and 4.

  When the sensor CS1 outputs a Hi signal and the sensor CS2 and the sensor CS3 output a Low signal (state 4), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed outside the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel The screen mechanism is disposed at a reel exposure position or an intermediate position between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. Here, when the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1 is outside the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1, the range is on the reel standby position side (non-overlapping range), and when the operation range is within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1, it is on the reel exposure position side. It is divided into two ranges: a range (overlapping range). The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. For this reason, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the intermediate position, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be disposed within an overlapping range that is within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 4, the main control board MS first performs the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. Then, the operation | movement 1 and the operation | movement 2 are performed continuously, and the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to an origin position.

  When the sensor CS2 and the sensor CS3 output a Hi signal and the sensor CS1 outputs a Low signal (state 5), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed within the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and The reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Accordingly, in the driving procedure according to the state 5, the main control board MS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 3 and 4.

  In the sensor state (state 6) in which the sensor CS2 outputs a Hi signal and the sensors CS1 and CS3 output a Low signal, the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, and the reel screen mechanism F1. Are arranged at intermediate positions. In this state 6, similarly to the above-described state 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be disposed within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 6, the main control board MS first performs the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. Thereafter, by performing the operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the origin position.

  When the sensor CS3 outputs the Hi signal and the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 output the Low signal (state 7), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the intermediate position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is It is disposed outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 7, the main control board MS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 3 and 4.

  When the sensors CS1 to CS3 are in a sensor state (state 8) that outputs a Low signal, the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the intermediate position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the intermediate position or the reel exposure position. Here, the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1 also falls outside the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and is on the front standby position side (non-overlapping range) and on the front exposure position side within the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1. The range (overlapping range) is divided into two ranges. The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the front exposure position and the front standby position. Therefore, in the state 8, the front screen mechanism E1 may be disposed within the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1. For this reason, there is a possibility that each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed within the operation range of each other. As a result, when one of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven, the other screen mechanism may move due to interference. Therefore, when the return operation is performed by driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 based only on the detection results of the sensors CS1 to CS3 at the start of the return operation, one of the screen mechanisms is returned to the origin position. It may not be possible.

  Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 8, the main control board MS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the main control board MS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal or a Low signal. When the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Low signal, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by performing the operation 4. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the operations 3 and 4 are continuously performed to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position.

  As described above, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is in the state 3 to 7, the screen mechanisms interfere with each other by driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 according to the driving procedure corresponding to each state. It is possible to return to the respective origin positions. Further, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is in the state 8, after the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the origin position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by the driving procedure according to the detection signal of the sensor CS3. Each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the origin position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the screen mechanisms from interfering with each other by appropriately driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 in the processing after the return operation.

  As a modified example, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is state 3, the main control board MS performs the operation 3 and the operation 4 continuously, thereby returning the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position, and then performing the operation 1 Further, the front screen mechanism E1 may be returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 2.

  When the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is state 8, the main control board MS first performs operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the main control board MS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal or a Low signal. When the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Low signal, the operation 2 is performed to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the front screen mechanism E1 may be returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 1 and 2.

  The sensors CS1 to CS3 are not limited to transmissive optical sensors, and various sensors such as contact sensors can be employed. In addition, the sensor mechanism CS does not necessarily need to include the three sensors CS1 to CS3. Detection of whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 exists at the front standby position, and the front screen mechanism E1 exists at the front exposed position. If it is possible to detect whether or not to perform the detection and whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 exists at the reel standby position, the sensor may be configured by one sensor.

(Cabinet G)
(Cabinet G: Medals supply mechanism MH)
As shown in FIG. 73A, a replenishment opening G31 that opens the atmosphere between the inside and the outside of the housing 2 is opened in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. The supply opening G31 is disposed at the center of the back wall G3. When an automatic circulation replenishing device (not shown) is laid on the installation island where the gaming machine 1 is installed, the screw in a state where the medal replenishment port P serving as a replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishing device is inserted into the replenishment opening G31. It is fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 73B, the medal replenishment port P inserted through the replenishment opening G31 extends to above the hopper mechanism HP. Thereby, the medal from the automatic circulation supply device can be supplied to the hopper mechanism HP.

  As shown in FIG. 73B, a medal replenishment mechanism MH is provided on the inner side of the housing 2 in the replenishment opening G31 through which the medal replenishment port P is inserted. The medal supply mechanism MH opens and closes the supply opening G31. That is, when the medal replenishment port P of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted through the replenishment opening G31, the replenishment opening G31 is released by the medal replenishment mechanism MH. Further, when the medal replenishment port P of the automatic circulation replenishing device is not inserted through the replenishment opening G31, the replenishment opening G31 is blocked by the medal replenishment mechanism MH. The medal supply mechanism MH will be specifically described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the medal supply mechanism MH includes a shielding member MH1 and a guide member MH2. The shielding member MH1 is slidable in the vertical direction by the guide member MH2, and can switch between a shielding state where the replenishment opening G31 is shielded and a released state where the replenishment opening G31 is exposed. .

  The shielding member MH1 has a flat plate portion MH11 and a protruding portion MH12. The flat plate portion MH11 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that can shield the supply opening G31 from the inside of the cabinet G of the housing 2. The flat plate portion MH11 has a screw hole MH13 in the upper portion and a screw hole MH14 in the lower portion. Thereby, the shielding member MH1 can be screwed and fixed to the back wall G3 in a shielding state where the replenishment opening G31 is shielded. The protrusion MH12 is formed so as to protrude vertically from the center of the upper edge of the flat plate portion MH11 toward the inside of the cabinet G.

  The guide member MH2 is formed in a rectangular ring shape along the edge of the shielding member MH1 in a shielding state where the replenishment opening G31 is shielded. The guide member MH2 is screwed and fixed to the back wall G3 so as to sandwich the shielding member MH1. Specifically, the guide member MH2 has an upper edge portion MH21, two side edge portions MH22 and MH22, and a lower edge portion MH23.

  The upper edge portion MH21 is formed along the outer side of the upper edge of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state. That is, the upper edge portion MH21 is adjacent to the upper side of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state, and restricts the movement of the shielding member MH1 in the vertical upward direction. The two side edge portions MH22 and MH22 are formed along the side edge of the shielding member MH1 in a state of being shielded vertically downward from the one end, with both ends of the upper edge portion MH21 as one end. That is, the two side edge portions MH22 and MH22 are adjacent to the side of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state, and restrict the movement of the shielding member MH1 to the side.

  The lower edge portion 23 is formed so as to connect the other ends of the two side edge portions MH22 and MH22. In the lower edge portion 23, a holding portion MH23a, a guide groove MH23b, and a screw hole MH23c are formed. The holding portion MH23a is a notch formed at the center of the upper surface of the lower edge portion 23, and is formed to have a width larger than the width of the protruding portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1. Thereby, when the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state is slid vertically downward, the protruding portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 is supported by the holding portion MH23a. That is, the shielding member MH1 is held in an open state that exposes the supply opening G31. Further, the holding part MH23a is formed to be thinner than the protruding length of the protruding part MH12. Therefore, since the protruding portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 protrudes from the holding portion MH23a, the protruding portion MH12 can be easily grasped and can be easily shifted from the open state to the shielded state.

  The guide groove MH23b is a groove that engages with the shielding member MH1 formed on the back wall G3 side, and the shielding member MH1 is slid in the vertical direction. The screw hole MH23c is formed at a position where it can be screwed and fixed to the screw hole MH14 when in the shielded state, and at a position where it can be screwed and fixed to the screw hole MH13 when it is in the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the medal replenishment port P is obliquely inserted into the replenishment opening G31. Above the medal supply port P, a scaler device SK is disposed. The scaler device SK includes a scaler substrate SK1 that processes position information input to the touch sensor panel disposed on the liquid crystal display panel surface, and a scaler substrate case SK2 on which the scaler substrate SK1 is installed. The scaler substrate case SK2 is a support member having a concave plate formed so as to surround the medal supply port P inclined in an oblique direction as a bottom surface. The scaler substrate SK1 is inclined and provided on such a scaler substrate case SK2.

(Hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 77, a hopper mechanism HP and an overflow bucket OF are disposed below the lower space of the cabinet G.

  The hopper mechanism HP is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate G91 in the cabinet G. This hopper mechanism HP has a structure that can accommodate a large amount of medals and discharge them one by one. The hopper mechanism HP pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number or when the settlement button is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper mechanism HP are discharged from the medal payout exit DD14.

  The overflow bucket OF stores medals overflowing from the hopper mechanism HP. The overflow bucket OF is disposed on the right side of the hopper mechanism HP when the inside of the cabinet G is viewed from the front. The overflow bucket OF is engaged with the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, and is configured to be detachable from the bottom plate G91.

(Configuration of hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 78, the hopper mechanism HP includes a bucket HP1 for storing a large number of medals, a base member HP2 to which the bucket HP1 is attached, and a payout unit (not shown) accommodated in the base member HP2. Yes.

  The payout unit has a function of paying out medals one by one with a fixed posture, and has a coin disk for paying out sequentially while rotating medals accumulated in the bucket HP1. The base member HP2 has a medal payout opening DD14. When the coin discs of the medal payout unit accumulated in the bucket HP1 are driven, they are discharged one by one from the medal payout outlet DD14.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the bucket HP1 has an upper end opening HP11 formed from a wall surface substantially perpendicular to the horizontal plane, and an inclined side wall HP12 that is continuously inclined to the upper end opening HP11 at a predetermined angle. doing. The upper end opening HP11 is formed in a substantially rectangular planar shape. A discharge guide HP13 that guides medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 to the outside of the bucket HP1 is provided at a corner portion in front of the upper end opening HP11. The discharge guide HP13 has an inclined surface that is inclined so as to become lower from the inner side to the outer side of the bucket HP1. The medals guided by the discharge guide HP13 are stored in the overflow bucket OF.

  The medal that is guided to the selector DD15 and collides with the discharge guide HP13 bounces toward the inclined side wall portion HP12 of the bucket HP1. At this time, if the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 does not reach a certain amount, the medals move in the bucket HP1 along the inclined side wall portion HP12. Thereby, medals can be uniformly accommodated in the bucket HP1.

  On the other hand, when the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 reaches a certain amount, the medals collide with the inclined surface of the discharge guide HP13 and bounce, collide with the medals stored in the bucket HP1 and discharge guide HP13. Return to the inclined surface. Then, the medal moves on the inclined surface of the discharge guide HP13 by its own weight and heads toward the overflow bucket OF.

  Further, guide pieces HP21 and HP22 that are continuously extended from the bottom surface of the hopper mechanism HP are provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP. Further, on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP, a connector HP41 connected to a connector G81 of a cabinet G described later is provided.

(Configuration of overflow bucket OF)
As shown in FIG. 78, the overflow bucket OF includes a storage body OF1 and a medal guide OF2.

  The storage body OF1 is formed in a rectangular box shape with an upper surface opened. The medal guide OF2 is configured to be detachable from the storage body OF1. This medal guide OF2 guides the medal guided from the discharge guide HP13 to the overflow bucket OF to the storage case body OF1, and prevents the medal from being biased to one side of the storage case body OF1.

(Coinguard HP30)
In this gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 79, a medal replenishing mechanism MH (corresponding to a replenishing port) for discharging a medal received from the outside is provided above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP.

  Here, there is a predetermined distance in the height direction between the medal supply mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to a hopper device). When a medal is supplied from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP, since there is a predetermined distance in the height direction, the medal falls, collides with the medal stored in the bucket HP1, and is moved outward by the momentum. It may be thrown out. In this case, most of them collide with the upper end opening HP11 of the hopper mechanism HP and remain in the bucket HP1. However, rarely, the medal may jump over the upper end opening HP11 and jump out of the bucket HP1.

If the medal jumps out of the bucket HP1, or if the medal falls to the side with the power supply device DE of the bottom plate G91 or the side with the overflow bucket OF, the lower door mechanism DD is opened and collected. do it. However, when a medal falls between the hopper mechanism HP and the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, it is necessary to remove the hopper mechanism HP.
Further, since the hopper mechanism HP and the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are electrically connected by a connector, if a metal medal touches a metal part of the connector, it causes a failure. End up.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, between the medal supply mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, the back wall G3 of the cabinet G (corresponding to the rear surface of the housing) and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. A coin guard HP30 (corresponding to a medal spill prevention member) is provided from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G to the edge of the bucket HP1 so as to fill a gap HPG between the rear wall G3 (see FIG. 80).

  As shown in FIGS. 78 and 81, the coin guard HP30 is provided at the corner on the back side of the upper end opening HP11 and has an L-shape when viewed from above. The L-shaped coin guard HP30 is formed of a first guard part HP301 facing the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and a second guard part HP302 facing the overflow bucket OF. Thus, the first guard part HP301 prevents the medal from dropping into the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, and the second guard part HP302 is an overflow bucket. The medal is prevented from falling to the OF (equivalent to auxiliary storage) side.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the first guard part HP301 and the second guard part HP302 of the coin guard HP30 are inclined so as to fall from the back wall G3 side of the cabinet G toward the bucket HP1 side. It has a surface HP301a. As shown in FIG. 81, two screw holes HP301c and HP301d that are screwed into the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are formed on the front surface of the coin guard HP30.

  According to the above configuration, since the coin guard HP30 is provided so as to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, the medal received from the medal supply mechanism MH Even if it is likely to overflow from HP1, it is possible to prevent entry into the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the overflowing medals from collecting in the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfering with the connector, the electronic device, and the movable member.

  Further, by forming the coin guard HP30 in an L shape, the second guard part HP302 can be disposed between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the hopper mechanism HP.

  The coin guard HP30 has inclined surfaces HP301a and HP301b. Thereby, even when a medal is placed on the coin guard HP30, the medal is inclined to the bucket HP1 side due to its own weight, so that the medal can be normally stored in the hopper mechanism HP. it can.

(Hopper guide mechanism HG)
As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the board HG1 constituting the hopper guide mechanism HG is positioned at the center of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G with a screw. As shown in FIG. 84, the substrate HG1 is a frame having an opening HG11 at the center, and guide rails HG12 and HG13 formed by bending both sides of the substrate HG1 in the vertical direction are formed. As shown in FIG. 83, on the front side of the substrate HG1, a lock member HG14 that is engaged with an engagement member (not shown) provided on the bottom of the hopper mechanism HP is fixed with a screw. In the back, a cabinet G-side connector G81 (corresponding to a housing-side connector) is arranged.

  The guide rails HG12 and HG13 are guided by the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP, so that the connector HP41 (see FIG. 85) provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to the connector G81 (hopper side connector). Equivalent).

  As shown in FIG. 84, the guide rails HG12 and HG13 are formed in a U shape by a lower portion HG123 and HG133, side surfaces HG122 and HG132, and an upper portion HG121 and HG131. Further, projecting portions HG124 and HG134 projecting in the vertical direction are formed above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. The protrusions HG124 and HG134, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, the side surfaces HG122 and HG132, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, and the substrate HG1 are integrally formed by bending a single plate.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the upper portion HG121 / HG131 has a front portion formed in a tapered shape.

  The protrusions HG124 and HG134 are formed so as to be disposed in front of the connector G81 on the cabinet G side in the upper part HG121 and HG131. The protrusions HG124 and HG134 are shorter in the depth direction than the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and are disposed on the back side of the upper portions HG121 and HG131.

  As shown in FIG. 84, on the back surface of the substrate HG1, pedestal plates HG151, HG152, and HG153 are formed that contact the bottom plate G91 and serve as the pedestal of the connector G81. Note that the base plates HG151, HG152, and HG153 are also formed by being bent integrally with the substrate HG1.

  As shown in FIG. 84, a planar space HG17 is provided on the front side of the substrate HG1 (the front side of the guide rails HG12 and HG13).

  As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on the side surface of the hopper mechanism HP are provided between the lower portions HG123 and HG133 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and the upper portions HG121 and HG131, respectively. The connector HP41 provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to the connector G81 by sliding to the back side of the cabinet G in a state of being sandwiched and engaged.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, for example, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on the side surface of the hopper mechanism HP is provided between the lower portions HG123 and HG133 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and the upper portions HG121 and HG131. When the hopper mechanism HP is slid to the back side of the cabinet G without being sandwiched between the upper parts HG121 and HG131, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 abut against the protrusions HG124 and HG134, The hopper mechanism HP is restricted from sliding farther than the protrusions HG124 and HG134. Further, the hopper mechanism HP in a state where the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are in contact with the projecting portions HG124 and HG134, as shown in FIG. 88, is the back surface of the lower door mechanism DD when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (FIG. 88 When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, it comes into contact with the hopper mechanism HP.

According to the above configuration, in order to electrically connect the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP to the connector G81 on the cabinet G side, when the hopper mechanism HP is slid and installed on the hopper guide mechanism HG, the both sides of the hopper mechanism HP are provided. When the pair of provided guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are not engaged with the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and are slid by mistake above the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the rails HG12 and HG13 and on the front side of the connector G81, the hopper mechanism HP is slid at an incorrect position, and the hopper mechanism HP contacts the connector G81. Can be prevented. That is, the hopper mechanism HP can be normally slid and installed inside the cabinet G.
Accordingly, the hopper mechanism HP is slid and installed at an incorrect position, and the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP is brought into contact with the connector G81 at an incorrect position, so that the connector G81 and the connector HP41 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, when the hopper mechanism HP is slid and installed on the bottom of the cabinet G, the pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP are connected to the upper portions HG121 and HG131 and the lower portions of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. If the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are not squeezed between the HG123 and HG133 and are slid and shifted above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 by mistake, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the portions HG121 and HG131, the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented from being slid and installed at an incorrect position. That is, the hopper mechanism HP can be normally slid and installed inside the cabinet G.

  Further, since a part of the upper part HG121 / HG131 of the guide rails HG12 / HG13 is tapered, when the hopper mechanism HP is guided to the guide rails HG12 / HG13, the upper part HG121 / HG13 of the guide rails HG12 / HG13 The HG 131 can be prevented from contacting the hopper mechanism HP.

  Further, the manufacturing process can be simplified by creating the lower portions HG123 and HG133, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and the projecting portions HG124 and HG134 of the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 with a single plate. .

  Further, since the protrusions HG124 and HG134 are located on the back side of the cabinet G, the hopper mechanism HP is not disturbed when temporarily placed around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparation stage for guiding the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13. Can be.

  Further, as a preparatory stage before guiding the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13 in the planar space HG17 provided in front of the substrate HG1 (before the guide rails HG12 and HG13), The hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed. Thereby, the hopper mechanism HP can be slid and installed on the hopper guide mechanism HG.

(Sheet metal BK)
As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a display unit A (corresponding to the rendering device) is provided in the upper space (corresponding to the upper part of the casing) of the cabinet G (corresponding to the casing). In addition, a power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to a hopper device) are provided at the bottom of the lower space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the lower part of the housing), and the rear side (cabinet) of the power supply device DE and hopper mechanism HP is provided. A sub-control device SS (corresponding to control means) is provided on the rear wall G3 side of G). That is, the hopper mechanism HP is disposed on the front side of the sub-control device SS. A sheet metal BK is installed between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub-control device SS. Further, a sub relay device SN is provided between the sub control device SS and the intermediate support plate G1. Above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, a medal replenishing mechanism MH (corresponding to a replenishing port) for replenishing metal medals from the outside is provided, and the medal is dropped from the medal replenishing mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the sheet metal BK is disposed above the corner on the back left side of the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Further, the sheet metal BK is disposed between the first facing surface BK1 facing the sub control device SS, the second facing surface BK2 facing the power supply device DE, the bottom surface of the sub control device SS, and the upper surface of the bucket HP1. A third facing surface BK3, a supporting surface BK4 protruding from the third facing surface BK3 and fixing the sheet metal BK to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G with screws, a fourth facing surface BK7 corresponding to the medal supply mechanism MH, and a sheet metal BK And a support surface BK7 that is fixed to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G with screws. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the sheet metal BK is formed by bending a single plate, and has a third opposing surface BK3 having a quadrangular shape that contacts the bottom surface of the sub-control device SS. A quadrangular support surface BK4 bent 90 ° downward on the back wall G3 side of the three opposing surfaces BK3, and a square support surface BK5 bent 90 ° downward on the power supply device DE side of the third counter surface BK3. A quadrangular first opposing surface BK1 bent upward 90 ° to the near side of the third opposing surface BK3 (a square notch BK12 is formed in the upper right of the front view), a first opposing surface BK1 A quadrangular second opposing surface BK2 bent by 90 ° toward the power supply device DE, and a quadrangular fourth opposing surface bent 90 ° to the rear wall G3 side by the medal supply mechanism MH of the first opposing surface BK1. BK6, the fourth facing surface BK6 A quadrangular support surface BK7 is formed on the back wall G3 by bending 90 ° in the direction of the medal supply mechanism MH. The sheet metal BK is screwed into the corresponding back wall G3 via a screw hole BK41 formed in the support surface BK4 and a screw hole BK71 formed in the support surface BK7. Thereby, the sub-control device SS is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the first facing surface BK1 of the sheet metal BK. Note that the sheet metal BK is made of metal, and may be similarly fixed to the metal back wall G3 via the support surface BK4.

  In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub-control device SS. That is, the support surface BK4 and the first facing surface BK1 are not in contact with the sub-control device SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub-control device SS. Further, a thin plate-like sub-relay device SN detachably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and a thin plate-like sub-control device SS detachably attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are shown in side view. It is arranged in a state that the L-shape is turned upside down.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub control device SS side, It is possible to prevent a medal from physically contacting the sub-control device SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented by the sheet metal BK.
Further, since the sub-control device SS is provided on the back side of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched between the back wall G3 and the sheet metal BK, the sub-control device SS must be removed from the cabinet G without removing the sheet metal BK. It cannot be removed. Thereby, the security for the sub-control device SS is enhanced.

  In addition, since the medal is dropped from the medal replenishment mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP, there are more opportunities for the medal to be played in the hopper mechanism HP, and the distance that the medal is played increases. Since the sheet metal BK is provided in between, even if the medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and greatly protrudes to the sub-control device SS side, the medal is physically contacted by the sheet metal BK to the sub-control device SS. Can be prevented. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals caused by dropping of medals can be prevented by the sheet metal BK.

(Lower door mechanism DD)
(Lower door lock mechanism and upper door lock mechanism)
As shown in FIG. 93, a lower door lock mechanism G51 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the lower door mechanism DD (corresponding to the lower door). Further, an upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to the upper door). The lower door lock mechanism G51 serves to lock the lower space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the lower portion of the housing) so as to maintain a closed state. The upper door lock mechanism G52 plays a role of locking so as to maintain a closed state with respect to the upper space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the upper portion of the housing).

(Lower door lock mechanism G51)
As shown in FIG. 94, the lower door locking mechanism G51 includes a locked portion G511 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the lower door mechanism DD, a locking portion G512 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G, Cylinder lock G513.

  The locked portion G511 has two rods to be locked G511a and G511b formed on both ends of a concave frame G511c at the upper and lower portions.

  The locking portion G512 has a long cylinder G5122, and a long locking plate G5121 that is slidably disposed in the vertical direction in the cylinder G5122.

  The locking plate G5121 has claw-shaped claw portions G5121a and G5121b that are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b. The claw portions G5121a and G5121b slide in the vertical direction in the cylinder G5122 in accordance with the sliding of the locking plate G5121, so that the locked bars inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the cylinder G5122 It locks with respect to G511a and G511b, or the lock is released. The locking plate G5121 has a spring that is biased upward.

  The claw portions G5121a and G5121b are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b when the locking plate G5121 is at a height position for locking the lower door mechanism DD, while the locking plate G5121 is locked to the lower door mechanism DD. Is set so that the locking to the locked rods G511a and G511b is released when the lock is lowered from the height position where the lock is released to the height position where the lock is released. In addition, the claw portions G5121a and G5121b are inclined at the tip end surfaces in an obliquely downward direction and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G511a and G511b.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the locking portion G512 has a lowering portion in the middle. The pulling portion enables the locking plate G5121 to be pulled downward as a key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and rotated. As a result, when the locking plate G5121 is lowered, the locking between the claw portions G5121a and G5121b and the locked rods G511a and G511b can be released.

(Upper door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 94, the upper door locking mechanism G52 includes a locked portion G521 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locking portion G522 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G. Have.

  The locked portion G521 has two rods to be locked G521a and G521b formed on both ends of a concave frame G521c at the upper and lower portions.

  The locking portion G522 has a long cylinder G5222 (corresponding to a locking cylinder) and a long locking plate G5221 (corresponding to a locking member) arranged so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the cylinder G5222. doing.

  The locking plate G5221 has claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b (corresponding to locking portions) that are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b. The claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked rods inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the tube G5222 by sliding up and down in the tube G5222 along with the sliding of the locking plate G5221. The locking is performed with respect to G521a and G521b, and the locking is released (see FIG. 97).

  The claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked with respect to the locked rods G521a and G521b when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU, while the locking plate G5221 is locked with the upper door mechanism DU. Is set so that the locking to the locked rods G521a and G521b is released when the lock is lowered from the height position where the lock is released to the height position where the lock is released. Further, as shown in FIG. 96, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are inclined at the tip end surfaces thereof and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G521a and G521b.

  As shown in FIG. 95, an opening G5222c is formed in the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522 below the upper door mechanism DU, and the protrusion G5221c provided on the locking plate G5221 is formed with the opening G5222c. Projecting to the inside of the cabinet G. By lowering the projection G5221c downward, the locking plate G5221 is lowered, and accordingly, the locking between the claw portions G5221a and G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b can be released.

  Here, when the protrusion G5221c is slid upward and the locking plate G5221 is at a height position that locks the upper door mechanism DU, the protrusion G5221c is the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD (see FIG. 93). ).

  According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the protruding portion G5221c, thereby preventing the locking plate G5221 from sliding, The locking between the portions G5221a and G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b cannot be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be locked so as not to be opened.

  On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the physical interference with the protrusion G5221c of the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the locking plate G5221 can slide in the cylinder G5222, and the claw The locking of the portions G5221a and G5221b to the locked bars G521a and G521b is released, and the locking of the upper door mechanism DU to the cabinet G can be released.

  Thereby, in order to release the locking of the upper door mechanism DU, a procedure for releasing the locking of the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door locking mechanism G51 can be required first. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, the lower door lock mechanism G51 is unlocked, the lower door mechanism DD is opened, and then the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Can increase security. In addition, the upper space of the cabinet G can be more secure than the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space of the cabinet G. Can be a place.

  In order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. The manager of the gaming machine 1 has an advantage that the key is easy to manage because it is compact and suitable for carrying.

  Further, by the sliding of the locking plate G5221, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are hooked on the locked bars G521a and G521b, and the hooks are released. Accordingly, the upper space of the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU can be locked in conjunction with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

  Further, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the end opposite to the end portion that is pivotally supported, and is disposed on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, so that the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD greatly. Thereby, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, the lower space of the cabinet G is not unnecessarily exposed to the outside, and security can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a one-way hinge DD54 that applies a predetermined torque in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD is closed is employed between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G. Thereby, torque is applied when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the cabinet G without applying a sudden load. As a result, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the protrusion B131 that is physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between power supply device DE and speaker DD25L)
As shown in FIG. 99, a speaker DD25L (corresponding to an acoustic device) is provided at the lower part of the lower door DD1 (corresponding to the door) of the lower door mechanism DD on the back side (lower space side of the cabinet G (corresponding to the casing)). Is provided. On the other hand, in the lower space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the inside of the casing), a power supply device DE (corresponding to the power supply device) is provided. The speaker DD25L and the power supply device DE are arranged to face each other when the lower door mechanism DD is closed with respect to the cabinet G (see FIG. 101).

  The power supply device DE is disposed on the left side of the hopper mechanism HP when the inside of the cabinet G is viewed from the front. The power supply device DE plays a role of converting AC voltage power supplied from the outside into DC voltage power required in each unit and supplying the converted power to each device constituting the gaming machine 1.

  On the front side of the power supply device DE, as shown in FIG. 100, a power switch DE1 for switching whether or not to supply power to devices constituting the gaming machine 1 (ON / OFF) is provided. In addition, two slide rails DE3 are provided in the vertical direction on both sides of the power switch DE1. The switch cover DE2 is slidable in the vertical direction on the slide rail DE3. Accordingly, when the switch cover DE2 is slid (slid) downward along the slide rail DE3, the switch cover DE2 covers the power switch DE1 (closed state of the switch cover DE2) as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the switch cover DE2 is slid (slid) upward along the slide rail DE3, the power switch DE1 is exposed (open state of the switch cover DE2) as shown in FIG. By providing the switch cover DE2 in this way, the security is improved by preventing direct access to the power switch DE1 from the outside.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the switch cover DE2 has an inclined surface DE2a that is inclined so as to protrude downward from above.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101, a convex portion DD25L1 (corresponding to an engaging portion) protruding toward the power supply device DE is formed on the back side of the speaker DD25L (the surface side facing the power supply device DE). The convex portion DD25L1 has an inclined surface DD25La that is inclined so as to protrude upward from below.

  In the speaker DD25L, when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state with respect to the cabinet G, the convex portion DD25L1 interrupts the switch cover DE2 when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state (sliding path). The cover DE2 is formed at a position that restricts the sliding of the cover DE2 upward.

According to the above configuration, by closing the lower door mechanism DD, the projection DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back surface of the lower door DD1 interrupts the sliding path (movement path) of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 It is possible to regulate the opening state. On the other hand, since the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back surface of the lower door DD1 is released by opening the lower door mechanism DD, the switch cover DE2 is slid upward, and the power switch It is possible to switch from a closed state in which operation of DE1 is impossible to an open state in which operation of power switch DE1 is possible.
As a result, it is possible to improve the security by preventing an unauthorized operation on the power supply device DE while ensuring the operability of the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD opened.

  Moreover, it can switch to an open state and a closed state by sliding switch cover DE2 up and down. Thereby, access to the power switch DE1 in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is opened can be facilitated.

  Further, since the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the speaker DD25L has a convex shape, the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased by the amount protruding toward the power supply device DE, and the sound quality can be improved at the same time. .

In addition, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are arranged to face each other, and the switch cover DE2 slides. Movement can be regulated.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is in a position shifted upward from the closed state, and therefore the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is The switch cover DE2 slides downward and moves to the closed position because the switch DE2 is pressed against the inclined surface DE2a of the cover DE2.
Thus, even if the switch cover DE2 is forgotten to be closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 becomes the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2. Since the contact is pushed in, the switch cover DE2 can be slid and moved to the closed position in conjunction with the operation of closing the lower door mechanism DD.

(Maximum BET button DD8)
The maximum BET button DD8 (corresponding to the button unit) is arranged on the second pedestal portion DD2b (corresponding to the pedestal portion). As shown in FIG. 102, an opening DD2ba is formed in the second pedestal portion DD2b. As shown in FIG. 105, opening DD2ba has a predetermined depth, has side wall DD2bc so as to surround opening DD2ba, and flange DD2bb is formed at the bottom of side wall DD2bc. As shown in FIG. 102, the maximum BET button DD8 includes an operation part DD81 and a locking part DD82.

(Operation unit DD81)
As shown in FIG. 106, the operation unit DD81 includes a first member DD812, a button base DD811, a spring DD813 (corresponding to an elastic member), a photosensor DD814, a second member DD815, and a button base cover DD816. Have.

  The first member DD812 has a button base part DD813, a button cover part DD8121, and a button sheet DD8122. As shown in FIG. 106, the first member DD812 is disposed so as to be able to be pressed downward (A direction).

  The button cover part DD811 is disposed on the upper side of the button base part DD813. This button cover portion DD811 is engaged with and fixed to the edge of the button base portion DD813. The button cover portion DD811 has a function as a cover that constitutes a surface directly pressed by the player.

  The button sheet DD812 is disposed between the button base part DD813 and the button cover part DD811. The button sheet DD8122 is made of a flat plate-like light-transmitting resin sheet and has light distribution.

  The button base DD813 is arranged on the upper side of the button base DD811. The button base portion DD813 has two cylindrical sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b on the lower side. A cylindrical screw hole is formed on the lower side of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. Further, a spring holding portion DD8124c that holds the spring DD813 is formed between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. The spring holding portion DD8124c is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the spring DD813.

  Between the button base DD813 and the button base DD811, a spring DD813 having an elastic force repelling against a force of pushing down the first member DD812 downward (A direction) is provided. The spring DD813 is formed by a coil spring formed in a cylindrical shape. One end of the spring DD813 is disposed and held on the outer periphery of the spring holding portion DD8124c. The other end of the spring DD813 is in contact with the lower part of the button base DD811. For this reason, the spring DD813 repels against the force by which the player pushes down the button cover portion DD8121 of the first member DD812 downward (A direction).

  The button base DD811 is formed in a rectangular box shape with an upper surface opened. Two through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed in the lower part of the button base DD811. The through holes DD811a and DD811b are opened in the vertical direction, and each of the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b is slidable. Therefore, the outer dimensions of the through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed to be larger than the inner diameter dimensions of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. Further, a flange DD811 protruding outward is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the button base DD811. The flange DD8111 contacts the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba provided in the second pedestal portion DD2b (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD811 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the opening DD2ba, and when the operation portion DD81 is inserted from above the opening DD2ba, the portion including the bottom and the four side surfaces of the button base DD811 is Although passing through the opening DD2ba, the flange DD8111 portion is regulated by contacting the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba.

  Further, the button base DD811 is provided with a restraining plate DD8112 extending in the horizontal direction on a side surface portion DD813 extending from the side surface of the button base DD811. Further, two communication holes DD816a and DD816b are formed in the side surface portion DD813. The shape and area of the bottom surface portion of the button cover portion DD811 and the shape and area of the top surface portion of the button base DD811 including the flange DD8111 are the same. That is, the button cover part DD811 and the button base DD811 have a shape that exactly overlaps in the vertical direction.

  The second member DD815 is disposed below the button base DD811 (A direction). The second member DD815 is formed with cylindrical screw holes DD815a and DD815b. The sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b of the button base DD8123 pass through the through holes DD811a and DD811b and the lower sides of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extend from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. The screw holes DD815a and DD815b formed in the second member DD815 and the screw holes DD8152a and DD8152b are screwed together. Accordingly, the second member DD815 is attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b. The second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

  Further, in the second member DD815, a thin plate-shaped light shielding piece DD8151 protruding in the vertical direction is provided between the screw hole DD815a and the screw hole DD815b.

  Below the second member DD815 (A direction), a photosensor DD814 in which the light emitting part DD814a and the light receiving part DD814b are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction is provided. This predetermined interval is set larger than the thickness of the light shielding piece DD8151 in the horizontal direction. A transmission connector is provided on the back surface of the photosensor DD814 and is connected by an external connector DD85.

  The button base cover DD816 is formed in a box shape in which the lower part side of the button base DD811 and the side facing the side part DD8113 are opened. Claw-shaped locking portions DD8161 and DD8162 are formed above the button base cover DD816, and the claw-shaped locking portions DD8161 and DD8162 are locked portions DD813a and DD813b provided at the lower portion of the button base DD811. The button base cover DD816 is fixed to the lower part of the button base DD811. The button base cover DD816 has two screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b.

  When the player presses the first member DD812 downward (A direction), the second member DD815 also moves downward (A direction). As the second member DD815 moves, the light shielding piece DD8151 interrupts between the light emitting part DD814a and the light receiving part DD814b, and blocks light emitted from the light emitting part DD814a to the light receiving part DD814b. Thereby, it is detected that the player has operated the maximum BET button DD8.

  When the player stops pressing the first member DD812 downward (A direction), the button base DD8123 moves upward due to the repulsive force of the spring DD813 (the first member DD812 is moved to the initial position). Return). When the button base portion DD813 moves upward due to the repulsive force of the spring DD813, the upper surface portion of the second member DD815 contacts the lower surface of the stop plate DD8112, and the second member DD815 and the first member DD812 return too much upward. To regulate that.

  Accordingly, when the second member DD815 moves upward, the light shielding piece DD8151 that has been interrupted between the light emitting part DD814a and the light receiving part DD814b also moves upward, and light is emitted from the light emitting part DD814a to the light receiving part DD814b. The light block is canceled. Thereby, it is detected that the player is not operating the maximum BET button DD8.

  According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and the sliding portion DD8124a of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. -It is attached to DD8124b. Accordingly, the second member DD815 can restrict the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b of the first member DD812 from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and can prevent unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD8.

  In addition, the light-shielding piece DD8151 is interlocked with the pressing of the first member DD812 by the player, and the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b slide through the two through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811, and the two through holes A light shielding piece DD8151 provided at an intermediate portion of the second member DD815 attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the DD811a and DD811b crosses between the light emitting portion DD814a and the light receiving portion DD814b. can do.

(Locking part DD82)
As shown in FIG. 103, the locking portion DD82 has a box shape. In order to connect the opening DD821 formed on the upper surface of the locking portion DD82 and the connector DD85 to the back surface of the operation portion DD81, It has an opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking part DD82.

  A flange DD823 projecting outward is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the opening DD821 of the locking part DD82. Further, the flange DD823 projects vertically outside the flange DD823 so as to surround the flange DD823. A surrounding frame DD824 is formed. The flange DD823 contacts the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD823 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the opening DD2ba, and when the locking portion DD82 is pressed from below the opening DD2ba, the flange DD823 portion contacts the lower surface of the flange DD2bb. It is regulated by touching.

  On the inner wall side of the locking part DD82, a locking piece DD825 for positioning the operation part DD81 when the operation part DD81 is stored is formed. Further, communication holes DD826a and DD826b provided on both sides of the opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking portion DD82 are formed.

  The operating portion DD81 is inserted into the opening DD2ba from above, and the locking portion DD82 is attached to the operating portion DD81 from below the opening DD2ba in a state where the flange DD8111 is in contact with the upper surface of the flange DD2bb. The flange DD823 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba. The two screws DD83a and DD83b are screwed into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b through the communication holes DD826a and DD826b and the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, respectively (see FIG. 104).

  According to the above-described configuration, the two screws DD83a and DD83b are engaged with the screw hole DD8163a and DD8163b through the communication holes DD826a and DD826b and the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, respectively, so that the operation unit DD81 is locked. The part DD82 can be fixed to the second pedestal part DD2b through the opening DD2ba. Moreover, since the operation part DD81 has the flange DD8111 larger than the opening part DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from falling into the cabinet G from the outside of the opening part DD2ba. Further, since the locking portion DD82 also has a flange DD823 larger than the opening portion DD2ba, the maximum BET button DD8 can be prevented from coming out of the cabinet G from the inside of the opening portion DD2ba. Thereby, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b.

Further, since the button cover portion DD811 and the button base DD811 have a shape that overlaps in the vertical direction, when the button cover portion DD811 is viewed from above, the button base DD811 is hidden by the button cover portion DD811, In addition, only the button cover portion DD811 pressed by the player can be shown. Thereby, the external appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified, and the design of the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.
Further, the button cover portion DD811 has a structure in which the bottom surface of the button base DD811 is smaller than the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811, and the intrusion from the gap between the through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811 is easier to prevent. be able to.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel device M1)
(Lower door mechanism DD)
As shown in FIG. 107, the lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening at a substantially central portion at the top. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

  The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) each having a plurality of types of symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. These reels RL, RC, RR are arranged in parallel (one horizontal row) so that each of them can rotate in the vertical direction at a constant speed. The reels RL, RC, RR can visually recognize the operations of the reels RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on the reels RL, RC, RR through the main display window DD4.

  A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b and DD2c having substantially horizontal surfaces are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion port DD5 is an opening through which a medal is inserted by the player. The medal inserted from the medal slot DD5 is credited or bet on the game.

  The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, “3” is selected as the number of inserted medals.

  A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front surface side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on a panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects a contact of a part of a human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen and outputs a detection signal thereof, or It may be of a system that detects the contact of a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs a detection signal thereof, or another system or structure (such as an in-cell structure).

  The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as a SUI (smart user interface). On the display screen, for example, game information such as the number of games is displayed as the game progresses, and the player selects Alternatively, a message or an input key for requesting input is displayed.

  In the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, as the game progresses, it is possible to display contents (effect information) according to the effects related to the game. In addition, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, a jog dial or a push button may be attached as an attachment having a function as a director or a dedicated attachment. Further, the function of the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by allocating the function to the display unit A described later.

  On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, there is provided a start lever DD6 for driving the reels RL, RC, RR to rotate by the player's operation and starting the display of the symbols in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is attached to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range.

  On the right side of the start lever DD6, on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, three stop buttons DD7L for respectively stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation). , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

  A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 is used to switch the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation. In a state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), a medal is received from a medal payout exit DD14 (cancellation chute) provided in the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The medals that are paid out and paid out are stored in the medal receiving part DD15.

  A waist panel DD18 (waist light guide plate) is disposed on the lower side of the start lever DD6 and stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a makeup panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, a name representing the model of the gaming machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

  Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout opening DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information related to the game using sounds such as voice and music. A first sub display device DD19L and a second sub display device DD19R are arranged on the left and right sides of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of medals paid out when the winning is established and the remaining number of medals that have been credited. Normally, since the maximum number of medals credited to the gaming machine 1 is 50, a credit number of 50 or less is displayed. When the maximum number of medals is credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout exit DD14. The sub display devices DD19L and DD19R may include a touch panel on the front surface.

(Relationship between lower door DD1, reel unit RU, and main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 108, the lower door mechanism DD of the gaming machine 1 includes a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the lower door DD1 (corresponding to the door) is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the cabinet G (corresponding to the casing). Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the reel unit RU (corresponding to the symbol display means) is detachably provided on the back side of the lower door DD1 (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)). Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the main control board MS is detachably provided on the rear side of the reel unit RU (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)).

  The main control board MS rotates the reels RL, RC, RR of the reel unit RU based on command signals output from the start lever DD6 and stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R (corresponding to command means). This is equivalent to control means for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR.

  By integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS according to the positional relationship of the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the gaming machine 1 Can be easily performed when assembling, exchanging and disassembling parts.

  Further, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, it is difficult to remove. Can be configured.

  The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1. Accordingly, the main control board MS can be disposed on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. For this reason, a physical distance can be ensured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if it is illegally intruded through the gap of the lower door DD1, it reaches the main control board MS. It becomes difficult to improve security.

  Since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when changing the specifications of the gaming machine 1, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, the reels RL, It is possible to collectively change the RC and RR symbols and the game content.

  Specifically, the attachment of the main control board MS to the reel unit RU will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 111, the reel unit RU has a substrate contact surface portion RU9a on the rear side. The board contact surface portion RU9a is a flat surface portion extending in the left-right direction at the center in the up-down direction on the back side of the reel unit RU. The normal direction of the plane portion substantially coincides with the front-rear direction. Further, the reel unit RU has an upper plane part RU9b above the center right side of the board contact surface part RU9a. The upper plane portion RU9b is a plane portion whose surface direction coincides with the substrate contact surface portion RU9a, and has a screw hole in the upper left portion. In addition, the reel unit RU has a mounting portion RU9c whose length in the left-right direction substantially coincides with the substrate contact surface portion RU9a below the substrate contact surface portion RU9a. The mounting portion RU9c includes a substrate contact surface portion RU9a and a wall surface portion whose surface direction coincides with the upper plane surface portion RU9b, a bottom surface portion that is bent and extended in a horizontal rear direction from a lower portion of the wall surface portion, and a rear surface of the bottom surface portion. And an inclined portion that is bent from the end and extended upward and backward with an inclination. The placement unit RU9c has screw holes at both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the reel unit RU has a plane portion whose surface direction coincides with the board contact surface portion RU9a and the upper plane portion RU9b.

  The main control board MS is placed on the bottom surface of the placement unit RU9c, and is in surface contact with the substrate contact surface part RU9a, the upper plane part RU9b, the wall surface part of the placement part RU9c, and other plane parts with the same plane direction. Is positioned. Then, in this state, the screw holes are screwed into the screw holes of the upper plane part RU9b and the mounting part RU9c through the through holes formed in the main control board MS, and the screws are fastened. Thereby, the main control board MS is stably attached to the board contact surface part RU9a, the upper plane part RU9b, and the mounting part RU9c arranged on the same surface.

  Next, the attachment of the reel unit RU to the lower door DD1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 112, the reel unit RU has a reel hinge RU21 at the left end. The reel hinge RU21 is a U-shaped flat plate member in plan view, and the normal direction of the plane substantially coincides with the front-rear direction. The reel hinge RU21 has an upper hinge RU21a formed downward from the upper left end. Further, the reel hinge RU21 has a lower hinge RU21b formed downward from the lower left end. The upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b are formed so that their central axes coincide.

  A reel hinge base DD18 extending from the upper end to the center is provided on the upper left side on the inner side of the lower door DD1. The reel hinge base DD18 has an upper hinge base DDR18a and an upper hinge base DDR18b at positions corresponding to the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b. The upper hinge base DDR18a and the lower hinge base DDR18b can be inserted into the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b, respectively. In the inserted state, the reel unit RU is centered on the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b. It is supported so that it can rotate.

  The reel unit RU has an upper right lock portion RU22 protruding rightward at the upper right end. In addition, the reel unit RU has a lower lock portion RU23 that protrudes downward from the approximate center of the lower end portion. The upper right lock part RU22 and the lower lock part RU23 can be locked while being in contact with the inner wall surface of the lower door DD1. That is, when the reel unit RU is rotated and brought into contact with the lower door DD1, the upper right lock unit RU22 and the lower lock unit RU23 are in contact with the lower door DD1. Since the upper right lock unit RU22 and the lower lock unit RU23 are locked to the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU can be maintained in a non-rotatable state. The upper right lock part RU22 and the lower lock part RU23 are rotatably provided with a knob member on the rear surface side. By turning the knob member with the upper right lock part RU22 and the lower lock part RU23 engaged with the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU can be switched between a rotatable state and a locked state. It has become. The reel unit RU may be locked to the lower door DD1 in a locked state. The main control board MS may be lockable to the reel unit RU.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel unit RU)
As shown in FIG. 113, the reel unit RU includes three reel units RU1, a reel base RU2, and a reel cover RU3. The three reel units RU1 are arranged in a parallel state (one horizontal row) in the left-right direction. The left reel unit RU1 has a reel RL, the central reel unit RU1 has a reel RC, and the right reel unit RU1 has a reel RR. Each reel unit RU1 is independently supported by a reel base RU2. The reel base RU2 is formed in a box shape having an open surface, and accommodates each reel unit 1 in a partially exposed state. A reel cover RU3 is attached to the reel base RU2 by screw fastening so as to cover the open surface. In a state where the reel cover RU3 is attached to the reel base RU2, the outer peripheral surface from the central part to the upper part of the reels RL, RC, RR in each reel unit RU1 is exposed from the reel base RU2. As a result, the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels RL, RC, and RR become visible.

  In addition, the reel unit RU1 has a motor mounting plate RU11 that is a support plate that supports the shaft of the reel and to which a motor serving as a driving force of the reel is mounted. The motor mounting plate RU11 is disposed on the right side of the reel unit RU1, and rotatably supports the reel. That is, they are arranged so as to be sandwiched between adjacent reel units RU1. The motor mounting plate RU11 has a front portion RU11a that forms a front portion. The front portion RU11a is formed in a substantially arcuate shape when viewed from the side, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel when viewed from the side. Note that the bow is a figure surrounded by an arc and a string connecting ends of the arc.

  Specifically, the motor mounting plate RU11 includes a front portion RU11a having a substantially arcuate shape in a side view and a shape formed continuously from both ends of an arc that defines the arcuate shape in the side view (for example, in a side view). And a rear portion RU11b having a substantially rectangular shape. The motor mounting plate RU11 may directly support the reel, or may indirectly support the reel through another member.

  The front part of the motor mounting plate RU11 formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view is substantially the same size as the front part of the opposing reel, and it is desirable that they overlap each other. That is, when viewed from one side, the front portion of the motor mounting plate RU11 is substantially completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side, the portion of the reel that faces the portion by the front portion of the support plate. It is desirable that the cover is almost completely covered. Thereby, it is possible to realize in a balanced manner that the function as a partition plate is imparted to the motor mounting plate RU11 and the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is maintained.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel unit RU: reel unit RU1)
The reel unit RU1 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the three reel units RU1 have the same configuration, only the right reel unit RU1 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 114, a reel index RU111, a sensor unit RU112, a motor drive unit RU113, and a drive control board RU114 are arranged on the motor mounting plate RU11 of the reel unit RU1. The reel index RU111 is arranged at the center of the motor mounting plate RU11. The sensor unit RU112 is disposed behind the reel index RU111. The motor drive unit RU113 is disposed above the reel index RU111.

  The reel RR has a reel drum RR1. The reel drum RR1 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a reel band RR2 on which a plurality of symbols is arranged is wound and fixed. In the reel drum RR1, a frame for increasing rigidity is arranged on the left side (opposite side of the motor mounting plate RU11) of the cylindrical portion, in a concentric circle that is radial from the center and smaller than the outer circumferential circle. . This frame has a shape in which the central portion is recessed in the right direction (inner side of the tube). In the reel drum RR1, a rotation gear RR3 having the same central axis is arranged on the left side (frame side) inside the cylindrical shape. That is, inside the reel drum RR1, the reel index RU111, the sensor unit RU112, and the motor drive unit RU113 are arranged on the right side (motor mounting plate RU11) of the rotation gear RR3. In addition, the reel drum RR1 is provided with a backlight RR4 that illuminates the symbols arranged on the reel RR that is stopped and displayed from behind on the radially inner wall surface inside the cylinder.

  The motor drive unit RU113 has a stepping motor and a drive gear that meshes with the rotation gear RR3, and power from the stepping motor for rotating the reel RR is transmitted by the rotation gear RR3. The stepping motor is rotated by the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU114. That is, it is possible to specify how much the reel RR has been rotated from the reference position (the degree of displacement) by the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU114. The motor drive unit RU113 is controlled to start and stop rotation by the drive control board RU114 in accordance with a control signal from the main control board MS. Specifically, a start command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to an operation of the start command means such as the start lever DD6 by the player. The main control board MS transmits a start control signal to the drive control board RU 114 when the start command signal is detected. The drive control board RU114 drives the motor drive unit RU113 when the start control signal is detected, and the reel RR is rotated. Thereby, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are variably displayed. Further, a stop command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to an operation of the stop command means such as the stop button DD7R by the player. The main control board MS transmits a stop control signal to the drive control board RU 114 when the stop command signal is detected. The drive control board RU114 drives the motor drive unit RU113 when the stop control signal is detected, and the reel RR is stopped. Thereby, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are stopped and displayed.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel device RU: reel unit RU1: reel index RU111)
The reel index RU111 has a reel shaft RU1111, a detection piece RU1112 and a connection plate RU1113. The reel shaft RU1111 is rotatable about the left-right direction as a central axis in the reel index RU111. The reel shaft RU1111 can be connected and fixed to the rotation shaft of the rotation gear RR3 at the left end, and is rotated in accordance with the rotation of the rotation gear RR3. That is, when the reel RR is rotated by the motor drive unit RU113, the reel shaft RU1111 is rotated. The detection piece RU1112 is formed in a shape of a figure surrounded by an arcuate outer periphery and an arcuate inner periphery in a side view. In the present embodiment, the angles of the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the detection piece RU1112 are each set to 180 degrees, and a circular plate having a concentric opening at the center is cut by a line passing through the center point. ing. A disc-shaped connection plate RU 1113 is connected to the inner periphery of the detection piece RU 1112 along the inner periphery. The connection plate RU 1113 is provided with a circular hole in the center, and the reel shaft RU 1111 is inserted and fixed. Thus, the reel index RU111 is connected to the rotation gear RR3 via the reel shaft RU1111. Therefore, the reel index RU111 and the rotation gear RR3 are formed as separate members. In addition, it is preferable to use a material with high slidability for the rotation gear RR3. Further, it is preferable to use a material having an excellent antistatic function for the detection piece RU1112 in the reel index RU111.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 115, the detection piece RU1112 rotates around the rotation axis of the reel shaft RU1111 (reel RR) with the rotation axis of the reel shaft RU1111 as shown by the arrow in the drawing. It is designed to be rotated along. The sensor unit RU112 is disposed on the motor mounting plate RU11 so that a detection point RUP indicated by an asterisk in the drawing on the circumference RUD is a detection position. That is, the sensor unit RU112 detects whether or not the detection piece RU1112 exists at the detection point RUP.

  The relationship between the detection piece RU1112 and the detection state will be described with reference to FIG. In the following, it is assumed that the rotation of the reel RR continues. First, in step SRU1, one end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP (on edge), and the detection of the detection piece RU1112 is started by the sensor unit RU112. At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (first reference position) of the reel RR by changing from the state where the detection piece RU1112 is not detected to the detected state. Thereafter, while the detection piece RU1112 continues to exist at the detection point RUP, the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112 is continued (SRU2). Then, the other end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP (off edge), and the detection of the detection piece RU1112 by the sensor unit RU112 is ended (SRU3). At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (second reference position) of the reel RR by changing from the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected to the state where it is not detected. That is, the detection piece RU1112 is continuously detected by the sensor unit RU112 until the position of the reel RR reaches the second reference position after reaching the first reference position. Thereafter, the state where the detection piece RU1112 is not detected by the sensor unit RU112 is continued until one end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP again (SRU4).

  As described above, the first reference position and the second reference position are alternately detected every time the reel RR makes a half turn, and the position of the reel RR is specified based on the detected first reference position or second reference position. Is done. Specifically, the main control board MS is supplied from the drive control board RU114 based on the control of the main control board MS with respect to the reference position (first reference position or second reference position) detected immediately before. By adding a displacement corresponding to the number of drive pulses, the position of the reel RR is specified. As described above, the main control board MS determines whether or not the reel RR has reached the reference position (first reference position or second reference position) based on the detection of the detection piece RU1112 by the sensor unit RU112. It functions as a specifying means. Further, the main control board MS and the drive control board RU114 function as reel position specifying means for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel RR from the reference position (first reference position or second reference position) accompanying rotation. To do.

  As described above, the detection piece RU1112 is formed in a shape of a figure surrounded by an arc-shaped outer periphery and an arc-shaped inner periphery, and the arc angle is set to 180 degrees. Therefore, the first reference position and the second reference position on the reel RR are arranged opposite to each other across the center axis on a straight line passing through the center axis of the reel RR.

  Thus, by detecting that the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112 from the state where the detection piece RU1112 is not detected by the sensor unit RU112, the first reference position of the reel RR is determined. Can be identified. In addition, the second reference of the reel RR is detected by detecting that the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112 and the detection piece RU1112 is not detected by the sensor unit RU112. The position can be specified. As described above, it is possible to detect the reference position of the reel twice during one rotation of the reel RR, and the same effect as when two sensors are provided can be obtained.

  It includes a region from a position corresponding to the first reference position to a position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path on the circumferential path on which the detection piece rotates, and corresponds to the second reference position. The shape of the detection piece is not limited as long as it has a shape that does not include a region from the position to the position corresponding to the first reference position along the circumferential path.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel device RU: reel unit RU1: sensor unit RU112)
As shown in FIG. 117, the left side surface (reel mounting side surface) of the motor mounting plate RU11 is used as the bottom surface, and screw fastening is performed so that the sensor unit RU112 is placed. The sensor unit RU112 includes a sensor RU1121 and a base member RU1122. The sensor RU 1121 is a transmission type sensor that detects a detection piece RU 1112 that rotates along a predetermined circumference as the reel RR rotates. The sensor RU 1121 is formed in a concave shape with a concave center, and is provided so that the direction of the depression and the central axis of the reel shaft RU 1111 of the reel index RU 111 are orthogonal to each other. The sensor RU 1121 is attached to the motor attachment plate RU11 via a base member RU1122 so that the edge of the rotation surface of the detection piece RU1112 of the reel index RU111 passes through the hollow inner space of the sensor RU1121.

  118 and 119, the pedestal member RU1122 has a pedestal base portion RU1122g having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction, and a pedestal column portion RU1122h protruding leftward from the center of the pedestal base portion RU1122g. Yes. The pedestal base portion RU1122g has a shape in which a semicircle is extended in the vertical direction of a rectangular flat plate. The pedestal base portion RU1122g has screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b penetrating in the left-right direction at the vertical position. Further, the base portion RU1122g is formed in a rectangular shape on the front side, and has a protrusion RU1122j protruding rightward at the center of the concave edge. Further, the base portion RU1122g is formed in a convex shape on the rear side of the rectangular portion, and has a protruding portion RU1122k that protrudes in a columnar shape in the right direction at the center of the convex side edge portion.

  The pedestal column part RU1122h has a plane having a longitudinal direction at the top and bottom at the left end, and has screw holes RU1122c and RU1122d at the top and bottom of the plane. Further, the pedestal column portion RU1122h has a plane at the left end that protrudes forward from the center in the vertical direction. The pedestal column part RU1122h has projecting parts RU1122e and RU1122f that are juxtaposed in the front-rear direction at this projecting location and project in a cylindrical shape to the left.

(Mounting of base member RU1122 to motor mounting plate RU11)
In the motor mounting plate RU11, fitting holes RU11e and RU11f are formed at positions corresponding to the protruding portions RU1122f and RU1122g in the base member RU1122. By positioning the protrusions RU1122j and RU1122k into the fitting holes RU11e and RU11f, the base member RU1122 is positioned with respect to the motor mounting plate RU11. Further, the motor mounting plate RU11 has screw holes RU11c and RU11d formed at positions corresponding to the screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b in the base member RU1122. The screw RU1124a is screwed into the screw hole RU1122a and the screw hole RU11c and the screw RU1124b is screwed into the screw hole RU1122b and the screw hole RU11d in the right direction from the pedestal member RU1122 side. The base member RU1122 is screwed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 120, the mounting position of the base member RU1122 with respect to the motor mounting plate RU11 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120, in motor mounting plate RU11, screw hole RU11c and screw hole RU11d are arranged on straight line RUDA. The fitting hole RU11e and the fitting hole RU11f are arranged at two points on the straight line RUDB substantially perpendicular to the straight line RUDA. Further, the fitting hole RU11e and the fitting hole RU11f are located on opposite sides of the straight line RUDA. The straight line RUDB is a straight line that passes through the center of the line segment that connects the screw hole RU11c and the screw hole RU11d into two equal parts. Here, the fitting hole RU11f has a longitudinal direction in the straight RUDB direction. Thereby, the error of the space | interval when shape | molding two positioning protrusion parts in the base member RU1122 can be accept | permitted. The longitudinal direction of the fitting hole RU11f is substantially perpendicular to the tangential direction of rotation of the detection piece RU1112 at the detection position of the sensor RU1121. As a result, even if a positional deviation with respect to the base member RU1122 occurs in the fitting hole RU11f having the longitudinal direction, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the reference position by the sensor RU1121.

(Attaching the sensor RU 1121 to the base member RU 1122)
The sensor RU 1121 is engaged with the plane at the left end of the pedestal member RU 1122 and has a plane substantially the same shape as the plane at the left end of the pedestal member RU 1122. That is, the plane located at the right end of the sensor RU 1121 has a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction and protrudes forward from the central portion in the vertical direction. The pedestal column part RU1122h is formed with fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f that are juxtaposed in the front-rear direction at the protruding portion. Further, screw holes RU1121a and RU1121b penetrating in the left-right direction are opened at the upper and lower positions of the plane. The screw hole RU1121b is formed in a long hole shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction. The fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f are disposed at positions corresponding to the protrusions RU1122e and RU1122f of the base member RU1122, and the sensor RU1121 is positioned with respect to the base member RU1122 by being inserted and inserted respectively. Further, the sensor RU 1121 is screwed in the right direction from the sensor RU 1121 side by screwing the screw RU 1123a into the screw hole RU 1121a and the screw hole RU 1122c, and screwing the screw RU 1123b into the screw hole RU 1121b and screw hole RU 1122d. The sensor RU 1121 is screwed to the RU 1122.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 121, the mounting position of the sensor RU 1121 with respect to the base member RU 1122 will be described. As shown in FIG. 121, in the base member RU1122, the screw hole RU1122c and the screw hole RU1122d are arranged on a straight line RUDC. And the protrusion part RU1122e and the protrusion part RU1122f are arrange | positioned at two points on the straight line RUDD substantially perpendicular to the straight line RUDC. Further, the protrusion RU1122e and the protrusion RU1122f are located on the side where the sensor RU1121 detects the detection piece RU1112 with respect to the straight line RUDC. The straight line RUDD is a straight line that passes through a center obtained by dividing a line segment connecting the screw hole RU1122c and the screw hole RU1122d into two equal parts. Here, the screw hole RU1122b of the sensor RU1121 screwed together with the screw hole RU1122d has a longitudinal direction in the direction of the straight line RUDC. Thereby, the error of the space | interval in shape | molding two screwing locations in sensor RU1121 can be accept | permitted.

(Upper door mechanism DU)
As shown in FIG. 122, the cabinet G (corresponding to the casing) pivotally supports the upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to the door) at the left end. The upper door mechanism DU and the cabinet G are connected by an upper hinge mechanism UH, and the upper hinge mechanism UH is a slide member UH1 attached to the left end of the upper door mechanism UD as shown in FIGS. And a shaft member UH2 attached to the left end of the upper space of the cabinet G.

  As shown in FIG. 124, in the slide member UH1, a single plate is bent at three locations to form a groove UH11. The groove UH11 is provided with a bearing mechanism UH12, a positioning portion UH14, an engaging convex portion UH15, a bearing mechanism UH13, and an engaging convex portion UH16 from above (U direction).

  The bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13 have a rectangular shape and are attached to the slide member UH1 by screws. Bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are formed on the bottom of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13 so as to be engaged with shaft portions UH21 and UH22, which will be described later. The bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are opened in a substantially circular shape at the bottoms of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13, and have a shape in which the oral cavity becomes smaller upward from the periphery of the opening. A direction in which the center of the opening of the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 faces upward along the groove UH11 is defined as an axis UH121A.

  The positioning portion UH14 has a curved shape so that the shaft portion UH21 can be positioned with respect to the bearing portion UH121 by contacting a curved surface of a support portion UH25 of a shaft member UH2 described later.

  The engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 have a thin plate shape protruding in the horizontal direction from the groove UH11. The engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 play a role of engaging with engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24 described later.

  The shaft member UH2 is formed by bending a single plate. The shaft member UH2 includes, from above, a shaft portion UH21 protruding from the upper surface of the support portion UH25, a support portion UH25, an engagement recess UH23, a shaft portion UH22 protruding from the upper surface of the support portion UH26, and a support portion UH26. An engaging recess UH24 is provided.

  The shaft portions UH21 and UH22 have a conical shape. The shaft portions UH21 and UH22 serve to overlap and engage with the bearing portions UH121 and UH131.

  The support portions UH25 and UH26 are provided on the shaft member UH2, and the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 are provided on the upper surface. Further, the side surface of the support portion UH25 has a curved shape, and the shaft portion UH21 can be positioned with respect to the bearing portion UH121 by contacting the curved surface of the positioning portion UH14.

  Engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 that are opened horizontally are formed in the engagement plates UH27 and UH28 extended from the side surfaces of the support portions UH25 and UH26. The engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 play a role of engaging with the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16.

  Then, the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 of the slide member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU are slid onto the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G so as to be covered downward from above, and are overlapped and engaged. The upper door mechanism DU can be attached to the cabinet G. At this time, it is desirable that the upper door mechanism DU is attached in a state of being opened at 90 ° with respect to the cabinet G so that the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 do not engage with the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 protrude toward the cabinet G, but this protrusion height is such that the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G (see FIG. 122), the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 are disengaged from the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24. Thus, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G, the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 of the slide member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU are moved from the shaft portion UH21 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G to the axis line. By sliding the UH 121A upward, the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G in a state where the restriction on the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24 of the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 is released. It becomes.

  If the protruding height of the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 is made lower than that of the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU is inclined with respect to the cabinet G at an angle smaller than 60 ° by the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16. The restriction on the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G. On the other hand, if the protrusion height of the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 is made higher than that of the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU is at an angle larger than 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G and the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 The restriction on the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G.

According to the above configuration, the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 are engaged with the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24 until the upper door mechanism DU is opened with respect to the cabinet G at a predetermined angle (60 ° in this embodiment). The bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are restricted from sliding along the axis UH121A. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the polymerization of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 from being released, and to lock the upper door mechanism DU from being removed from the cabinet G.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G, the engagement of the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 with respect to the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 is released, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are moved to the axis UH121A. It can slide along. As a result, the superposition of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.
Further, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (opened by 90 °).

  As shown in FIG. 125, the upper door mechanism UD includes a mechanism that emits light on the upper and left and right sides of the upper display window UD1 that transmits the image of the display unit A forward. Specifically, the top panel mechanism HA disposed above the upper display window UD1, the upper left panel mechanism HB disposed in the upper left direction of the upper display window UD1, and the upper right structure disposed in the upper right direction of the upper display window UD1. The panel mechanism HC, the left horizontal panel mechanism HD disposed at the upper left portion of the upper display window UD1, the right horizontal panel mechanism HE disposed at the upper right portion of the upper display window UD1, and the left direction of the upper display window UD1 It has a left front panel mechanism HF disposed in the lower part and a right front panel mechanism HG disposed in the lower right part of the upper display window UD1. Details of each panel mechanism HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 126, it has the panel base HH which comprises the frame | skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD. The panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided on the front side of the panel base HH. On the other hand, an upper door key receiving member HK, an upper door hinge member HM, and a center frame HL are provided on the back side of the panel base HH. The upper door key receiving member HK is screwed to the right side portion of the panel base HH. The upper door hinge member HM is screwed to the left side portion of the panel base HH. The center frame HL is horizontally arranged, and a right end portion and a left end portion are respectively connected to lower end portions of the upper door key receiving member HK and the upper door hinge member HM. The upper door key receiving member HK, the upper door hinge member HM, and the center frame HL are provided with a transparent panel UD11. The transparent panel UD11 can be attached by screw fastening from the rear.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Decoration unit HA1)
As shown in FIG. 127, the top panel mechanism HA includes a decoration unit HA1 that decorates the upper door mechanism UD while emitting light on the upper portion thereof. The decorative unit HA1 forms a decorative convex portion protruding forward from the upper display window UD1. The decoration unit HA1 includes a top lens light guide plate HA14 having a seamless structure that diffuses light and uniformly emits the light from the surface of the decoration convex portion. Thus, when a plurality of components are joined to form the light guide plate of the decorative unit HA1, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the components. However, the top lens light guide plate HA14 having a seamless structure is used. If it exists, the situation where load concentrates on a part can be avoided. As a result, the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit HA1 including the top lens light guide plate HA14 having a seamless structure has large rigidity and strength as a whole, so external force is applied from a player or the like located in front of the gaming machine. Even if it is done, it is difficult to cause deformation or breakage.

  The decoration unit HA1 has a rear end connected to the panel base HH substantially coincided with the width in the left-right direction of the upper door mechanism UD, and the width in the left-right direction from the both ends in the left-right direction of the panel base HH to the front end side. It is reduced and formed into a shape having an apex at the center of the front end. That is, the decoration unit HA1 has a substantially isosceles triangular shape with the panel base HH side as the base.

  As a result, even if the bending moment increases as the decorative unit HA1 approaches the front end portion away from the panel base HH, the decorative unit HA1 reduces the weight by reducing the width in the left-right direction on the front end side. Strength is increased. As a result, the decorative unit HA1 has a large rigidity and strength in the front region, and therefore, the decoration unit HA1 is less likely to be deformed or damaged even when an external force is applied by contact with a player positioned in front.

  The decoration unit HA1 has a top lens cover HA11, a top design sheet cover HA12, a design sheet HA13, a top lens light guide plate HA14, and a top lens light guide plate base HA15 arranged in this order from the top. The decoration unit HA1 has a top lens left LED substrate HA17 and a top lens right LED substrate HA18. The top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 are respectively arranged on the left side and the right side in the rear end portion of the decoration unit HA1. The top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 have a plurality of LEDs HA17a and HA18a at equal intervals in the left-right direction, and are installed so as to emit light forward from these LEDHA17a and HA18a. .

  The top lens cover HA11 constitutes the upper surface wall of the decoration unit HA1, and is formed so as to transmit light. The top lens light guide plate HA14 is formed so that light from the top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 is taken in from the rear end surface and is uniformly emitted from the front end surface, and the design of the design sheet HA13 is top. It is displayed on the top lens cover HA11 via the design sheet cover HA12. The top lens light guide plate base HA15 constitutes the bottom wall of the decoration unit HA1, and is formed so as not to transmit light.

  The decoration unit HA1 forms a hollow portion with the top lens light guide plate base HA15 and the top lens cover HA11, and the top design sheet cover HA12, the design sheet HA13, and the top lens light guide plate HA14 are accommodated in the hollow portion. As a result, the top lens light guide plate base HA15, the top lens cover HA11, the top lens light guide plate HA14, etc. are simply laminated and formed into a plate shape with a rigidity having a large cross-sectional secondary moment. .

  Furthermore, an opening HA15a is formed in the top lens light guide plate base HA15. The opening HA15a is disposed so as to face the LED substrate HA411 in the later-described top lens. The opening HA15a is provided with a LED lens concealing member HA16 in the top lens, and the LED substrate concealing member HA16 in the top lens functions as a reflector for the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens and opens and closes the opening HA15a. It functions as a window. The LED lens hidden member HA16 in the top lens may be formed so as to transmit a part of the light from the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the decorative unit HA1 has a front region curved downward. As a result, the decoration unit HA1 transmits light to the front upper side and the front side of the upper door mechanism UD so that the design can be seen. The lower surface of the top lens light guide plate HA14 is a reflector that reflects light. As a result, the decoration unit HA1 reflects the light from the top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 through the front region curved downward and reflects a part of the light with the reflector on the back surface. Can be changed in a diagonally downward direction on the front side.

  An irradiation light device B is arranged behind the decoration unit HA1. Here, since the decoration unit HA1 protrudes forward from the decoration unit HA1, a large space is secured by the amount of protrusion. Thereby, decoration unit HA1 can expand the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of a mirror about the light reflection type irradiation light apparatus B by the above-mentioned mirror provided in a big space. Furthermore, since the decoration unit HA1 has high rigidity and strength, the irradiation light device B can be sufficiently protected.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the top lens cover HA11 in the decoration unit HA1 is supported by a decoration unit support mechanism HI in which a front region curved downward is arranged in the horizontal direction. The decoration unit support mechanism HI includes a horizontal protrusion HA11a that protrudes rearward from the back surface of the top lens cover HA11, a horizontal protrusion HH1 that protrudes horizontally from the front surface of the panel base HH, and a horizontal protrusion. A plurality of connecting screws HH2 in which the portions HA11a and HH1 are screwed together are provided in the left-right direction.

  Thus, the decoration unit HA1 is configured such that the back surface of the front area curved downward is connected to the panel base HH via the decoration unit support mechanism HI arranged horizontally, so that the back surface of the front area is the decoration unit support mechanism. It will be in the state supported in the horizontal direction by HI. Therefore, the decorative unit HA1 has a structure in which the front region has large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Left end light emitting mechanism HA2, Right end light emitting mechanism HA3)
As shown in FIG. 130, the top panel mechanism HA includes a left end light emitting mechanism HA2 that emits light in a planar manner on the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD, and a right end light emitting mechanism HA3 that emits light in a planar manner on the right end region of the upper door mechanism UD. have. More specifically, the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 is disposed on the left rear side of the upper left speaker device UD2. The left end light emitting mechanism HA2 has a left LED substrate HA21. The left LED substrate HA21 is set so that the substrate surface faces the front side. Two LEDs HA22 are arranged on the surface of the left LED substrate HA21. These LEDHAs 22 are set so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface, and emit light in the left region of the upper left speaker device UD2 (the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD) with a light intensity higher than a predetermined level. It has become.

  On the other hand, the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 is disposed on the right rear side of the upper right speaker device UD3. The right end light emitting mechanism HA3 includes a right LED substrate HA31. The right LED substrate HA31 is set so that the substrate surface faces the front side. Two LEDs HA32 are arranged on the substrate surface of the right LED substrate HA31. These LEDHAs 32 are set so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface, and emit light in the right area of the upper right speaker device UD3 (the right end area of the upper door mechanism UD) with a light intensity of a predetermined level or more. It has become.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4)
The top panel mechanism HA further has a central light emitting mechanism HA4. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 is disposed on the center side of the upper door mechanism UD between the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3. The central light emission mechanism HA4 is configured to emit light in a region where it is difficult to emit light with a light intensity of a predetermined level or more with the left end light emission mechanism HA2 and the right end light emission mechanism HA3.

  Specifically, the central light emitting mechanism HA4 includes a first illumination mechanism HA41 that emits light in the left peripheral region on the left end region side and a right peripheral region on the right end region side, and a second illumination mechanism that emits light on the front end portion of the decoration unit HA1. HA 42 and a third illumination mechanism HA 43 that emits light on the lower side of the decoration unit HA 1 are provided. In the present embodiment, the first illumination mechanism HA41 will be described for the configuration in which both the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right end region side emit light. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first illumination mechanism HA41 may be configured to emit light in at least one of the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right end region side.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: First illumination mechanism HA41)
As shown also in FIG. 131, the first illumination mechanism HA41 has a top lens middle LED substrate HA411 arranged below the substantially central portion of the decoration unit HA1. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 is not easily guided by the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 or the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 by guiding the light emitted from the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens to the left peripheral region and the right peripheral region by the light guide mechanism. Even in the region, the region can be made to emit light with a predetermined light intensity or more. That is, the first illumination mechanism HA41 includes a LEDHA 4111 serving as a plurality of upper light sources provided on the upper surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, and a top lens disposed so as to cover the lower surface and side surfaces of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. And a reflector HA412. The top surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens is covered with the LED substrate hidden member HA16 in the top lens of the decoration unit HA1 in FIG. 127, and the reflector in which the LED substrate hidden member HA16 in the top lens reflects the light of the LEDHA4111. Is functioning as

  On the upper surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, a translucent left light guide lens HA413 that guides light from the LED HA 4111 to the left and right upper light guide regions and emits light in a planar shape, and a translucent right light guide lens. An upper light guide mechanism having a configuration in which HA 414 is arranged symmetrically with respect to LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens as a center is provided. More specifically, the right end portion of the left light guide lens HA413 horizontally disposed is arranged on the upper surface of the left end portion of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, and the light of the LED HA4111 can be incident from the end surface of the right end portion. Has been. The left light guide lens HA413 has a left end portion located above the upper left speaker device UD2, and emits light upward from the middle portion to the left end portion, whereby the upper light guide from the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD to the center side. The area is made to emit light.

  On the other hand, the left end portion of the right light guide lens HA414 arranged horizontally is disposed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, and the light of the LED HA4111 can be incident from the end surface of the left end portion. The right light guide lens HA414 has a right end portion located above the right upper speaker device UD3, and emits light upward from the middle portion to the right end portion, thereby causing a region (upper side) from the right end region of the upper door mechanism UD. The light guide region) emits light.

  As shown in FIG. 132, a lower light guide mechanism that guides light from the lower light source to the lower light guide region and emits light in a planar shape is provided on the lower surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. . More specifically, a plurality of LEDs HA4112 serving as lower light sources are provided on the lower surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. On the lower surface of the right end portion of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, the left end portion of the translucent right downlight lens HA415 arranged horizontally is disposed, and the light of the LEDHA 4112 can be incident from the end surface of the left end portion. Yes. The right downlight lens HA415 has a right end portion located above the right upper speaker device UD3, and emits light downward from the middle portion to the right end portion, thereby lowering the center side lower guide from the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD. The light region emits light. That is, the right downlight lens HA415 irradiates the periphery of the lower light guide region HA5d (see FIG. 125), which is the front region of the upper right speaker device UD3 of the panel base HH, and the periphery of the non-translucent lower light guide region HA5d. This member emits light by functioning as a reflector. The lower light guide mechanism has a left downlight lens (not shown) having the same configuration as that of the right downlight lens HA415. The left downlight lens and the right downlight lens HA415 are arranged symmetrically about the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: Second illumination mechanism HA42)
As shown in FIG. 131, the second illumination mechanism HA42 has a central lens upper LED substrate HA421 arranged below the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. A plurality of LEDHA 4211 is provided on the upper surface of the LEDHA 421 on the central lens. The lower surface of the LEDHA 4211 is covered with a central lens reflector HA422.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the upper surface of the central lens upper LED substrate HA421 is covered with a top lens light guide plate base HA15. Further, a translucent center lens A 423 is disposed below the central lens upper LED substrate HA 421. The center lens A423 is provided such that the upper end portion of the center lens LED substrate HA421 is exposed from the gap between the top lens light guide plate base HA15 and the panel base HH, and the light of the LEDHA4211 is incident from the end surface of the upper end portion. The light is emitted from the lower end surface formed and arranged along the lower end portion of the top lens light guide plate base HA15.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: Third illumination mechanism HA43)
The third illumination mechanism HA43 has a central lower LED substrate HA431 arranged on the rear side of the central lens upper LED substrate HA421. The lower center LED substrate HA431 is provided so that the normal direction of the front surface substantially coincides with the front direction. A plurality of LED HAs 4311 are provided on the front surface of the central lower LED substrate HA431. A translucent central lower lens HA432 is disposed in front of the central lower LED substrate HA431. The center lower lens HA432 is provided below the panel base HH, and emits light from the LEDHA 4311 in a lower region of the decoration unit HA1.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Left side panel mechanism HD, right side panel mechanism HE, left front panel mechanism HF, right front panel mechanism HG)
Hereinafter, a mechanism in which the left lateral panel mechanism HD and the left front panel mechanism HF are integrated will be referred to as a left panel mechanism HJ, and a mechanism in which the right lateral panel mechanism HE and the right front panel mechanism HG are integrated will be described as a right panel mechanism HK. The left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism HK function as a light emitting unit disposed on the side of the front surface of the screen mechanism D as a rendering device. Since the left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism K are similarly configured symmetrically with respect to the screen mechanism D, only the left panel mechanism HJ will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the left panel mechanism HJ includes a partition mechanism HJ2 that functions as a partition member, an upper left side lens HJ3 that functions as a side light transmissive member, and a lower left lens HJ4 that functions as a front surface transmissive member. And an inner light guide member HJ5. The left panel mechanism HJ has a left LED substrate HJ1 as a light source device to be described later, and light from the left LED substrate HJ1 is emitted to the outside from the upper left side lens HJ3, the lower left lens HJ4, and the left light guide plate HJ5. Configured to be.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the left panel mechanism HJ includes an upper left side lens HJ3, a lower left lens HJ4, a partition plate HJ21 and a left LED substrate case HJ22 that function as a partition mechanism HJ2, and a left LED. It has a substrate HJ1, a left light guide plate HJ51 that functions as an inner light guide member HJ5, and a left LED substrate cover HJ52.

  The left LED substrate HJ1 is set so that the normal direction of the substrate surface substantially coincides with the front direction. Four LEDs HJ11 and six LEDs HJ12 are arranged on the front surface of the left LED substrate HJ1. These LEDHJ11 and LEDHJ12 are set to emit light in the normal direction (front direction) of the substrate surface. Further, six LEDs HJ13 are arranged on the surface of the left LED substrate HJ1 opposite to the surface where the LEDs HJ11 and LEDHJ12 are arranged. These LEDs HJ13 are set to emit light in the normal direction (rearward direction) of the substrate surface.

  The left LED substrate HJ1 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction, and an upper end region is formed wide in the right direction. The LEDHJs 12 are arranged substantially in a single line from the upper end to the center along the left edge in the longitudinal direction. In addition, the LEDHJ11 is arranged in a line with two sets having a wider interval than the set on a straight line having an inclination from the center to the lower left end. Moreover, LEDHJ13 is arrange | positioned from the center area | region upper end to a lower end so that it may be arrange | positioned substantially equally in a line so that the right edge part of the surface on the opposite side to LEDHJ11 and LEDHJ12 may be followed.

  The left LED substrate case HJ22 is a case that accommodates the left LED substrate HJ1 formed in substantially the same shape as the left LED substrate HJ1 from the front side when viewed from the front. In the left LED substrate case HJ22, through holes HJ221 for allowing light from LEDHJ11 to pass in the forward direction are formed at positions corresponding to the respective LEDs HJ11. Further, in the left LED substrate case HJ22, through holes HJ222 for allowing light from LEDHJ12 to pass in the forward direction are formed at positions corresponding to the respective LEDHJ12. That is, the four through holes HJ221 are arranged on a straight line, and the six through holes HJ222 are arranged on a straight line. The plane area HJ22a in which the four through holes HJ221 are formed and the plane area HJ22b in which the six through holes HJ222 are formed are bent by a bent line from the center left end to the upper end of the surface of the left LED substrate case HJ22. It is divided. The planar area HJ22a is set higher in the forward direction than the planar area HJ22b, and a step HJ22c is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the partition plate HJ21 has a mountain shape having a vertex at the front end in a side view. Specifically, the partition plate HJ21 is formed in a substantially pyramid shape with the planar region HJ22b as a bottom surface. The partition plate HJ21 has an open bottom surface on the plane region HJ22b side and a left side surface. Further, the upper wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to reach the apex with an inclination downward while the width in the left-right direction is reduced forward from the upper edge of the planar region HJ22b. Further, the right side wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to reach the apex with an inclination in the left direction while the width in the vertical direction is reduced forward. Thus, the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to extend from the step HJ22c. In other words, the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can divide the light emitted forward from the left LED substrate HJ1 into the LEDHJ11 and the LEDHJ12.

  The upper left side lens HJ3 is formed in a substantially triangular flat plate shape whose peripheral shape substantially coincides with the opened left side surface of the partition plate HJ21. That is, the partition plate HJ21, the upper left side lens HJ3, and the left LED substrate HJ1 form an internal space HJ23 that is irradiated with light from the LED HJ12. The upper left side lens HJ3 is formed of a material that can transmit light, and constitutes a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 exists in the front direction of the LED HJ12. Accordingly, part of the light emitted from the LED HJ12 is reflected by the partition plate HJ21. Since the right side wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 has an inclination, it is reflected by light having at least a component in the left direction. Thus, the light reflected by the partition plate HJ21 reaches the upper left side lens HJ3. The upper left side lens HJ3 is decorated such that the inner wall surface is arranged in a matrix of square pyramids having apexes on the inside. As a result, the light reaching the upper left side lens HJ3 is irregularly refracted and transmitted to the outside. Thus, the partition mechanism HJ2 having the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can divide the light in the forward direction into two, and can guide the light divided in one in the side direction. Further, the upper left side lens HJ3 can transmit the light divided into one guided by the partition structure HJ2. The partition plate HJ21 is preferably white for increasing the reflectivity, but is not limited thereto.

  The lower left lens HJ4 is disposed in front of the left LED substrate case HJ22 so as to form an internal space HJ41 with the planar region HJ22a of the left LED substrate case HJ22. The lower left lens HJ4 is formed of a translucent material and constitutes a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the front side wall surface of the lower left lens HJ4 exists in the front direction of the LED HJ11. Accordingly, the light emitted from the LED HJ11 reaches the lower left lens HJ4. The lower left lens HJ4 is decorated such that the inner wall surface has a zigzag cross section in side view. As a result, the light reaching the lower left lens HJ4 is irregularly refracted and transmitted to the outside. Thus, the lower left lens HJ4 can transmit the light divided into the other by the partition structure HJ2. The decorative structure of the inner wall surfaces of the upper left side lens HJ3 and the lower left lens HJ4 is not limited to this, and any structure that diffuses incident light and emits it to the outside may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the left light guide plate HJ51 has a light incident part HJ511, an optical path part HJ512, and a light emitting part HJ513. The left light guide plate HJ51 is formed of a translucent material. The light incident part HJ511 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction. The light incident part HJ511 has depressions at two upper and lower portions, and has a protruding section HJ511a having a convex section extending in the vertical direction at the center of each depression in the left-right direction. Further, the light incident part HJ511 has a through hole HJ511b extending adjacent to the left side of the protruding part HJ511a. The left LED substrate cover HJ52 has a shape that engages with the rear side surface of the light incident portion HJ511 of the left light guide plate HJ51. The left LED board cover HJ52 has a protrusion HJ52a having a convex cross section extending in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction, and is fitted in the through hole HJ511b. The left LED board cover HJ52 is formed of a non-light-transmitting material.

  The protrusion HJ511a is provided to face the LEDHJ13 arranged on the left LED substrate HJ1. Light from the LED HJ 13 is incident from the front side of the protrusion HJ 511a. The left light guide plate HJ51 has an inclined surface HJ511c whose incident surface is inclined approximately 45 degrees in the right direction in the traveling direction of the incident light to the protrusion HJ511a. Since the inclined surface HJ511c is disposed so as to contact the left LED substrate cover HJ52, the light incident on the protruding portion HJ511a travels to the right after being reflected by the inclined surface HJ511c. The light traveling in the right direction passes through the optical path portion HJ512 and reaches the light emitting portion HJ513. The optical path portion HJ512 is formed to be bent backward from the right end portion of the light incident portion HJ511. The optical path portion HJ512 is set so that the normal direction is the front right direction. The light emitting portion HJ513 is formed to be bent from the right end portion of the optical path portion HJ512. The light emitting unit HJ513 is set so that the normal direction is the front right direction. Further, the light emitting unit HJ513 is decorated in a zigzag shape in front view at the right end. As a result, the light that has reached the right end of the light emitting unit HJ513 is diffused and radiated to the front surface of the screen mechanism D or the like.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Upper left panel mechanism HB, Upper right panel mechanism HC)
Hereinafter, since the upper left panel mechanism HB and the upper right panel mechanism HC are similarly configured symmetrically with respect to each other, only the upper left panel mechanism HB will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 141, the upper left panel mechanism HB is fitted into a substantially triangular gap formed at the upper left end of the panel base HH and the left rear end of the top lens cover HA11 of the top panel mechanism HA. Placed in. The upper left panel mechanism HB has a substantially right triangular shape having a right angle to the left front corner portion when viewed from above, and has an upper surface portion HB1 whose width in the left-right direction is enlarged from the rear end to the front end. A tight screw HH4 can be screwed into the upper left end of the panel base HH from the rear. The tight screw HH4 protrudes to the front of the panel base HH and can be fitted to the upper left panel mechanism HB.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the upper left panel mechanism HB has a fitting portion HB11 at the rear end portion, and a tight screw HH4 is fitted therein. The upper left panel mechanism HB has a frame portion HB2 formed so as to be lowered downward from the left front end portion. The frame portion HB2 has a restricting portion HB21 that protrudes rearward and is bent downward at the lower end portion. When the upper left panel mechanism HB is attached to the panel base HH, the restricting portion HB21 extends to the rear position of the fitting portion HH3 of the panel base HH that engages with the frame portion HB2. That is, since the restricting portion HB21 exists at the rear position of the fitting portion HH3, the movement in the forward direction is restricted. The frame portion HB2 is decorated such that the inner wall surface is arranged in a triangular pyramid shape protruding inward so that light from the light source from the rear can be irregularly refracted.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the upper left panel mechanism HB has locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 are arranged at a location adjacent to the top lens cover HA11 on the front side of the fitting portion HH3, and are in a direction different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11 and from the arrangement location to the top lens cover HA11. It is formed so as to protrude in the direction toward it. Specifically, the locking piece HB12 is located in the rear end region of the right edge portion of the fitting portion HB11 and protrudes in the right direction substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking piece HB13 is positioned substantially at the center of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11, and protrudes to the right rear direction at an angle of about 45 degrees with the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking piece HB14 is located at the front end portion of the right edge portion of the fitting portion HB11 and protrudes in the right direction substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 protrude from a lower position than the outer surface of the upper surface portion HB1.

  On the other hand, the top lens cover HA11 is formed with notches HA111, HA112, and HA113 that are engaged with the locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14. The notches HA111 / HA112 / HA113 are notches formed on the inner wall surface of the top lens cover HA11. The notch portions HA111, HA112, and HA113 are adjacent to the top lens cover HA11 with the engaging pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 being engaged, and the tight screw HH4 is fitted to the fitting portion HB11 via the panel base HH. As a result, the movement of the upper left panel mechanism HB in the horizontal direction is restricted by the panel base HH and the top lens cover HA11. In addition, the forward movement of the upper left panel mechanism HB is restricted by the restriction portion HB21.

The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above has the following features.
(1-1) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2) is provided.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A power source is provided via a pin (slide member E26) that can move inside the pin receiver (slide groove E22b) with respect to a pin receiver (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22). A driving force transmission mechanism (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from (driving motor E25),
The arm (crank member E22) is configured such that the pin (slide member E26) moves through the pin (slide member E26) and the pin receiver (slide groove E26) when the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiver (slide groove E22b). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to E22b), while the display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in the first position (front standby) in conjunction with the operation of the arm (crank member E22). Position) and the second position (front exposure position)
The pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) is operated when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts to move from the first position (front standby position) to the second position (front exposure position). No driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), and the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is moved from the second position (front exposure position) to the position. It is formed along a direction in which driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26) when the operation is started toward the first position (front standby position). Yes.

(1-2) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2) is provided.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
With respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22), a motor (slide member (slide member E26)) is slidable inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via a motor ( A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25),
The arm (crank member E22) is configured such that the slide member (slide member E26) slides through the slide member (slide member E26) through the slide groove (slide member E26). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the groove E22b), while the display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in the first position (front Between the standby position) and the second position (front exposure position)
The slide groove (slide groove E22b) is at a point in time when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts operation from the first position (front standby position) to the second position (front exposure position). The movement direction of the slide member (slide member E26) and the display means (front screen mechanism E1) operate from the second position (front exposure position) to the first position (front standby position). A groove wall surface (groove wall surface E22b1) is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member (slide member E26) at the time of starting.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the slide groove E22b has the movement direction of the slide member E26 at the time when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operation from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and the front screen. The groove wall surface E22b1 is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member E26 when the mechanism E1 starts to move from the front exposure position toward the front standby position. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts to move from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 moves from the front exposure position to the front exposure position. When the operation is started toward the standby position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operation from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operation from the front exposure position toward the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1. The operation can be made gradual. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be driven smoothly, and the load on the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25 from being damaged. Further, since the front screen mechanism E1 can be smoothly driven without devising the pulse output, it is not necessary to perform complicated excitation control, and the control load related to the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 is kept low. be able to.

  In addition, when it is necessary to perform excitation control in order to smoothly drive the front screen mechanism E1, it is necessary to change the design of the excitation control when the size of the front screen mechanism E1 is changed. It takes time and effort. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 can be smoothly driven without performing excitation control. It is possible to easily cope with changes in specifications such as the size of the screen mechanism E1.

  In the embodiment described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts its operation from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 is It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member when the operation is started from the exposure position toward the front standby position. That is, the slide is performed both when the front screen mechanism E1 starts its operation from the front standby position toward the front exposure position and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts its operation from the front exposure position toward the front standby position. It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the groove E22b. However, in the present invention, when the front screen mechanism starts operation from the front standby position toward the front exposure position and when the front screen mechanism starts operation from the front exposure position toward the front standby position, Only in this case, the driving force may not be transmitted to the slide groove.

  Here, the position of the pin when the display means is at the first position (relative position with respect to the pin receiving portion) is referred to as a first predetermined position, and the position when the display means is at the second position. The pin position (relative position with respect to the pin receiving portion) is referred to as a second predetermined position. In this case, the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the pin moving direction at the time when the display means starts the operation from the first position toward the second position (independent of the pin receiving portion, The second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the movement direction of the pin at the time when the display means starts operation from the second position toward the first position. It may be formed along the direction in which the pin actually moves regardless of the pin receiving portion. The first predetermined position and the second predetermined position may be the same position or different positions.

  Furthermore, the driving force transmission mechanism includes a driving force transmission body (for example, a gear) that rotates about the first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source, and the pin is fixed to the driving force transmission body. It may be. The first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is formed in a direction perpendicular to the pin at the first predetermined position and the straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (for example, the center of the gear). The second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is a direction perpendicular to the pin at the second predetermined position and the straight line connecting the intersection (for example, the center of the gear) between the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body. It may be formed.

  Thereby, the direction of the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the direction in which the pin moves when the display means starts to move from the first position toward the second position (concentric with the driving force transmission body). And the second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion. Direction in which the pin is to move when starting the operation from the position to the first position (a circle concentric with the driving force transmission body, the center of the driving force transmission body and the pin at the second predetermined position) Tangent direction of a circle with a radius of Therefore, when the display means starts operation from the first position toward the second position, the driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin, and the display means is moved from the second position to the first position. No driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when the operation is started toward. Thereby, when the display means is in the vicinity of the first position and the second position, the operation of the display means can be made gentle.

  The target driven by the drive mechanism is not particularly limited, and the drive mechanism may be the following drive mechanism.

A drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body;
A driving force transmission mechanism that transmits a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable within the pin receiving portion;
The arm operates in conjunction with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion through the pin as the pin moves inside the pin receiving portion, while the movable body is In conjunction with the movement of the arm, it moves between the first position and the second position,
When the movable body starts to move from the first position toward the second position, no driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving section via the pin, and the pin receiving section Is formed along the direction in which the driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when the operation starts from the second position toward the first position.
A drive mechanism characterized by that.

A drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body;
A driving force transmission mechanism that transmits a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable within the pin receiving portion;
The arm operates in conjunction with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion through the pin as the pin moves inside the pin receiving portion, while the movable body is In conjunction with the movement of the arm, it moves between the first position and the second position,
The pin receiving portion includes a moving direction of the pin at a time when the movable body starts to move from the first position toward the second position, and the movable body is moved from the second position to the second position. It is formed along the moving direction of the pin at the time of starting the operation toward the position of 1.
A drive mechanism characterized by that.

(2-1) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2) is provided.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A power source is provided via a pin (slide member E26) that can move inside the pin receiver (slide groove E22b) with respect to a pin receiver (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22). A driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from (driving motor E25),
The driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) rotates around the first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source (driving motor E25),
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21),
The arm (crank member E22) is moved by the pin (slide member E26) moving inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) as the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) rotates. While the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is rotated by the arm (crank). The member E22) rotates between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposure position) in conjunction with the rotation of the member E22).
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), the pin (slide member E26), the first straight line, and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) is at the first position (front standby position). In this case, the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) is used to rotate the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). The direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposure position), the pin (slide member E26), the first straight line, and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) is at the second position (front exposure position). In this case, the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) is used to rotate the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). The direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22).

(2-2) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2) is provided.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
With respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22), a motor (slide member (slide member E26)) is slidable inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via a motor ( A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25),
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates according to the driving force generated from the motor (drive motor E25),
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21),
The arm (crank member E22) is configured so that the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as the gear (crank gear E21) rotates. While the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the (slide member E26), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is rotated with the arm (crank member E22). ) To rotate between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposure position) in conjunction with the rotation of
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position) and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position) A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) and the arm (crank member E22). ) And the straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (the straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) are substantially orthogonal to each other.

(3-1) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
A housing portion (screen housing C10) for housing the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) inside,
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A power source is provided via a pin (slide member E26) that can move inside the pin receiver (slide groove E22b) with respect to a pin receiver (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22). A driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from (driving motor E25),
The driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) rotates around the first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source (driving motor E25),
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21),
The arm (crank member E22) is moved by the pin (slide member E26) moving inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) as the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) rotates. While the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is rotated by the arm (crank). The member E22) rotates between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposure position) in conjunction with the rotation of the member E22).
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), the pin (slide member E26), the first straight line, and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) is at the first position (front standby position). In this case, the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) is used to rotate the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). The direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposure position), the pin (slide member E26), the first straight line, and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) is at the second position (front exposure position). In this case, the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) is used to rotate the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). The direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The housing (screen housing C10) is provided with openings (operation openings C21 and C31) at positions where the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated.

(3-2) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
A drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10) that houses therein the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2);
A main body (cabinet G) for housing the drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10);
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable,
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
With respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22), a motor (slide member (slide member E26)) is slidable inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via a motor ( A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25),
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates according to the driving force generated from the motor (drive motor E25),
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21),
The arm (crank member E22) is configured so that the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as the gear (crank gear E21) rotates. While the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the (slide member E26), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is rotated with the arm (crank member E22). ) To rotate between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposure position) in conjunction with the rotation of
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position) and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position) A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) and the arm (crank member E22). ) And the straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (the straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) are substantially perpendicular to each other,
The drive mechanism casing (screen casing C10) has openings (operation openings C21 and C31) at positions where the gear (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated.

(3-3) The openings (operation openings C21 and C31) are a first opening (operation panel) provided on one side surface (right side plate C2) of the drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10). An opening C21) and a second opening (operation) provided on a side surface (left side plate C3) opposite to the one side surface (right side plate C2) of the side surfaces of the drive mechanism casing (screen casing C10). Opening C31),
The first opening (operation opening C21) and the second opening (operation opening C31) are formed to have substantially the same size and the same shape.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position and when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposed position, the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is eccentric. A straight line connecting the position E21b and a straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21 are substantially orthogonal to each other.

  As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposure position, the force for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 (manually) does not depend on the driving force generated from the drive motor E25. When applied to the mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. Accordingly, the force applied to the slide member E26 is not converted into a force for rotating the crank gear E21 (the direction in which the force acts is from the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21). If it is slightly deviated, it is converted into a force for rotating the crank gear E21). Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposure position, even if the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated by manually moving the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the front screen mechanism E1 Does not rotate. As a result, it is possible to prevent a person handling the front screen mechanism E1 from directly touching the front screen mechanism E1 and forcibly moving the front screen mechanism E1.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 is prevented from being manually rotated. It is not necessary to separately add a member or the like for locking the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1, and it is possible to prevent the cost from increasing.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen drive mechanism E2 is housed in the screen casing C10, and the crank gear E21 is manually rotated in the screen casing C10. The operation openings C21 and C31 are provided at positions where the operation can be performed. Therefore, a person handling the front screen mechanism E1 can turn the front screen mechanism E1 by manually turning the crank gear E21 from the operation openings C21 and C31. Accordingly, although the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be rotated by directly touching the front screen mechanism E1, the convenience for use is reduced because the means for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 is separately secured. Can be prevented. Further, when the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated through manually rotating the crank gear E21, the front screen mechanism E1 is not directly touched. The possibility that the screen mechanism E1 is damaged can be reduced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the screen casing C10 is provided with openings (operation openings C21 and C31) having substantially the same size and the same shape on each of the pair of side surfaces. The screen casing C10 can be carried by hooking a hand to the two openings. Thus, the operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, by manually rotating the crank gear E21 from the opening as the handle, The front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposure position, the force for manually rotating the front screen mechanism E1 regardless of the driving force generated from the drive motor E25. Is applied to the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. As explained. That is, it has been described that the front screen mechanism E1 is not manually rotated (locked) both when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position and when it is at the front exposure position. However, in the present invention, the front screen mechanism may not be manually rotated (locked) only when the front screen mechanism is at the front standby position or at the front exposure position. .

  The target driven by the drive mechanism is not particularly limited, and the drive mechanism may be the following drive mechanism.

A drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body;
A driving force transmitting body that transmits a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable within the pin receiving portion;
The driving force transmitting body rotates around the first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source,
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmission body,
The arm is interlocked with the driving force transmitted to the pin receiving portion through the pin as the pin moves in the pin receiving portion with the rotation of the driving force transmitting body. While rotating, the movable body rotates between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the rotation of the arm,
The direction of the straight line connecting the intersection of the pin and the first straight line and the driving force transmission body when the movable body is in the first position is that the movable body is in the first position. The direction of the force applied to the pin when a force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm without depending on the driving force generated from the power source in the case;
The direction of the straight line connecting the intersection of the pin and the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body when the movable body is in the second position is that the movable body is in the second position. In this case, the force is applied to the pin when a force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm without depending on the driving force generated from the power source.
A drive mechanism characterized by that.

A drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body;
A driving force transmitting body that transmits a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable within the pin receiving portion;
The driving force transmitting body rotates around the first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source,
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmission body,
The arm is interlocked with the driving force transmitted to the pin receiving portion through the pin as the pin moves in the pin receiving portion with the rotation of the driving force transmitting body. , While rotating about the second straight line, the movable body rotates between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the rotation of the arm,
When the movable body is at the first position, and when the movable body is at the second position, an intersection between the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body and a straight line connecting the pins The intersection of the second straight line and the arm and the straight line connecting the pins are orthogonal to each other.
A drive mechanism characterized by that.

  Note that the first straight line and the second straight line may be parallel, and in that case, a view as viewed from the direction of the first straight line (the direction of the second straight line) (for example, a side view of the drive mechanism). , A straight line connecting the intersection and pin of the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (for example, a straight line connecting the center of the gear and the pin) and a straight line connecting the intersection and the pin of the second straight line and the arm (for example, It suffices if the rotation center of the arm and the straight line connecting the pins are orthogonal to each other.

(4-1) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying video;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) that is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable and that allows an image displayed by the display unit (display unit A) to be viewed. Mechanism UD),
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector capable of projecting video (projector mechanism B2);
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backward;
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3);
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). A different second screen (fixed screen mechanism D);
A screen casing (screen casing C10) that houses the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D);
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), and the screen casing (screen casing) C10) is configured as a unit,
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2), so that it is between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position). In the operation,
The second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is disposed behind the second position (front exposure position), and the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is positioned at the second position (front exposure position). ), The image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), while the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position. When in the (front standby position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D),
In the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) has lower brightness.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, the two screens of the front screen mechanism E1 and the fixed screen mechanism D are accommodated in the screen casing C10. The front screen mechanism E1 is driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 to operate between the front standby position and the front exposure position. The fixed screen mechanism D is disposed behind the front exposure position. When the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position, the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, while when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, the image is projected by the projector mechanism B2. The displayed image is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Therefore, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, and the fixed screen when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D. Comparing the position of the mechanism D, the fixed screen mechanism D is present behind the screen casing C10 rather than the front screen mechanism E1.

  Here, since the back side of the screen casing C10 is more affected by irregular reflection caused by light reflected from the wall of the screen casing C10, the fixed screen mechanism D is more so-called white than the front screen mechanism E1. Blur is likely to occur. In view of this point, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the brightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is set lower than the brightness of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, it is possible to prevent white blurring of the video displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D, and it is possible to improve the sharpness of the video.

(4-2) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying video;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) that is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable and that allows an image displayed by the display unit (display unit A) to be viewed. Mechanism UD),
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector capable of projecting video (projector mechanism B2);
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backward;
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having one display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3);
A second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) having a plurality of display surfaces capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3). ,
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) are unitized. And
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2), so that it is between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position). In the operation,
When the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposure position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1). On the other hand, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is the second screen (fixed screen mechanism). D),
In the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) has lower brightness.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 has one display surface, and the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces. Since the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces, the influence of irregular reflection due to the reflection of light between the display surfaces is large, and so-called white blur is likely to occur. The gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment. Then, the brightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is made lower than the brightness of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, it is possible to prevent white blurring of the video displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D, and it is possible to improve the sharpness of the video.

  In the present invention, a first screen whose display surface is perpendicular to the optical axis of the irradiation light and a second screen whose display surface is not perpendicular to the optical axis of the irradiation light are provided, and the brightness of the second screen is set. You may make it lower than the brightness of a 1st screen. Also in this case, it is possible to prevent the blurring of the video displayed on the second screen.

(5-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image and a screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2). A display unit (display unit A) configured by being unitized;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable and which allows the screen (front screen mechanism E1) to be visually recognized; With
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a first member (front screen member E11) having the display surface (projection surface E11a) and a second surface having a convex portion (second pattern surface E12b). Of the first member (front screen member E11) opposite to the display surface (projection surface E11a) and the second member (front screen support E12). ) Are fixed so as to contact a surface opposite to the surface (second pattern surface E12b) provided with the convex portion.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, the front screen mechanism E1 includes the front screen member E11 having the projection surface E11a and the front screen support E12 having the second pattern surface E12b in the front screen member E11. It is formed by fixing so that the surface opposite to the projection surface E11a and the surface opposite to the second pattern surface E12b on the front screen support E12 are brought into contact with each other. As described above, since the member having the projection surface E11a and the member having the second pattern surface E12b are configured as separate members, in the process of forming the front screen mechanism E1, it is caused by the convex portion of the second pattern surface E12b. Thus, sink marks are formed on the projection surface E11a, and the accuracy of the screen is prevented from being lowered. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display an image on a highly accurate screen.

(5-2) The surface (second pattern surface E12b) provided with the convex portion in the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is provided with a decoration having irregularities,
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position) by being driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2). And
When the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposure position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the screen (front screen mechanism E1), When the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the surface (second pattern surface E12b) provided with the convex portions. The decorated decoration is arranged so as to be visible through the display area (upper display window UD1).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 has the second pattern surface E12b (the surface opposite to the projection surface E11a, that is, the screen surface). The decoration on the back surface is arranged so as to be visible through the upper display window UD1. Therefore, if the decoration is not provided, the player can visually recognize the back surface of the front screen mechanism E1 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position. This undesirably deteriorates the aesthetics of the gaming machine. From such a viewpoint, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the back surface of the front screen mechanism E1 is decorated.

  However, if an attempt is made to integrally mold the front screen mechanism E1 with such decoration, sink marks are formed on the projection surface E11a of the front screen mechanism E1 due to the convex portions constituting the decoration, and the accuracy of the screen is improved. It will decline. In view of this point, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the member having the projection surface E11 and the member having the decorated surface are configured as separate members, and both the members are fixed. The front screen mechanism E1 is formed. Thereby, sink marks are formed on the projection surface E11 due to decoration, and the accuracy as a screen is prevented from being lowered. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display an image on a highly accurate screen.

(6-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image and a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) A display configured by unitizing a screen mechanism F1) and a screen casing (screen casing C10) that accommodates the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). A unit (display unit A);
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
A display area (upper display window UD1) is provided that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body (cabinet G) and can visually recognize the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD);
A perforated plate (perforated plate B15) formed with a plurality of holes,
The perforated plate (perforated plate B15) is arranged so that the projector (projector mechanism B2) is difficult to visually recognize through the display area (upper display window UD1), and the plurality of holes are formed on the perforated plate ( With the perforated plate B15) as a boundary, the screen housing (screen housing C10) in which the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is accommodated, and the projector (projector) A passage through which air can flow is formed between the space where the mechanism B2) is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 in the screen casing C10 are accommodated by the plurality of holes formed in the perforated plate B15. A passage through which air can flow is formed between the space and the space where the projector mechanism B2 is disposed. Therefore, since the space in which the screen is accommodated in the screen casing C10 (the area opened for projecting an image) can be used for heat dissipation, the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 can be efficiently released. it can. Further, since the perforated plate B15 is arranged so that the projector mechanism B2 is difficult to see through the upper display window UD1 provided in the upper door mechanism UD, the projector mechanism B2 is difficult to see from the player, and the projector mechanism B2 It is possible to prevent the aesthetics of the gaming machine from being damaged by seeing.

(6-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) is disposed above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D) provided upright in the screen casing (screen casing C10), and emits light forward. Can be irradiated,
The gaming machine further includes:
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) disposed in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) so that the light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be reflected obliquely downward and rearward;
The perforated plate (perforated plate B15) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D) so as to cover the lower surface of the projector (projector mechanism B2).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the fixed screen mechanism D is erected on the screen casing C10, and the projector mechanism B2 is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D. Therefore, a relatively wide space extends below the projector mechanism B2. The perforated plate B15 is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D so as to cover the lower surface of the projector mechanism B2. Accordingly, since the relatively wide space can be used for heat dissipation, the heat generated in the projector mechanism B2 can be released more efficiently.

(7-1) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying video;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable,
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector capable of projecting video (projector mechanism B2);
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2);
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) And comprising
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are unitized.
The position of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit (display unit A) with the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) opened.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the display unit A includes the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 as a unit. The mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted in position from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD opened. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted, so the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate. Even in this case, the projection position can be adjusted.

(7-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A). ,
The projector (projector mechanism B2) is disposed above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), and can irradiate light forward.
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is disposed in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) so that the light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be reflected obliquely downward and rearward, and the main body It is possible to adjust the reflection direction of the light by changing the degree of screwing in the screw exposed toward the opening side of the section (cabinet G).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD opened. Can be adjusted. Thereby, even when the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, mirror mechanism, and various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the gaming machine without being unitized.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described. However, the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, etc.). .

(8-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying video,
The display unit is
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image;
First and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each being out of the projection range of the projector and different from each other for each screen. A first operable between a position (front standby position / reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) within the projection range of the projector and to be projected by the projector. And a second screen;
Driving means for driving the first and second screens independently between the first position and the second position (front screen mechanism E1, reel screen driving mechanism F2 and main control). Substrate MS),
Detection of whether or not the first screen is present at the first position (front standby position); detection of whether or not the first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position); And detecting means (sensor mechanism CS) for detecting whether or not the second screen is present at the first position (reel standby position),
An operation range between the first position and the second position of each of the first and second screens partially includes an overlapping range that overlaps each other, and the first and second screens The second position of each of the screens is in the overlapping range in the operating range;
The driving means includes
In performing a return operation of returning each of the first and second screens to an origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
The first and second screens are driven according to the first and second screen driving procedures corresponding to the positions of the first and second screens based on the detection results of the detection means.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013585). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain by only the video displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed in order to further enhance the rendering effect. Although the space inside the gaming machine is finite, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body. Here, when overlapping the operation range of each movable body, if a plurality of movable bodies are operated simultaneously, the movable bodies may come into contact (interference) with each other. Normally, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, if the movable body is not operating normally, or if the movable body is moved manually while the power is turned off, the movable body is not considered in such an abnormal situation. When the is operated, there is a possibility that the movable bodies interfere with each other. And when movable bodies contacted, there existed a possibility that an effect device might be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection result of the detection unit differs depending on the positions of the first and second screens. The first positions of the first and second screens are different from each other. For this reason, when the detecting means detects that one screen is present at the first position, it does not interfere even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, after the other screen is first returned to the origin position, the other screen is returned to the origin position, whereby the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. In addition, since only one of the first and second screens can be arranged at the second position, the detection means detects that the first screen exists at the second position. The second screen will not be in the second position. In this case, after the second screen is first returned to the origin position, the first screen is returned to the origin position, so that the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. As described above, in the return operation, the screens interfere with each other by driving the first and second screens according to the driving procedure corresponding to the positions of the first and second screens based on the detection results of the detection means. It is possible to return to the respective origin positions without any problem. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the screens from interfering with each other by appropriately driving the first and second screens in the processing after the return operation.

(8-2) The detection means (sensor mechanism CS)
Two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) respectively corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), and the corresponding screens are in the first position (front Two first sensors for detecting whether or not they are present at the standby position / reel standby position);
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) for detecting whether or not the corresponding first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position); A second sensor,
The drive means (main control board MS)
The first sensor detects that the first screen is in the first position, and the second sensor is that the first screen is in the second position. Is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the above configuration, since the first screen is not present at the first position and the second position at the same time, the first sensor detects that the first screen is present at the first position. If the second sensor detects that the first screen is in the second position, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

(9-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying video,
The display unit is
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image;
First and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each being out of the projection range of the projector and different from each other for each screen. A first operable between a position (front standby position / reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) within the projection range of the projector and to be projected by the projector. And a second screen;
Driving means for driving the first and second screens independently between the first position and the second position (front screen mechanism E1, reel screen driving mechanism F2 and main control). Substrate MS),
Detection of whether or not the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is present at the first position (front standby position), and the first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position). Detecting means (sensor mechanism CS) for detecting whether or not the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is present at the first position (reel exposure position). With
Each of the operating ranges of the first and second screens partially includes an overlapping range that overlaps each other, and the second position of each of the first and second screens is within the operating range. Exists in the overlapping range,
The driving means includes
In performing a return operation of returning each of the first and second screens to an origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
A first condition in which the detection means detects that the first screen exists at either the first position or the second position; and the detection means has the second screen When at least one of the second conditions for detecting the presence at the first position is satisfied,
Driving the first and second screens according to the driving procedure of the first and second screens according to the respective positions of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means;
When neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied,
One of the first and second screens is driven to return to the origin position, and then the other screen of the first and second screens by the detecting means is The other screen is driven so as to return to the origin position in accordance with a driving procedure according to a detection result as to whether or not it exists at the first position.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013585). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain by only the video displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed in order to further enhance the rendering effect. Although the space inside the gaming machine is finite, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body. Here, when overlapping the operation range of each movable body, if a plurality of movable bodies are operated simultaneously, the movable bodies may come into contact (interference) with each other. Normally, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, if the movable body is not operating normally, or if the movable body is moved manually while the power is turned off, the movable body is not considered in such an abnormal situation. When the is operated, there is a possibility that the movable bodies interfere with each other. And when movable bodies contacted, there existed a possibility that an effect device might be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection result of the detection unit differs depending on the positions of the first and second screens. The first positions of the first and second screens are different from each other. For this reason, when the detecting means detects that one screen is present at the first position, it does not interfere even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, after the other screen is first returned to the origin position, the other screen is returned to the origin position, whereby the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. In addition, since only one of the first and second screens can be arranged at the second position, the detection means detects that the first screen exists at the second position. The second screen will not be in the second position. In this case, after the second screen is first returned to the origin position, the first screen is returned to the origin position, so that the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. As described above, the detection means detects that the first screen is present at either the first position or the second position, and the detection means has the second screen as the first screen. When at least one of the second conditions for detecting the presence of the first position is satisfied, the driving procedure corresponding to the positions of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means is followed. By driving the first and second screens, the screens can be returned to their original positions without interfering with each other.

  On the other hand, if neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, the first screen is located between the first position and the second position, and The second screen is located at a position other than the second position. Further, in this case, the other screen may operate along with the operation of one screen. Therefore, according to the invention of (1), first, after returning one screen to the origin position, the detection means responds to the detection result of whether or not the other screen exists at the first position. This another screen is returned to the origin position according to the driving procedure. As a result, even when neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, the first and second screens can be reliably returned to the origin position.

(9-2) The detection means (sensor mechanism CS)
Two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) respectively corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), and the corresponding screens are in the first position (front Two first sensors for detecting whether or not they are present at the standby position / reel standby position);
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) for detecting whether or not the corresponding first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position); A second sensor,
The drive means (main control board MS)
The first sensor detects that the first screen is in the first position, and the second sensor is that the first screen is in the second position. Is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the above configuration, since the first screen is not present at the first position and the second position at the same time, the first sensor detects that the first screen is present at the first position. If the second sensor detects that the first screen is in the second position, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

(10-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying video,
The display unit is
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image;
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) fixed to a predetermined position of the display unit and capable of being projected by the projector;
Second and third screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each of which is outside a projection range of the projector (front standby position / reel) (Standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) which is in front of the first screen and is a projection target of the projector instead of the first screen. A second screen and a third screen that can be rotated around a moving axis (rotation center axis FG / rotation center axis RG);
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 and reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second and third screens independently between the first position and the second position; With
In each of the second and third screens, the operation ranges between the first position and the second position partially overlap each other,
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is above the rotation axis (rotation center axis RG) of the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1). Yes,
The second screen is disposed above the first screen at the first position (front standby position) and outside the operating range of the third screen,
In the first position (reel standby position), the third screen is disposed behind the first screen and outside the operating range of the second screen.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013585). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain by only the video displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed in order to further enhance the rendering effect. Since the space inside the gaming machine is finite, space saving is required when providing multiple movable bodies, but by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body, A plurality of movable bodies can be provided. Here, when overlapping the operation range of each movable body, if a plurality of movable bodies are operated simultaneously, the movable bodies may come into contact (interference) with each other. And when movable bodies contacted, there existed a possibility that an effect device might be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the second screen and the third screen are rotated around different rotation axes. Thereby, the overlapping range in the operation range of the second screen and the operation range of the third screen can be reduced. Further, the rotation axis of the second screen is arranged above the rotation axis of the third screen, and the second screen is arranged above the first screen at the first position. With this configuration, the operation range between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. In addition, the third screen is arranged behind the first screen in the first position, so that when the third screen is arranged in the first position, the second screen The possibility of contact can be eliminated. As described above, it is possible to efficiently arrange the three screens in the gaming machine while reducing the possibility of the three screens contacting each other.

(10-2) The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2)
The second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven on condition that the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is in the first position (reel standby position).
The third screen is driven on condition that the second screen is in the first position (front standby position).

  According to the gaming machine according to the embodiment described above, it is possible to reliably prevent the second screen and the third screen from coming into contact with each other.

  (10-3) Each of the first to third screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is a projection on which an image irradiated from the projector (irradiation light device B) is projected. The surface shapes are different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the shapes of the projection surfaces of the first to third screens are different from each other, even if the same image is emitted from the projector, the image is expressed in a different manner for each screen. This makes it possible to diversify the production.

(10-4) The projection surface of any one of the first to third screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) (reel screen mechanism F1) is When the projector is a projection target, in a side view, an arc surface having a convex arc shape on the upstream side in the irradiation direction of light irradiated from the projector (irradiation light device B),
The projection surface of any one of the first to third screens (front screen mechanism E1) is a flat surface.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to express video in different modes between the screen mechanism whose projection surface is an arc surface and the screen mechanism whose projection surface is a flat surface.

(11-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying video,
The display unit is
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image;
A movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) that can be a projection target of the projector, a first position that is outside the projection range of the projector (front standby position), and a second position that is a projection target of the projector ( A movable screen operable between the front exposure position) and
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the movable screen between the first position and the second position;
The drive mechanism is
A motor (drive motor E25);
A shaft (shaft member E3) that rotates when the motor is driven;
Two gears (intermediate gears E23 and E23) provided at both ends of the shaft and rotating together with the shaft;
Two arms (crank members E22 and E22) that are connected to the two gears and are rotated about the rotation axis along a predetermined direction by the rotation of the two gears. Two arms connected to both end portions of the screen in the predetermined direction,
The movable screen rotates between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the rotation of the two arms about the rotation axis (rotation center axis FG). .

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of providing an effect by rotating a movable body around an axis is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain by only the video displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, in order to further enhance the production effect, it has been proposed that a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device is switched between a state shielded by a movable body and an opened (exposed) state before and after the movable body rotates. Yes. As a result, it is possible to create a sense of unity between the movement of the movable body and the state of visual recognition of the other accessory such as the display means, and a variety of effects can be performed. However, when a display unit or the like (another part) is provided together with the movable body, there is a problem in that the rotation shaft (shaft) of the movable body hinders the arrangement of the display unit and the like. In this regard, it is conceivable that the rotation axis of the movable body is provided above, below, on the side, etc. of the separate object so as not to disturb the disposition of the separate object. Since the shaft is arranged toward the end, there is a problem that the range of rotation of the movable body is limited and the size of the movable body is also restricted.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the shaft is not used as the rotation axis of the screen (two arms). Thereby, since the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of a shaft increases, it becomes possible to arrange | position a shaft so that arrangement | positioning of an extraordinary thing may not be inhibited. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the extra items while maintaining the rotation range and size of the screen at a desired level. Each of the two arms is rotated as the two gears connected to both ends of the shaft rotate. Therefore, the driving force of the motor can be evenly transmitted to each of the two arms by this shaft. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driving load from being concentrated on one arm.

  (11-2) The motor (drive motor E25) is connected to one of the two gears (intermediate gears E23 and E23), and rotates by transmitting a driving force to the one gear. By doing so, the shaft (shaft member E3) is rotated.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the motor is connected to the gear provided at one end of the shaft, and the motor is arranged so as not to hinder the arrangement of the additional role (fixed screen mechanism or the like). Can be arranged near the end of the shaft. As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the extra items.

(11-3) It further includes a fixed screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that is fixed at a predetermined position of the display unit (display unit A) and can be a projection target of the projector (irradiation light device B).
When the movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) is disposed at the first position (front standby position), the fixed screen becomes a projection target of the projector,
When the movable screen is arranged at the second position (front exposure position), the movable screen is arranged in front of the fixed screen and becomes a projection target of the projector instead of the fixed screen,
The shaft (shaft member E3) is disposed behind the fixed screen,
The rotation shaft (rotation center axis FG) of the two arms (crank members E22 and E22) is disposed in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the shaft is arranged behind the fixed screen as a separate item, the light projected on the fixed screen is not hindered by the shaft. In addition, since the pivot shafts of the two arms can be disposed in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen, the movable screen and the rotation shaft can be rotated compared to the case in which the pivot shaft is disposed rearward of the rear end position of the fixed screen. The length between the moving shaft (arm length) can be shortened. For this reason, even when the space in the gaming machine is limited and the display unit cannot be enlarged, the size of the movable screen can be maintained at a desired level.

(12-1) a housing (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
A partition plate (intermediate support plate G1) for partitioning the inside of the housing into an upper first space and a lower second space;
A display unit (display unit A) placed on the partition plate and exchangeably accommodated in the first space of the housing;
A relay board (relay board CK) for relaying the wiring connecting the display unit and the device accommodated in the second space;
The display unit (A1)
An accommodating portion (screen casing C10) having a pair of side plates (right plate C2 and left plate C3) and a back plate (back plate C4);
Display means (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), which is accommodated in the accommodating portion and displays an image,
The back plate in the housing portion is disposed in front of the rear ends of the pair of side walls,
The relay board is disposed in a back surface (back wall G3) of the housing, and in a third space (GS) defined by the back plate and the pair of side plates in the housing portion,
The partition plate has an opening (through hole G11) through which the wiring is inserted at a position facing the third space.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which a plurality of parts are unitized so that the various parts can be easily replaced. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device that can display a plurality of identification information, a control device that controls the variable display device, and a variable display unit that unitizes a unit case that accommodates these. A gaming machine stored in a removable manner with respect to the body is disclosed. In the gaming machine disclosed in this publication, the inside of the housing is partitioned vertically by a variable display unit mounting table, a variable display unit is attached to the upper half of the housing, and a device such as a power supply device is attached to the lower half of the housing. It is attached. A relay board for relaying a wiring for electrically connecting the control device of the variable display unit and the device attached to the lower half of the housing is attached to the front surface of the variable display unit. By the way, if wiring is arranged in front of various devices in the housing, the wiring is obstructive for aesthetics and operation of various devices. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the wiring behind the various devices. However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the above publication, since the relay board is attached to the front surface of the variable display unit, the wiring between the relay board and the equipment attached to the lower half of the housing is connected to various devices. Difficult to place backwards.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the relay board is arranged in the third space behind the display unit in the housing. Moreover, the wiring that connects the relay board and the device accommodated in the second space passes through an opening formed at a position facing the third space in the partition plate. As a result, since it becomes easy to arrange wiring behind various devices in the housing, the degree of freedom of wiring can be increased. Further, since the relay board is disposed in the rear surface of the housing and in the third space defined by the back plate and the pair of side plates in the housing portion, the relay board is placed when the display unit is housed in the housing portion. Contact with the back surface of the housing can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of failure of the relay board.

  (12-2) The relay board (relay board CK) is disposed below the third space (space GS).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the relay board is arranged in the lower part of the third space, the wiring is connected to the relay board from the second space through the opening formed in the partition plate. Easy to do.

(13-1) a display unit (display unit A);
A gaming machine having an opening on the front surface and a main body housing (cabinet G) for accommodating the display unit in an exchangeable manner,
The display unit is
Display means for displaying an image (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1);
A display unit housing (housing A1) for housing the display means;
Concave portions (concave portions B132) are formed continuously from the front end toward the rear at both side end portions of the top plate member (projector cover B1) in the display unit housing. Thus, a work space (space BS) for installing and fixing the main body casing on an island facility (fixed plate member OC) disposed above the main body casing is defined.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which a plurality of parts are unitized so that the various parts can be easily replaced. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device that can display a plurality of identification information, a control device that controls the variable display device, and a variable display unit that unitizes a unit case that accommodates these. A gaming machine stored in a removable manner with respect to the body is disclosed. By the way, generally, a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine is installed and operated in an island facility at a gaming facility. When installing this gaming machine on the island facility, the game machine is fixed to the island facility by driving nails or the like from the inside of the casing to the island facility through the top plate. Here, when installing a gaming machine with replaceable units as described above on an island facility, the gaming machine is installed with the unit removed so as not to damage the unit. That is required of the worker. However, in reality, the worker is reluctant to increase the amount of work, and the game machine is installed in a state where the unit is accommodated, resulting in a problem that the unit is damaged. If the unit is damaged, it may not be possible to reuse the unit, and it will be different from the normal gaming machine. There is a fear.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the recesses are formed at both side ends of the top plate member in the display unit casing. Thereby, even in a state where the display unit is accommodated in the main body casing, a work space for installing and fixing to the island facility is secured between the display unit and the main body casing. As a result, it is possible to install the gaming machine on the island facility while accommodating the display unit while preventing the display unit from being damaged.

(13-2) The top plate member (upper surface wall G4) of the main body housing (cabinet G) has an opening (opening G41) penetrating in the vertical direction,
The main body case includes a soft member (plate member G42) that is attached to the top plate member so as to close the opening, and is softer than the top plate member,
The work space (space BS) is a space in which nails extending from the soft member to the island facility (fixed plate member OC) can be driven from within the main body casing.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to drive a nail without interfering with the display unit in a state where the display unit is accommodated in the main body housing. Thereby, the gaming machine can be securely fixed to the island facility while preventing the display unit from being damaged. In addition, a gaming machine can be easily installed in an island facility by driving a nail into a soft member that is softer than the top plate member of the main body casing.

(14-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying video,
The display unit is
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that can be a projection target of a projector (irradiation light device B) that projects an image;
A second screen that can be a projection target of the projector, disposed in front of the first screen, and a first position that is a projection target of the projector instead of the first screen; and the projector A second screen (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) operable between a second position outside the projection range of
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second screen between the first position and the second position;
A housing (screen housing C10) that houses the first screen, the second screen, and the drive mechanism;
A relay board (relay board CK) for relaying the wiring connecting the drive mechanism and the device outside the display unit;
The casing (screen casing C10) has at least a bottom plate (bottom plate C1), a side plate (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3), and a back plate (back plate C4) separately molded, and the bottom plate, It is composed by assembling a side plate and the back plate,
Each of the first screen, the drive mechanism, and the relay board is positioned and arranged on any one of the bottom plate, the side plate, and the back plate, and the plates that are positioned and arranged are mutually connected. Different.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which a plurality of parts are unitized so that the various parts can be easily replaced. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device that can display a plurality of identification information, a control device that controls the variable display device, and a variable display unit that unitizes a unit case that accommodates these. A gaming machine stored in a removable manner with respect to the body is disclosed. In the gaming machine disclosed in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427, the unitized variable display unit is basically a unit that is mounted in common regardless of the type of gaming machine. Depending on the model, the production device that cannot be shared among the models is not unitized. Here, if the rendering device depending on the model is manufactured separately for each model, the burden of the manufacturing cost increases.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, different functional components are positioned and arranged with respect to the respective plates of the casing (screen casing C10). Therefore, even if the display unit (display unit A) as a whole cannot be shared among models, there is a possibility that it can be shared between models on a board unit basis of the casing. As a result, the display unit can be manufactured at a lower cost than the case of manufacturing the display unit for each model.

  (14-2) The casing (screen casing C10) is assembled so that the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plates (right plate C2 and left plate C3), and the back plate (back plate C4) can be replaced. It has been.

  According to the gaming machine according to the embodiment described above, the plates of the housing (screen housing C10) are assembled so as to be replaceable. For this reason, it becomes possible to exchange the member of a display unit (display unit A) per board. Thereby, by exchanging the members in units of plates, it is possible to change the specifications of the display unit while reusing the members not to be replaced of the display unit.

(14-3) The bottom plate (bottom plate C1) is formed with a recess (center placement portion C11) for positioning and placing the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D).
The drive mechanisms (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) are positioned and arranged on the side plates (right plate C2 and left plate C3).
The relay substrate (relay substrate CK) is positioned on the back plate (back plate C4).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the relay board (relay board CK) that relays the wiring is positioned on the back plate (back plate C4), so that it is difficult for the player to see the wiring. be able to. Further, the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is positioned by being placed in a concave portion (central placement portion C11) formed in the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), and thus the side plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3). ) And the back plate (back plate C4), the first screen can be positioned on the housing by a simple method.

(14-4) The display unit (display unit A)
A decorative member (right movable body base C5, left) arranged between the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). A movable body base C6);
The bottom plate (bottom plate C1) is formed with recesses (right mounting portion C12 and left mounting portion C13) for arranging the decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine according to the embodiment described above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually observe the drive mechanism by disposing the decorative member between the drive mechanism and the second screen. As a result, the beauty of the gaming machine can be improved. Moreover, since the recessed part for arrange | positioning a decoration member is formed in the baseplate of a housing | casing, it becomes possible to arrange | position a decoration member to a housing | casing easily.

(15-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying video,
The display unit is
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image;
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) disposed in front of the projector for reflecting light emitted from the projector obliquely downward and rearward;
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that can be a projection target of the projector;
A second screen (front screen mechanism E1) that can be a projection target of the projector, and is disposed above the first screen and is outside a projection range of the projector (front standby position); A second screen disposed in front of the first screen and operable between a second position (front exposure position) to be projected by the projector instead of the first screen;
Arms (crank members E22 and E22) having a rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) connected to the second screen;
A driving force generated from a power source (drive motor E25) is transmitted to the arm, and the arm is rotated about the rotation axis, whereby the second screen is moved to the first position and the arm. A driving force transmission body (crank gears E21, E21, intermediate gears E23, E23) operating between the second position and
The pivot axis (rotation center axis FG) of the arm is closer to the center of the second screen when the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position). Is also placed above,
The arm is connected to a position that is an upper part of the second screen when the second screen is in the first position;
When the second screen is in the second position, the second screen is inclined upward from a rear end far from the reflecting mirror toward a front end near the reflecting mirror. It is configured.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that displays an image projected from a projector on a screen is known (see, for example, JP 2012-147828 A). According to this type of gaming machine, it is possible to express images similar to a liquid crystal display, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the size is increased as compared with a liquid crystal display. In addition, by appropriately setting the shape of the screen, it is possible to perform video expression that is impossible with a liquid crystal display. By the way, in order to widen the range of video expression, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of screens including a movable screen in a gaming machine. In such a gaming machine, when a movable screen is a projection target of the projector, it is necessary to dispose the movable screen in front of other screens. On the other hand, when a screen other than the movable screen is used as the projection target of the projector, it is necessary to dispose the movable screen outside the projection range of the projector so that the projection onto the other screen is not hindered. is there. However, since the space for housing the display unit is limited in the housing of the gaming machine, the display unit cannot be increased in size. For this reason, since the space in which the movable screen can operate is limited, it is difficult to increase the size of the movable screen.

  According to the gaming machine according to the embodiment described above, the pivot axis of the arm is disposed above the center of the second screen when the second screen is in the second position, and the arm is When the second screen is in the second position, the second screen is connected to a position that is an upper part of the second screen. Thereby, the operation range when operating between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. Thus, the second screen can be enlarged by reducing the operating range of the second screen. In addition, when the second screen is in the first position, the second screen is configured to be inclined upward from the rear end far from the reflection mirror toward the front end close to the reflection mirror. Has been. Thereby, the space | interval of the up-down direction of a 1st screen and a 2nd screen can be shortened in the range which does not inhibit the projection of a projector on a 1st screen. As a result, the second screen can be further enlarged.

  The projector (irradiation light device B) is disposed above the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). Has an inclined surface inclined upward from the rear to the front.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the lower surface of the projector has the inclined surface that is inclined upward from the rear to the front, so that the second screen and the projector at the second position The interval in the vertical direction can be shortened. As a result, the second screen can be further enlarged.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine having a plurality of doors is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-52525). By providing a plurality of doors in this way, it is only necessary to open the corresponding doors for purposes such as replenishing medals, adjusting reel devices, and repairing devices. There is an advantage that it is not necessary to expose the inside.

However, when a plurality of doors are provided, it is necessary to provide locking means for locking each of them, and there is a problem that the unlocking operation becomes complicated and the number of parts increases.
In addition, inside the gaming machine, there are places that are frequently accessed, such as replenishment of medals, and there are places that are highly secure and rarely accessed, such as control boards, etc. There is also a need to adopt locking means.

  Accordingly, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can perform unlocking operation smoothly and can enhance security for the inside of the gaming machine. To do.

(16-1) One of the present invention is an upper space having an openable upper door mechanism DU;
A lower space having a lower door mechanism DD that can be opened and closed;
An upper door locking mechanism G52 capable of locking the upper door mechanism DU;
A lower door locking mechanism G51 capable of locking the upper door mechanism DU;
With
The upper door locking mechanism G52 is
A tube G5222 provided in the upper space;
A locking plate G5221 that is slidable in a cylinder G5222 in which claw portions G5221a and G5221b are formed;
Locked portions G511 and G521 provided in the upper door mechanism DU,
The lower door mechanism DD is
In a state where the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the lower door mechanism DD interferes with the locking plate G5221, thereby stopping the sliding of the locking plate G5221, and the locking plate G5221 is held in the cylinder G5222, and the claw portion When G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked portions G511 and G521 and the lower door mechanism DD is open, the interference with the locking plate G5221 of the lower door mechanism DD is released and the locking plate G5221 is slid. Thus, the gaming machine 1 is provided at a position where the locking of the locking plate G5221 with respect to the locked portions G511 and G521 is released.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (the lower door mechanism DD is locked), the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the locking plate G5221, so that the locking plate G5221 slides. Stop moving. Then, the locking plate G5221 whose sliding is stopped is held in the cylinder G5222, whereby the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b, and the upper door mechanism DU is placed in the upper space. It will be in a locked state.
On the other hand, in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is opened (a state where the lower door mechanism DD is unlocked), physical interference with the locking plate G5221 of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the locking plate G5221 is a cylinder. It becomes possible to slide in G5222, the locking of the claw portions G5221a and G5221b to the locking rods G521a and G521b is released, and the locking of the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU can be released.
Thereby, in order to release the locking of the upper door mechanism DU, a procedure for releasing the locking of the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door locking mechanism G51 can be required first. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, the lower door lock mechanism G51 is unlocked, the lower door mechanism DD is opened, and then the upper door lock mechanism G52 needs to be unlocked. Can be increased.
Thereby, security can be improved for the upper space as compared with the lower space, and the lower space can be made a place where it can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space.

(16-2) In the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention, the lower door lock mechanism G51 is a cylinder lock G513 that can be locked and unlocked with a key.
Between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space, a one-way hinge DD54 is provided that applies a predetermined torque in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD is closed,
The locking part G522 has a claw shape,
The locked portion G521 has a bar shape,
The claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked by being hooked on the bar-shaped locked bars G521a and G521b.

According to the above configuration, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. The manager of the gaming machine 1 has an advantage that the key is easy to manage because it is compact and suitable for carrying.
Further, a one-way hinge DD54 that applies a predetermined torque in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD is closed is employed between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space. Thereby, torque is applied when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the lower space without applying a sudden load. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the locking plate G5221 that is physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.
Further, the claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b are hooked on the rod-shaped locked bars G521a and G521b and the hooks are released by the sliding of the locking plate G5221. As a result, the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU can be locked in conjunction with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

(16-3) The upper door mechanism DU is rotatably supported at one end of the upper space,
The upper door lock mechanism G52 is characterized in that it is provided at the end opposite to the end that is pivotally supported.

  According to the above configuration, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is disposed on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, so that the lower door mechanism DD does not have to be opened largely in order to unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52. . Thereby, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to expose the inside of the lower space to the outside unnecessarily, and security can be improved.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-24410, a gaming machine configured by connecting members that divide components into a plurality of units and connect them is known. The configuration divided into a plurality of units as described above has an advantage that it is only necessary to replace the unit when the specification is changed or repaired, and the specification can be easily changed or repaired.

  However, if it is divided into a plurality of units and the number of units increases, it may take time when assembling, exchanging and disassembling.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can easily perform operations when assembling, exchanging, and disassembling gaming machines. To do.

(17-1) One of the present invention is a cabinet G having a lower door DD1 that can be opened and closed;
Provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1, is provided with a plurality of reels RL, RC, RR on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and performs variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR. A reel unit RU capable of
A start lever DD6 that outputs a command signal in response to an operation by the player;
A symbol provided on the rear side of the reel unit RU and arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR by stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR based on a command signal output from the start lever DD6. A main control board MS for stopping and displaying
A gaming machine 1 characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the reel unit RU is provided on the lower door DD1, and the main control board MS is provided on the reel unit RU. As described above, by integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS, it is possible to easily perform operations when the gaming machine 1 is assembled, replaced, or disassembled.
Further, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, it is difficult to remove. Can be configured.
The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1. Accordingly, the main control board MS can be disposed on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. Thereby, a physical distance can be ensured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even when illegally invading from the gap of the lower door DD1, the main control board MS is not reached. It becomes difficult and security can be improved.

  (17-2) The present invention is characterized in that, in the gaming machine 1, the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed.

  According to the above configuration, the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed. Therefore, when changing the specifications of the gaming machine 1, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, the reels RL, It is possible to collectively change the RC and RR symbols and the game content.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-65493, a cover that covers the operation plate is provided in order to prevent unauthorized operation of the operation plate provided in the power supply device, and the cover is further attached to the closed position. There is known a gaming machine provided with a cover urging means. According to such a gaming machine, an unauthorized operation on the power supply device can be prevented.

  However, if the urging force by the cover urging means is increased, a strong force is required to open the cover, and the operability may be reduced. Further, if the urging force by the cover urging means is weakened, sufficient urging force is not applied to the operation plate, and the effectiveness of preventing unauthorized operation may be reduced.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the security of the power supply device without reducing the operability of the power supply device. And

(18-1) One of the present invention is a cabinet G having a lower door mechanism DD that can be opened and closed;
A power supply device DE provided in the lower space;
A speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD;
With
The power supply DE is
A power switch DE1 for selecting whether to supply power;
A switch cover DE2 that is switched by moving between an open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated and a closed state in which the power switch DE1 cannot be operated;
Speaker DD25L
A gaming machine 1 having a convex portion DD25L1 that interrupts the movement path of the switch cover DE2 and restricts the switch cover DE2 from being opened when the lower door mechanism DD is closed. .

According to the above configuration, by closing the lower door mechanism DD, the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD interrupts the movement path of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is opened. Can be regulated. On the other hand, since the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the projection DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD is released by opening the lower door mechanism DD, the switch cover DE2 cannot be operated with the power switch DE1. It is possible to switch from the closed state to the open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated.
As a result, it is possible to improve the security by preventing an unauthorized operation on the power supply device DE while ensuring the operability of the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD opened.

(18-2) In the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention, the switch cover DE2 is switched by sliding between a closed state and an open state,
The convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape,
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the moving path along which the switch cover DE2 slides is interrupted, and the switch cover DE2 is prevented from sliding and being opened.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch between the closed state and the open state by sliding the switch cover DE2. Thereby, access to the power switch DE1 in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is opened can be facilitated.
Further, since the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape, the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased, and the sound quality can be improved at the same time.

(13-1) In the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention, the switch cover DE2 has an inclined surface DE2a.
The convex portion DD25L1 also has an inclined surface DD25La,
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 abuts against the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is slid to close. It is characterized by being in a state.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are disposed at a position facing each other. The slide of the cover DE2 can be restricted.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is in a position shifted from the closed position, so that the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is Therefore, the switch cover DE2 slides and moves to the closed position.
Thus, even if the switch cover DE2 is forgotten to be closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 becomes the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2. Since the contact is pushed in, the switch cover DE2 can be slid and moved to the closed position in conjunction with the operation of closing the lower door mechanism DD.

(19-1) A housing (cabinet G) in which an opening (replenishment opening G31) through which a replenishment path (medal replenishing port P) of the automatic circulation replenishing device can be inserted is formed on the back surface (back wall G3);
A shielding member (shielding member MH1) that is formed in a flat plate shape that can shield the opening from the inside of the housing, and that can be screwed and fixed to the back surface in a shielding state that shields the opening;
A guide part that slidably guides the shielding member (shielding member MH1) from the shielding state to an open state in which the opening is exposed; and a holding part (holding part MH23a) that can hold the shielding member in the open state. A guide member (guide member MH2) having
Is provided.

  Conventionally, the gaming machine is installed on the island where the game hall is installed. It is known that an automatic circulation supply device for supplying game media such as medals to a game machine is laid on such an installation island.

  In order to supply game media from the automatic circulation supply device, an opening is generally formed on the back surface of the gaming machine housing. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-212282, an automatic circulation replenishing device connection opening formed of four arc-shaped openings whose connection is interrupted by a cutting portion is formed on the back surface of the gaming machine. When installing a gaming machine on an installation island where an automatic circulation replenishment device is laid, an opening is formed in the back of the housing by cutting the cutting part and removing the inner closing plate, and replenishing the automatic circulation replenishment device The road can be inserted through this opening. In the supply path, for example, an outlet is disposed above the hopper tank of the pachislot machine so that medals can be appropriately supplied to the hopper tank.

  By the way, with respect to already installed gaming machines, a change in arrangement location or movement to a different game arcade is generally performed. However, when the automatic circulation replenishment device is not laid on the installation island where the gaming machine is newly installed, in the conventional gaming machine, the opening on the back of the housing once formed is maintained as it is. Could be used illegally. Therefore, when the game machine applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation supply device is installed is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation supply device is not installed, there is a problem that the security is deteriorated.

  According to the said structure, the opening which can penetrate the supply path of an automatic circulation replenishment apparatus is formed in the back surface of a housing | casing, This opening can be shielded by the shielding member. The sliding of the shielding member is guided between the shielding state and the open state by the guide member. Further, the shielding member can be screwed and fixed to the rear surface of the housing in the shielding state, and is held by the guide member in the opened state. Thereby, when installing a game machine in the installation island in which the automatic circulation replenishment apparatus was laid, the shielding member is made into an open state by sliding, and the replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishment apparatus is inserted into the opening on the back. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding member from being lost. Further, when the game machine is moved, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shielding member and screwing and fixing in the shielding state. As a result, even if a game machine is applied to an installed island where an automatic circulation replenishment device is not installed after applying it to an installation island where an automatic circulation replenishment device is installed, the opening can be shielded by the shielding member that has been retained. It is possible to maintain security.

(19-2) A housing (cabinet G) in which an opening (replenishment opening G31) through which the replenishment path (medal replenishment port P) of the automatic circulation replenishment device can be inserted is formed on the back surface (rear wall G3);
It is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that can shield the opening from the inside of the housing, and can be screwed to the back surface in a shielded state in which the opening is shielded, and the upper edge is perpendicular to the back surface. A shielding member (shielding member MH1) in which a projecting portion (projecting portion MH12) is formed;
An upper edge portion (upper edge portion MH21) that is formed along the outer upper edge of the shielding member in the shielding state and restricts the movement of the shielding member in the vertical upward direction, and both ends of the upper edge portion are at one end. Two side edges (side edges MH22 and MH22) formed along the side edge of the shielding member in the shielding state in the vertically downward direction from the one end, and the other ends of the two side edges A guide groove (guide groove MH23b) is formed on the back surface side that connects the members and slides the shielding member in the vertical direction, and supports the protruding portion of the shielding member on the upper surface to hold the shielding member A guide member (guide member MH2) having a portion (lower edge portion 23, holding portion MH23a),
Is provided.

  According to the said structure, the opening which can penetrate the supply path of an automatic circulation replenishment apparatus is formed in the back surface of a housing | casing, This opening can be shielded by the shielding member. The shield member is guided to slide between the shield state and the open state by a guide groove formed in the lower edge portion of the guide member. Further, the sliding of the shielding member is restricted in the movement in the vertical upward direction by the upper edge portion of the guide member, and the movement in the horizontal direction is restricted by the two side edge portions and the lower edge portion. It is possible to prevent the shield member from being detached from the guide member during sliding. Further, the shielding member can be screwed and fixed to the rear surface of the housing in the shielding state, and is held by the guide member in the opened state. Thereby, when installing a game machine in the installation island in which the automatic circulation replenishment apparatus was laid, the shielding member is made into an open state by sliding, and the replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishment apparatus is inserted into the opening on the back. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding member from being lost. Further, when the game machine is moved, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shielding member and screwing and fixing in the shielding state. As a result, even if a game machine is applied to an installed island where an automatic circulation replenishment device is not installed after applying it to an installation island where an automatic circulation replenishment device is installed, the opening can be shielded by the shielding member that has been retained. It is possible to maintain security.

  (19-3) The protruding portion of the shielding member protrudes from the lower edge portion that holds the shielding member.

  According to the said structure, it becomes easy to grasp a protrusion part and it becomes possible to transfer to an shielding state from an open state easily.

  Conventionally, a medal overflow prevention member such as a guide member is provided to prevent the medal from overflowing from the hopper device or the auxiliary storage, and the medal flows from the selector to the hopper device, and the auxiliary storage from the hopper device. There is known a gaming machine that prevents a medal that flows into a hopper from overflowing from a hopper device and an auxiliary storage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-188397). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a problem in which overflowing medals accumulate inside the gaming machine and interfere with other electronic devices and movable members.

  However, in recent years, there are new medal flows other than the above-described medal flow, such as when medals are automatically replenished from the outside, and measures against these new medal flows are required.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and provides a gaming machine that can prevent medals from overflowing from a hopper device or the like even when medals are replenished from the outside. For the purpose.

(20-1) One of the present invention is a cabinet G,
A medal replenishment mechanism MH provided on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and receiving a thin metal medal into the cabinet G;
A hopper mechanism HP having a bucket HP1 for storing medals received from the medal supply mechanism MH;
A coin disposed below the medal replenishment mechanism MH and provided from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G to the bucket HP1 so as to fill a gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Guard HP30,
A gaming machine 1 characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, since the coin guard HP30 is provided so as to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, the medal received from the medal supply mechanism MH Even if it is likely to overflow from HP1, it is possible to prevent entry into the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overflowing medals from collecting in the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfering with other electronic devices and movable members.

(20-2) In the gaming machine 1, the present invention includes an overflow bucket OF that is provided at a predetermined distance from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and that stores medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP.
The coin guard HP30 is L-shaped by combining a first guard part HP301 provided from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G to the bucket HP1 and a second guard part HP302 provided from the overflow bucket OF to the bucket HP1. It is formed in a shape and is inclined so as to fall into the bucket HP1 side.

According to the above configuration, the coin guard HP30 can be disposed between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1.
Even when a medal is placed on the coin guard HP30, the medal is inclined toward the bucket HP1 due to its own weight, so that the medal can be normally stored in the hopper mechanism HP. .

  Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-20154, as a hopper (coin dispensing device) capable of accommodating a plurality of coins is slid and installed inside a housing, a connector provided behind the hopper is attached to the housing. A gaming machine that can be electrically connected to a connector provided inside the body is known. According to such a gaming machine, the physical installation of the hopper in the casing and the electrical connection can be performed at the same time, so that the work efficiency of the installation, replacement, and inspection of the hopper can be improved.

  However, when the hopper is slid and installed inside the housing, if the hopper is slid at a shifted position, the connector provided behind the hopper may come into contact with the back plate of the housing and be damaged. There is.

  In this regard, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-20154, a guide rail is provided for guiding the hopper to slide. However, when the hopper is urgently installed, the slide is not correctly guided by the guide unit. In some cases, the connector cannot be sufficiently protected by the guide portion alone.

  Accordingly, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of normally slidably installing a hopper inside a casing.

(21-1) The present invention is a gaming machine 1 in which a connector HP41 provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to a connector G81 provided on the back side of the cabinet G,
A pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP;
It is provided on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G and has an upper part HG121 / HG131 and a lower part HG123 / HG133, and a pair of guide pieces HP21 / HP22 is sandwiched between the upper part HG121 / HG131 and the lower part HG123 / HG133. A pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 capable of guiding the hopper mechanism HP slidably in the depth direction of the cabinet G in the engaged state
Projections HG124 and HG134 provided above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and on the front side of the connector HP41,
Is a gaming machine 1 having

According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is slidably installed on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP are located on the upper portions of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. When the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are not squeezed between the HG121 and HG131 and the lower portions HG123 and HG133 and are accidentally slid above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are By contacting the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 provided above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the HG12 and HG13, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an incorrect position. That is, the hopper mechanism HP can be normally slid and installed inside the cabinet G.
Accordingly, the hopper mechanism HP is slid and installed at an incorrect position, and the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented from coming into contact with the connector G81 and damaging the connector G81.

  (21-2) The present invention is a gaming machine characterized in that portions of the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 disposed in front of the cabinet G have a tapered shape.

  According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is engaged with the guide rails HG12 and HG13, it is possible to prevent the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 from coming into contact with the hopper mechanism HP.

  (21-3) In the present invention, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 of the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 are integrally formed by bending a single plate. Is a gaming machine characterized by

  According to the above configuration, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and the projecting portions HG124 and HG134 of the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 can be produced by a single plate. Thereby, simplification of a manufacturing process can be achieved.

  (21-4) Since the protrusions HG124 and HG134 are on the rear side of the cabinet G, when the hopper mechanism HP is temporarily placed around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparation stage for engaging the guide rails HG12 and HG13. You can avoid getting in the way.

  (21-5) Since the planar space HG17 is provided in front of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP are provided in the planar space HG17. As a preparatory stage before engaging with the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed. Thus, the hopper mechanism HP can be slid and installed on the bottom of the cabinet G.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a control board that performs control related to lottery and effects associated with a game is arranged at the top of the housing, and a hopper device that handles medals is arranged at the bottom of the housing (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-188395). Issue gazette). According to such a gaming machine, since there is a distance between the control board and the hopper device, the medal is prevented from physically contacting the control board, and the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the medals is also affected. Can be small.

  However, in recent years, in order to simplify component replacement, recycling, and the like, operation devices, rendering devices, and the like are often unitized and arranged on the top of the housing. If it does so, the case where a control board is arrange | positioned in the lower part of a housing | casing on account of a design and the distance between a control board and a hopper apparatus will become near may arise.

  As a result, since the distance between the control board and the hopper device becomes close, the medal may physically come into contact with the control board, or the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the medals may be increased.

  Accordingly, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and even when the distance between the control board and the hopper device is short, the medal physically contacts the control board. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between medals.

(22-1) One of the present invention is a cabinet G having an upper space and a lower space;
A display unit A provided in the upper space;
A sub-control device SS that is arranged on the back side of the lower space and controls the game,
A hopper mechanism HP that is disposed in front of the sub-control device SS in the lower space and stores a metal medal;
A sheet metal BK provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP;
With
The sub-control device SS is a gaming machine 1 that is sandwiched between a back wall G3 in a lower space and a sheet metal BK.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal flows into the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub-control device SS side, the sheet metal BK. This prevents the medal from physically contacting the sub-control device SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented by the sheet metal BK.
Further, since the sub-control device SS is provided on the back side of the lower space and is sandwiched between the back wall G3 of the lower space and the sheet metal BK, the sub-control device SS must be removed from the cabinet G without removing the sheet metal BK. It cannot be removed. Thereby, the security for the sub-control device SS is enhanced.

  (22-2) Since the metal plate BK is connected to the metal frame of the gaming machine 1, the radiation due to the medal coming into contact with the metal plate BK and the radiation due to the contact between the metal medals due to the dropping of the medal, It can be grounded through a metal frame.

  Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-12239, a button unit provided with a locking portion that is elastically deformed on a side surface so as to be attachable to the front door opening from the front surface is provided. A gaming machine is known in which a button unit is provided with a flange portion larger than the opening in order to fill a gap between the button unit and the opening. In such a gaming machine, the button unit can be easily fitted into the opening from the front using the elastic deformation of the locking portion. Further, since the flange portion fills the gap between the button unit and the opening, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of inserting a wire or the like from the gap to elastically deform the locking portion and removing the button unit.

  However, there are cases where the button unit cannot be sufficiently fixed to the front door only by elastically deforming and fixing the locking portion to the back of the front door. Further, the external appearance may be impaired when the flange portion is exposed to the outside (front door).

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of firmly fixing a button to a housing.

(23-1) One of the present invention is a cabinet G,
A second pedestal portion DD2b provided in the cabinet G and a maximum BET button DD8 attached through an opening portion DD2ba formed in the second pedestal portion DD2b;
With
Maximum BET button DD8
An operation portion DD81 which is disposed outside the cabinet G with respect to the opening portion DD2ba, has a communication hole DD816a / DD816b and screw holes DD8163a / DD8163b, and has a flange DD8111 which is larger than the opening portion DD2ba;
A locking portion DD82 that is disposed on the inner side of the cabinet G with respect to the opening portion DD2ba, has communication holes DD826a and DD826b, and has a flange DD823 that is larger than the opening portion DD2ba.
The gaming machine 1 includes a communication hole DD 826a / DD 826b, a communication hole DD 816a / DD 816b, and a screw DD 83a / DD 83b that is screwed in communication with the screw hole DD8163a / DD8163b.

  According to the above configuration, the operating portion DD81 and the locking portion DD82 are opened by the communication holes DD826a and DD826b, the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, and the screws DD83a and DD833b that are screwed in communication with the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b. It can be fixed to the second pedestal part DD2b via the part DD2ba. Moreover, since the operation part DD81 has a shape part larger than opening part DD2ba, it can prevent that the maximum BET button DD8 falls into the inner side of the cabinet G from the outer side of opening part DD2ba. Further, since the locking portion DD82 also has a flange DD823 larger than the opening portion DD2ba, the maximum BET button DD8 can be prevented from coming out of the cabinet G from the inside of the opening portion DD2ba. Thereby, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b.

(23-2) In the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention, the operation unit DD81 is
A button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b;
A first member DD812 that can slide through the through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing;
A spring DD813 for returning DD812 pushed in by pressing to an initial position;
Have
The shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811 are the same.

According to the above configuration, since the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811 are the same, when the first member DD812 is viewed from above, the button base DD811 is moved by the first member DD812. It is hidden and only the first member DD812 pressed by the player can be shown to the outside. Thereby, the external appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified, and the design of the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.
In addition, since the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 is the same as the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811, the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 is smaller than that of the top surface of the button base DD811. The base DD811 can have a structure that can easily prevent unauthorized intrusion through the gap between the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

(24-1) A symbol display means (reel device) provided with a reel (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels RU)
Start command means (start lever DD6, etc.) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means (main control board MS, drive) that displays the fluctuations of the symbols arranged on the reel by rotating the reel. Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means, stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) that stops and displays the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel. Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement from the reference position of the reel accompanying rotation;
A detection piece (detection piece RU1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference (circumference RUD) as the reel rotates;
A sensor (sensor unit RU112) having one detection point (detection point RUP) on the circumference as a detection position;
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached a reference position based on detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
With
The reference position specifying means uses the position of the reel when detecting that the detection piece is changed from a non-detection state to a detection state as a first reference position, and the detection piece is detected. The position of the reel when it is detected that the state has changed to an undetected state is set as a second reference position;
The detection piece is continuously detected by the sensor until the reel position becomes the second reference position after the reel position becomes the first reference position.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on the surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal etc.”) are inserted, and a start lever is operated by a player, and a plurality of reels are detected. A start switch that requests the start of rotation of the reel and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and a signal that requests the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel is output. A stop switch that is provided for each of the plurality of reels, and a motor that transmits each driving force to each reel, and a motor that controls the operation of the motor based on signals output from the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for rotating and stopping each reel, and detecting that the start lever has been operated is based on a random number value. A game machine called so-called pachislot is known, which performs lottery and stops the rotation of the reel based on the result of this lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing at which the stop button is detected. It has been.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine using a stepping motor as a motor for driving the rotation of a reel is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-263284). In such a gaming machine, a detection piece (reel index) is provided at a specific location of the reel, and the position of the reel can be calculated based on the number of times a pulse is output with reference to the detection of the reel index. . By calculating the position of the reel using such a method, it is not necessary to provide a number of detection pieces corresponding to the design, and the cost can be reduced.

  However, the position of the reel calculated while the detection piece is not detected is a theoretical position obtained based on the number of times the pulse is output, and an irregularity such as stopping the reel with bare hands occurs. There is a possibility that it does not necessarily coincide with the actual reel position.

  According to the above configuration, the detection piece that rotates along a predetermined circumference along with the rotation of the reel is continuously detected by the sensor having one point on the circumference as a detection position. Then, the first reference position is specified by detecting that the detection piece has changed from the non-detection state to the detection state (so-called on-edge), and the detection piece is detected from the detection state. The second reference position is specified by detecting the change to a non-existing state (so-called off-edge). Accordingly, it is possible to perform detection twice, when the position of the reel reaches the first reference position and when the position of the reel reaches the second reference position, during one rotation of the reel. As described above, since the detection is performed twice during one rotation of the reel, the time until the stop operation becomes effective after the rotation speed of the reel reaches the theoretically specified speed (after the acceleration process is completed). Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that it is not possible to perform one-round pressing due to the relationship between the position of the pattern to be pressed and the position of the detection piece, and as a result, uneven timing at which the stop operation becomes effective. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling inconvenience during the stop operation.

(24-2) The first reference position and the second reference position are arranged opposite to each other across the central axis on a straight line passing through the central axis of the reel,
The detection piece includes a region on the circumferential path from a position corresponding to the first reference position to a position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path, and the second reference position. And a shape that does not include a region extending from the position corresponding to the position along the circumferential path to the position corresponding to the first reference position.

  According to the above configuration, even if only one sensor is provided, it is possible to perform detection twice during one rotation of the reel, and the same effect as when two sensors are provided can be obtained. It is done. That is, without increasing the number of sensors, it is possible to reduce the possibility that it is not possible to perform one-round pressing depending on the relationship between the position of the pattern to be pressed and the position of the detection piece.

(25-1) A symbol display means (reel) that includes a plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and that can perform variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels. Device RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6, etc.) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means (main control board MS, drive) that displays the fluctuations of the symbols arranged on the reel by rotating the reel. Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means, stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) that stops and displays the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel. Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Illuminating means (backlight RR4, etc.) for illuminating the symbol stopped and displayed in the symbol display means from behind,
Between the two adjacent reels among the plurality of reels, a support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reels is disposed,
The front portion of the support plate is formed in a generally arcuate shape when viewed from the side.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on the surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal etc.”) are inserted, and a start lever is operated by a player, and a plurality of reels are detected. A start switch that requests the start of rotation of the reel and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and a signal that requests the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel is output. A stop switch provided for each of the reels, a stepping motor for transmitting each driving force to each reel, and the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output from the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and confirms that the start lever has been operated. And a so-called pachislot that stops the reel rotation based on the lottery result ("internal winning combination") and the timing at which the stop button is detected. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine including a back lamp that irradiates a symbol from the inside of a reel (see JP 2009-178268 A). According to such a gaming machine, when a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, a design effect can be given to the symbols themselves, such as highlighting symbols constituting the symbol combination.

  However, in general, in a gaming machine, a plurality of reels are provided adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. There was a problem that we could not expect.

  According to the said structure, the support plate which supports a reel is arrange | positioned between two adjacent reels, and the front part of the support plate is formed in the side view substantially arcuate shape. Therefore, the support plate has a shape protruding forward as compared to a support plate having a rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and thus has a function as a partition plate. It is possible to prevent light from reaching adjacent reels. In addition, the function as a partition plate is not provided by simply increasing the size of the support plate, and such a function is provided by forming the front portion of the support plate in a substantially arcuate shape when viewed from the side. Therefore, the support plate does not stand out from the viewpoint of the player, and it can be prevented that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is impaired.

  The support plate has a front part having a substantially arcuate shape in a side view and a rear part in a shape (for example, a substantially rectangular shape in a side view) continuously formed rearward from both ends of an arc that defines the bow shape in the side view. Part. Note that the bow is a figure surrounded by an arc and a string connecting ends of the arc.

  Further, the support plate may directly support the reel, or may indirectly support the reel via another member. For example, the support plate may be a motor mounting plate for mounting a motor (stepping motor) that rotates the reel.

(25-2) A symbol display means (reel) including a plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels. Device RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6, etc.) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means (main control board MS, drive) that displays the fluctuations of the symbols arranged on the reel by rotating the reel. Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means, stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) that stops and displays the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel. Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Illuminating means (backlight RR4, etc.) for illuminating the symbol stopped and displayed in the symbol display means from behind,
Between the two adjacent reels among the plurality of reels, a support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reels is disposed,
The front portion of the support plate is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view.

  According to the above configuration, the support plate that supports the reel is disposed between two adjacent reels, and the front portion of the support plate is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view. Therefore, the support plate has a shape protruding forward as compared to a support plate having a rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and thus has a function as a partition plate. It is possible to prevent light from reaching adjacent reels. Moreover, the function as a partition plate is not given by simply increasing the size of the support plate, but such a function is given by forming the front portion of the support plate in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view. Therefore, the support plate does not stand out from the viewpoint of the player, and it is possible to prevent the aesthetics of the gaming machine from being impaired.

  The front portion of the support plate formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view is substantially the same size as the opposing reel portion, and it is desirable that they overlap. That is, when viewed from one side, the front portion of the support plate is substantially completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side, the portion of the reel that faces the portion is substantially covered by the front portion of the support plate. It is desirable to be completely covered. Thereby, it is possible to achieve a balance between providing the support plate with a function as a partition plate and maintaining the aesthetics of the gaming machine.

  For example, the support plate is formed in a substantially semicircular front part that overlaps the front half of the reel in a side view and continuously from the both ends of an arc that defines the semicircle in a side view toward the rear. You may be comprised by the rear part of shape (for example, side view substantially rectangular shape).

(26-1) A symbol display means (reel device) provided with reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels RU)
Start command means (start lever DD6, etc.) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means (main control board MS, drive) that displays the fluctuations of the symbols arranged on the reel by rotating the reel. Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means, stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) that stops and displays the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel. Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement from the reference position of the reel accompanying rotation;
A detection piece (detection piece RU1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference with the rotation of the reel;
A sensor (sensor RU1121) for detecting the detection piece;
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached a reference position based on detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
With
The sensor is attached to a motor mounting plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for mounting a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a base member (base member RU1122),
The motor mounting plate has screw insertion portions (screw holes RU11c and screw holes RU11d) into which screws (screws RU1124a and RU1124b) for fastening the pedestal member to the motor mounting plate can be inserted at a first predetermined position and a first position. 2 provided at two predetermined locations and at two locations on a second straight line (straight line RUDB) that is substantially perpendicular to the first straight line (straight line RUDA) connecting the first predetermined position and the second predetermined position. In addition, positioning insertion portions (fitting holes RU11e and RU11f) are provided at the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position, which are located on the opposite sides of the first straight line,
The pedestal member is provided with positioning protrusions (protruding portions RU1122j and RU1122k) that can be inserted into the positioning insertion portions provided at the two locations.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on the surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal etc.”) are inserted, and a start lever is operated by a player, and a plurality of reels are detected. A start switch that requests the start of rotation of the reel and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and a signal that requests the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel is output. A stop switch provided for each of the reels, a stepping motor for transmitting each driving force to each reel, and the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output from the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and confirms that the start lever has been operated. And a so-called pachislot that stops the reel rotation based on the lottery result ("internal winning combination") and the timing at which the stop button is detected. Known gaming machines are known.

  In such a gaming machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see JP-A-2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor having one point on the rotation path as a detection position. Then, the position where the reel index is detected is set as the reference position of the reel, and the position of the reel is calculated based on this reference position and the number of excitation steps of the stepping motor.

  Incidentally, the conventional reel index detection sensor is generally disposed on a motor mounting plate to which a reel motor is attached via a base member. Thereby, the sensor is arranged in the vicinity of the rotation path of the reel index. However, if the positioning of the pedestal member to the motor mounting plate is not performed correctly, the gaming machine may be erroneously determined based on the reel stop position, or the gaming machine may be damaged due to contact between the sensor and the reel index. There was a fear.

  According to the above configuration, when the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member are mounted, the positioning projections of the pedestal member are fitted and inserted into the positioning insertion portions of the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position of the motor mounting plate. The pedestal member can be positioned with respect to the mounting plate, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member are screwed and fixed. The position of the pedestal member with respect to the motor mounting plate is regulated at four locations of the two screw insertion portions and the two positioning insertion portions, and further, the first straight line connecting the two screw insertion portions and the two positioning insertion portions. Is set to be perpendicular to the second straight line connecting the two. Thereby, it can prevent that the position of the base member with respect to the motor mounting plate shifts. Furthermore, since the screwing is only at two places of the two screw insertion portions, the attaching operation can be simplified. As a result, the mounting of the base member to the motor mounting plate can be performed simply and accurately, and it is possible to prevent erroneous determination of game results and damage to the gaming machine.

  (26-2) The positioning insertion portion provided at one of the third predetermined location and the fourth predetermined location is formed in a slot shape in which the second linear direction is the longitudinal direction. .

  According to the said structure, in the two positioning insertion parts arrange | positioned on a 2nd straight line, one is formed in the elongate hole shape from which a 2nd linear direction becomes a longitudinal direction. Thereby, the error of the space | interval when shape | molding two positioning projection parts in a base member can be accept | permitted.

  The positioning insertion portion has a longitudinal direction substantially perpendicular to a tangential direction of rotation of the detection piece at the detection position of the sensor.

  According to the above configuration, even if a positional deviation from the base member occurs in the fitting hole having the longitudinal direction, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the reference position of the reel by the sensor.

(27-1) A symbol display means (reel device) provided with reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels RU)
Start command means (start lever DD6, etc.) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means (main control board MS, drive) that displays the fluctuations of the symbols arranged on the reel by rotating the reel. Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means, stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) that stops and displays the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel. Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement from the reference position of the reel accompanying rotation;
A detection piece that rotates along a predetermined circumference as the reel rotates;
A sensor (sensor RU1121) for detecting the detection piece;
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached a reference position based on detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
With
The reel position specifying means includes
The sensor is attached to a motor mounting plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for mounting a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a base member (base member RU1122),
The pedestal member has screw insertion portions (screw holes RU1122c and screw holes RU1122d) into which screws (screws RU1123a and RU1123b) for fastening the sensor to the pedestal member can be inserted in a first predetermined position and a second predetermined position. And two locations on a second straight line (straight line RUDD) that is substantially perpendicular to a first straight line (straight line RUDC) that connects the first predetermined position and the second predetermined position. Positioning protrusions (protruding portions RU1122e and RU1122f) are provided at the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position that are located on the side where the sensor detects the detection piece from the first straight line
The sensor is provided with positioning insertion portions (fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f) into which the positioning protrusions provided at the two locations can be inserted.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on the surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal etc.”) are inserted, and a start lever is operated by a player, and a plurality of reels are detected. A start switch that requests the start of rotation of the reel and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and a signal that requests the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel is output. A stop switch provided for each of the reels, a stepping motor for transmitting each driving force to each reel, and the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output from the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and confirms that the start lever has been operated. And a so-called pachislot that stops the reel rotation based on the lottery result ("internal winning combination") and the timing at which the stop button is detected. Known gaming machines are known.

  In such a gaming machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see JP-A-2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor having one point on the rotation path as a detection position. Then, the position where the reel index is detected is set as the reference position of the reel, and the position of the reel is calculated based on this reference position and the number of excitation steps of the stepping motor.

  Incidentally, the conventional reel index detection sensor is generally disposed on a motor mounting plate to which a reel motor is attached via a base member. Thereby, the sensor is arranged in the vicinity of the rotation path of the reel index. However, if accurate positioning of the sensor on the pedestal member is not performed, there is a possibility that the gaming machine may be erroneously determined based on the reel stop position or the gaming machine may be damaged due to contact between the sensor and the reel index. was there.

  According to the above configuration, when the pedestal member and the sensor are attached, the positioning projections of the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position of the pedestal member are fitted into the positioning insertion portion of the sensor, so that the sensor with respect to the pedestal member is inserted. Positioning can be performed, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the base member and the sensor are screwed and fixed. The position of the sensor with respect to the pedestal member is regulated at four locations of the two screw insertion portions and the two positioning projection portions, and further, the first straight line connecting the two screw insertion portions and the two positioning insertion portions are connected. The second straight line is set to be perpendicular. Thereby, it can prevent that the position of the sensor with respect to the base member shifts. Furthermore, since the screwing is only at two places of the two screw insertion portions, the attaching operation can be simplified. As a result, the sensor can be attached to the base member simply and accurately, and it is possible to prevent erroneous determination of game results and damage to the gaming machine.

  (27-2) The screw insertion portion provided at one of the first predetermined location and the second predetermined location is formed in a slot shape in which the first linear direction is the longitudinal direction. .

  According to the above configuration, in the two screw insertion portions arranged on the first straight line, one is formed in a long hole shape in which the first linear direction is the longitudinal direction. Thereby, the error of the space | interval in shaping | molding two screwing locations in a sensor can be accept | permitted.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-245279, a gaming machine is known that includes a locking member that is attached after a button unit is mounted and prevents unauthorized removal of the button unit. According to such a gaming machine, by attaching the locking member to the existing button unit, unauthorized removal of the button unit can be prevented without changing the existing button unit.

  However, in order to prevent unauthorized removal of the button unit, it is necessary to secure a storage space for the additional parts in the gaming machine to attach the new additional parts, which may not be easy to apply. .

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent unauthorized removal of a button unit while suppressing an increase in size of components. To do.

(28-1) One of the present invention is a button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b,
A first member DD812 that can slide through the through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing;
A spring DD813 for returning the first member DD812 pushed in by pressing to an initial position;
A photosensor DD814 having a light emitting part DD814a and a light receiving part DD814b;
A second member DD815 having a light shielding piece DD8151 that blocks between the light emitting part DD814a and the light receiving part DD814b of the photosensor DD814;
A maximum BET button DD8 having
The second member DD815 is
It has a larger shape than the through holes DD811a and DD811b.
The gaming machine 1 is characterized by being attached to a portion of the first member DD812 extending from the through hole DD811a / DD811b.

According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a larger shape than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and is attached to a part of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. It has been. As a result, the second member DD815 can prevent the first member DD812 from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and can prevent unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD8.
Moreover, since the other member is not employ | adopted, the enlargement of components can be suppressed.

(28-2) In the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention, the button base DD811 has two through holes DD811a and DD811b formed therein.
The first member DD812 has two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b that can slide through the two through holes DD811a and DD811b.
The second member DD815 is attached so as to connect between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through-holes DD811a and DD811b, and the light-shielding piece DD8151 is connected to the second member DD815. It is characterized in that it is provided at an intermediate portion between two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the holes DD811a and DD811b.

  According to the above configuration, the light shielding piece DD8151 is slid in the two through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811, in accordance with the pressing of the first member DD812 by the player, A light shielding piece DD8151 provided at an intermediate portion of the second member DD815 attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b is formed between the light emitting portion DD814a and the light receiving portion DD814b. It can be cut across.

  (28-3) Since the first member DD812 has a larger shape than the through holes DD811a and DD811b, the first member DD812 is prevented from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b toward the second member DD815. Further, unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD8 can be further prevented.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-44199, a gaming machine in which a front door is separated into an upper door and a lower door and each can be opened and closed is known. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to open and close only the necessary parts, such as when replenishing medals (opening and closing the lower door) and adjusting the mechanical reel (opening and closing the upper door), and the inside of the gaming machine is externally unnecessary. Can be prevented (increased security).

  By the way, in recent years, in order to simplify the parts and recycling of gaming machines, unitization of operation devices and presentation devices has been performed.

  Here, for example, a rendering device unitized in a space on the housing side corresponding to the upper door is stored. In this way, it is possible to facilitate replacement of the rendering device when changing the model or recycling.

  However, when the unitized production device is large, the upper door (or the lower door) may get in the way when changing models or recycling.

  Accordingly, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly take in and out a device housed in the gaming machine.

(29-1) One of the present invention is
The cabinet G has shaft portions UH21 and UH22, and engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24.
The upper door mechanism DU that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet G is
Bearing portions UH121 and UH131 that are rotatably superposed on the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and are slidable relative to the axis UH121A of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22,
Until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, it engages with the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 and restricts sliding of the bearing portions UH121 and UH131. Engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 that are disengaged from the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 when they are opened beyond a predetermined angle;
The gaming machine 1 is characterized by having the following.

According to the above configuration, until the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 are engaged with the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are pivoted. The sliding along the axis UH121A of the parts UH21 and UH22 is restricted. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the polymerization of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 from being released, and to lock the upper door mechanism DU from being removed from the cabinet G.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G, the engagement of the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 with respect to the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 is released, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are moved to the shaft portion UH21. It becomes possible to slide along the axis UH121A of UH22. As a result, the superposition of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.

  (29-2) In the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention, the upper door mechanism DU is in a closed state when it is closed with respect to the cabinet G, and is in an open state when it is 90 ° open with respect to the cabinet G. The predetermined angle is characterized in that it is larger than the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the closed state and smaller than 90 ° which is the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the opened state.

  According to the above configuration, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (90 ° open).

(30-1) a door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
A left end light emitting mechanism that is disposed at the left end of the door and that guides light to the left end region of the door to emit light;
A right end light emitting mechanism that is disposed at a right end portion of the door and guides light to a right end region of the door to emit light;
A central light emitting substrate that is disposed in the center of the door and emits light;
A light guide mechanism that guides the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate to at least one of a left peripheral region on the left end region side and a right peripheral region on the right end region side.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body is known (see JP 2009-178268 A). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain by only the video displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect. In general, since gaming machines are installed side by side on an installation island in a game hall, the size of the gaming machine is limited. However, when a plurality of effect devices are provided, there is a possibility that a space for a configuration including a reflection plate and a light transmission plate for the effect of light by a conventional LED cannot be sufficiently taken. According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate is guided to at least one of the left peripheral region and the left peripheral region by the light guide mechanism, so that it is difficult for the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end light emitting mechanism to guide the light. Light can also be emitted in the region. Thereby, even if it is a door of a limited space, the effect of the light of several places can be performed with a higher effect.

(30-2) The central light emitting substrate is provided with an upper light source and a lower light source on an upper surface and a lower surface,
An upper light guide mechanism that guides light from the upper light source to a position spaced from the central portion; and a lower light guide mechanism that guides light from the lower light source to a position spaced from the central portion. Have.

  According to the above configuration, the left peripheral region and the right peripheral region can be caused to emit light by the upper light guide mechanism and the lower light guide mechanism using the upper light source on the upper surface and the lower light source on the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate. The left peripheral region and the right peripheral region can be expanded to a wider range and place. Thereby, even if it is a door of a limited space, the effect of the light of several places can be performed with a higher effect.

(30-3) a door (upper door mechanism UD) capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
A left end light emitting mechanism HA2 disposed at the left end portion of the door and emitting the left end region of the door in a planar shape;
A right end light emitting mechanism HA3 disposed at the right end of the door and emitting a right end region of the door in a planar shape;
A central light emitting mechanism HA4 disposed in the center of the door;
The central light emitting mechanism is
A central light emitting substrate (an LED substrate HA411 in the top lens) provided with an upper light source and a lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively;
An upper light guide mechanism (left light guide lens HA413, right light guide lens HA414) that guides light from the upper light source provided on the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate to the upper light guide region and emits light in a planar shape;
A lower light guide mechanism (right downlight lens HA415, left downlight lens) that guides light from the lower light source provided on the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate to the lower light guide region and emits light in a planar shape. And have.

  According to the above configuration, the central light emitting substrate of the central light emitting mechanism has the upper light source and the lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively. The lower light guide region is caused to emit light in a planar shape. As a result, in addition to the left end region by the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end region by the right end light emitting mechanism, the upper light guide region and the lower light guide region can be made to emit light by one central light emitting mechanism. Even if it is a door, the effect of the light of several places can be performed with a higher effect.

  (30-4) The upper light guide mechanism and the lower light guide mechanism are arranged symmetrically about the central light emitting substrate.

  According to the above configuration, since the upper light guide region and the lower light guide region exist symmetrically about the central light emitting substrate, a plurality of light effects can be produced even in a limited space door. , It can be performed with a higher production effect.

(30-5) The upper light guide mechanism includes an upper reflector (a top lens reflector HA412, a top lens middle LED substrate hidden member HA16) that covers an upper surface of the central light emitting substrate and the upper light source, and the upper reflector and the center. An upper light guide lens (left light guide lens HA413, right light guide lens HA414) disposed on the right side and the left side of the gap with the light emitting substrate and disposed on the upper light guide region,
The lower light guide mechanism includes a lower reflector that covers the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate and the lower light source, the lower reflector (the top lens reflector HA412, the top lens LED substrate hidden member HA16), and the central light emitter. A lower light guide lens (a right downlight lens HA415, a left downlight lens) disposed on the side of the gap between the substrate and the lower light guide region.

  According to the said structure, the effect of the light of several places is realizable by the simple structure of a reflector and a light guide lens.

(30-6) The upper light guide mechanism is disposed so that each region on the center side from the left end region and the right end region of the door emits light as the upper light guide region,
The lower light guide mechanism is disposed so that each region above the upper speaker disposed on the upper left portion and the upper right portion of the door emits light as a lower light guide region.

  According to the above configuration, the upper light guide mechanism and the lower light guide mechanism can emit light in a region where the left light emission mechanism and the right end light emission mechanism cannot sufficiently emit light.

(31-1) A gaming machine having a rendering device (screen mechanism D) disposed in the center of the front surface of the housing (housing 2) and a light emitting unit (left panel mechanism HJ) disposed on the side of the rendering device. Because
The light emitting unit is
A light source device (left LED substrate HJ1) capable of irradiating light to the front side and the rear side of the housing;
A partition member (partition mechanism HJ2) that divides the light toward the front side into two, and guides the light divided into one side toward the one side surface of the housing;
A side surface translucent member (upper left side lens HJ3) that constitutes a part of one side surface of the housing and transmits the light divided into the one guided by the partition member;
A front translucent member (lower left lens HJ) that constitutes a part of the front surface of the housing and transmits light divided into the other by the partition member;
An inner light guide member (inner light guide member HJ5) for guiding light toward the rear surface direction in the direction in which the effect device is disposed;
Have

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device that can produce an effect by operating a movable body is known (see Patent Document 1). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain by only the video displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect.

  In general, since gaming machines are installed side by side on an installation island in a game hall, the size of the gaming machine is limited. However, when providing a plurality of effect devices and an effect device that occupies a large space, there is a possibility that there is not enough space for a configuration including a reflection plate and a light transmission plate for the effect of light by conventional LEDs. there were.

  According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the light source device toward the front side of the housing is divided into two parts, one is guided to one side surface of the housing by the partition member and transmitted from the side light-transmitting member, The other is transmitted from the front translucent member. Further, light emitted from the light source device toward the rear surface side of the housing is guided to the rendering device side by the light guide member. Thereby, only by providing the light emitting unit on the side surface side, it is possible not only to realize the effect light from the front and side surfaces of the gaming machine housing, but also to irradiate the effect device side with light. As a result, the space related to the effect light in the gaming machine can be saved, and the expansion of the effect device can be allowed.

(31-2) The inner light guide member is
A light transmissive member (left light guide plate HJ51) that is capable of transmitting light, is incident on the rear surface direction side of the light source device, and is disposed from the incident position to the periphery of the front surface of the effect device;
A reflective member (left LED substrate cover HJ52) disposed in engagement with the back side of the translucent member;
Have
The translucent member is
A protruding portion (protruding portion HJ511a) having a shape protruding to the light source device, disposed in the traveling direction of light toward the rear surface side of the light source device, and receiving light toward the rear surface direction side of the light source device. When,
A wall surface engaged with the reflecting member of the translucent member, disposed in the traveling direction of the light incident on the projecting portion, and tilted in a direction in which the reflecting surface is directed to the effect device side and incident on the projecting portion. An inclined surface (inclined surface HJ511c) that reflects the reflected light toward the effect device,
An optical path portion (optical path portion HJ512) having a shape in which the light reflected by the inclined surface travels and is bent with respect to the traveling direction of the light;
A light emitting part (light emitting part HJ513) formed at an end of the light path in the light traveling direction and having a zigzag cross section in front view;
have.

  According to the said structure, the advancing direction will be changed to the production | presentation apparatus side by the reflection part, after the light to the rear surface direction side of a light source device injects into a protrusion part. Since the reflecting portion is disposed with the reflecting member engaged, the light is reflected into the inner light guide member. The reflected light passes through the optical path portion having a bent shape, and then reaches the light emitting portion having a zigzag shape. As a result, the light emitting portion is irregularly refracted. Thereby, since the light which advances from the light source of a light-emitting device is radiate | emitted variously outside, presentation property can be improved.

(32-1) a corner translucent member (upper left panel mechanism HB) disposed at a corner position on the front surface side of the upper surface of the housing;
A support member (panel base HH) located behind the corner light-transmitting member;
An outer wall member (top lens cover HA11) adjacent to the corner light-transmitting member and engaged with the adjacent portion;
Have
The corner transparent member is
A fitting portion (fitting portion HB11) into which a protruding portion (tight screw HH4) disposed so as to protrude from the support member toward the front surface is fitted at the rear surface side position;
A notch portion formed in the outer wall member that is disposed in the adjacent portion on the front side of the fitting portion, protrudes in a direction different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion, and extends from the placement portion toward the outer wall member. Locking pieces (locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14) to be engaged with (notches HA111, HA112, HA113);
have.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing various effects is known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685, through a movement of a movable body, a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain with only a video displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like is achieved. In such a gaming machine, it is known that a side surface or a part of the front surface of the gaming machine is configured with a light-transmitting member, and this is irradiated with a light source from the inside of the gaming machine to further enhance the effect. .

  However, when it is simply fixed by a fixing member such as a screw, the translucent member transmits light, so that there is a problem that the fixing member is visually recognized from the outside, and the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is significantly impaired. In addition, when the translucent member is extended to a place that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside and fixed with a fixing member, there is a problem that installation of a plurality of effect devices as described above or a effect device that occupies a large space is limited. there were.

  According to the above configuration, the translucent member is adjacent to the outer wall member in an engaged state, and the locking piece of the translucent member is engaged with the cutout portion of the outer wall member. And a protrusion part is engage | inserted by the fitting part of a translucent member by arrange | positioning a protrusion part from the support member to the front direction. Since the protruding portion is fitted in the fitting portion of the translucent member, movement of the translucent member in the vertical direction is restricted. Furthermore, since the fitting direction in the protruding portion and the protruding direction of the locking piece are arranged differently, the translucent member is restricted from moving in the horizontal direction by the support member and the outer wall member. As a result, the translucent member can be easily attached to the gaming machine without using the fixing member and without damaging the aesthetics of the gaming machine.

(32-2) It further has a frame member (frame part HB2) which supports the corner part translucent member in the vertical direction,
The corner light-transmitting member has a restricting portion (a restricting portion HB21) that extends to the rear position of the frame member along the frame member at a vertically lower position, and restricts movement in the front direction of the corner member light-transmitting member. doing.

  According to the above configuration, since the translucent member is supported in the vertical direction by the frame member, it is possible to reduce the stress in the vertical direction with respect to the protruding portion and the fitting portion into which the protruding portion is fitted. Furthermore, since the restricting portion of the translucent member is arranged at the rear position of the frame member, the forward movement of the translucent member itself is restricted, and the stress in the horizontal direction with respect to the locking piece and the notch portion can be reduced. it can. Thereby, deterioration of the structure related to the translucent member or the translucent member can be reduced.

(33-1) a door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
A decorative projection protruding forward from the upper part of the door;
A light guide plate (top lens light guide plate HA14) having a seamless structure that diffuses light and uniformly emits light from the surface of the decorative convex portion is provided from the front end to the rear end of the decorative convex portion. The decorative unit HA1 is formed.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-245279, a gaming machine in which an effect device is provided on a front door is known. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform various effects using the effect device, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Since the front door faces the player, it is in a state where it is susceptible to external force due to contact with the player, so it is necessary to ensure durability, but when placing importance on the arrangement and design of the stage device, There was a problem that durability was lowered. In particular, when a protrusion protruding from the front surface is provided, the possibility of contact increases, so that more durability has been demanded.

  According to the above configuration, when a plurality of parts are joined to form a light guide plate of a decorative unit, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the parts. Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation where the load is concentrated on a part. As a result, the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit including the light guide plate having a seamless structure has large rigidity and strength as a whole, and therefore, external force is applied by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. Even in the case of deformation, it becomes difficult to cause deformation and breakage, and as a result, the durability of the door can be increased.

(33-2) The decoration unit is
The top lens light guide plate base HA15 connected to the door frame and the top lens cover HA11 that transmits the light to the outside form a hollow portion, and the light guide plate is accommodated in the hollow portion,
The front region is curved downward, and the width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and is formed in a shape having a vertex at the front end center portion,
The back surface of the front region and the frame of the door are connected by a decorative unit support mechanism arranged horizontally.

  According to the above configuration, the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the light guide plate are simply laminated by accommodating the light guide plate in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover. A decorative convex part having higher rigidity than that of a plate shape can be formed. Also, the bending moment increases as it approaches the front end that is farther from the rear end connected to the frame of the door, but by reducing the weight in the left-right direction on the front end side, the rigidity of the front region and It is possible to increase the strength. In addition, the back surface of the front area of the decorative unit curved downward is connected to the door frame via the horizontally arranged decorative unit support mechanism, so that the back surface of the front area of the decorative unit is supported by the decorative unit support mechanism. It is supported in the horizontal direction, and the front region has a large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction. As a result, even when an external force is applied from the player or the like to the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit, it becomes difficult to be deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be increased. It has become.

(33-3) a door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
A decorative projection protruding forward from the upper part of the door;
The decorative projection is
A top lens light guide plate base connected to the frame of the door; a top lens light guide plate HA14 that diffuses light and emits it uniformly from the surface; and a top lens cover that transmits the light to the outside.
The width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and the decorative unit is formed in a shape having a vertex at the center of the front end.

  According to the above configuration, the bending moment increases as it approaches the front end portion that is away from the rear end portion connected to the door frame, but the rigidity is reduced by reducing the width in the left-right direction on the front end side and reducing the weight. In addition, the strength can be increased. As a result, the decorative convex portion has a large rigidity and strength in the front region, so that it is difficult to cause deformation or damage even when an external force is applied by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. As a result, the durability of the door can be increased.

(33-4) The decoration unit is
A hollow portion is formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, and the top lens light guide plate is accommodated in the hollow portion.

  According to the above configuration, the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the top lens light guide plate are simplified by accommodating the top lens light guide plate in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover. Since the cross-sectional secondary moment is larger than that in the case of being laminated in a plate shape, a decorative projection having high rigidity can be formed.

(33-5) The decorative unit has a front region curved downward.
The back surface of the front region in the decoration unit and the frame of the door are connected by a decoration unit support mechanism arranged horizontally.

  According to the above configuration, the back surface of the front region of the decorative unit is decorated by connecting the back surface of the front region of the decorative unit curved downward to the door frame via the horizontally arranged decorative unit support mechanism. The unit is supported in the horizontal direction by the unit support mechanism. As a result, the decorative convex portion having the decorative unit and the decorative unit support mechanism is given an external force by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine because the front region has large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction. Even in the case of deformation, it becomes difficult to cause deformation and breakage, and as a result, the durability of the door can be increased.

  (33-6) An irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light in the direction of the screen device C disposed obliquely downward and rearward is disposed behind the decorative convex portion.

  According to the above configuration, since a large space can be secured behind the decorative convex portion, the size of the irradiation light device and the degree of arrangement can be increased, and the decorative convex portion has high rigidity and strength. The irradiation light device can be sufficiently protected.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments described above, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are at predetermined positions in the display unit A. It is fixed. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B <b> 3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the reflection direction of light, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet 21. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21 of the gaming machine 1, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD opened. Can be adjusted. Thereby, even when the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, mirror mechanism, and various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the gaming machine without being unitized.

[Third Embodiment]
The first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above. Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions where the description in the second embodiment applies also in the third embodiment will be omitted.

[Functional flow of pachislot]
First, with reference to FIG. 145, a functional flow of the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a pachislot) in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating a functional flow of the pachislot.

  In the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to the medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which medals are paid out, replays, etc. are given to the player, and those other than so-called “losing”. Yes.

  Subsequently, after a plurality of reels (left reel, middle reel, and right reel) have been rotated, when the player presses the stop button, the reel stop control means has the internal winning combination and the stop button Control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed based on the pressed timing.

  Here, in the pachislot, basically, the control of stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”, and the maximum number is determined as four symbols.

  The reel stop control means displays the symbol combination as much as possible along the winning determination line using the specified time when an internal winning combination permitting display of the symbol combination related to winning is determined. Stop the reel rotation so that On the other hand, for the combination of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the reel rotation is stopped so that the combination is not displayed along the winning determination line using the specified time.

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot.

  In this specification, the reel stop operation (stop button operation) that is performed first when all the reels (left reel, middle reel, and right reel) are rotating is referred to as a first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the first stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  In addition, in the pachislot, various effects are performed by using the display of video performed by the display unit, the output of light by various LEDs, the output of sound by a speaker, or a combination thereof in the above-described series of flows. Is called.

  When the player operates the start lever, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the content of the production is determined, the production execution means is linked to each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reel is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, or when the presence / absence of a prize is determined. To proceed with the production. In this way, in the pachislot machine, the player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. As a result, the player's interest is improved.

[Control system for pachislot machines]
Next, a control system provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147.

  As described in the second embodiment, the gaming machine 1 includes the main control board MS and the sub control device SS. The main control board MS constitutes a main control circuit 1060. The main control circuit 1060 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the gaming machine 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels RL, RC, RR, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The sub control device SS constitutes a sub control circuit 1070. The sub-control circuit 1070 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying images.

  In the second embodiment, the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is controlled by the main control board MS. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is controlled by the sub-control device SS.

  Hereinafter, specific configurations of the main control circuit 1060 and the sub control circuit 1070 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147.

<Main control circuit>
First, the main control circuit 1060 constituted by the main control board MS will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit.

  The main control circuit 1060 includes a microcomputer 1030 installed on the main control board MS as a main component. The microcomputer 1030 includes a main CPU 1031, a main ROM 1032, and a main RAM 1033.

  The main ROM 1032 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 1031, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 1070, and the like. The main RAM 1033 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 1031 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 1034, a frequency divider 1035, a random number generator 1036, and a sampling circuit 1037. The clock pulse generation circuit 1034 and the frequency divider 1035 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 1031 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 1036 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 1037 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  A switch or the like is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 1030. The main CPU 1031 receives input from a switch or the like and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, and 1049R. The stop switch 1007S (stop switches 1007LS, 1007CS, 1007RS) detects that each of the three stop buttons DD7 (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R) has been pressed (stop operation) by the player. The start switch 1006S detects that the start lever DD6 has been operated by the player (start operation).

  The medal sensor 1005S detects that a medal received at the medal insertion slot DD5 has passed through the selector. Further, the C / P switch 1013S detects that the C / P button DD13 has been pressed by the player.

  The BET switch 1008S detects that the BET button has been pressed by the player. As the BET button, in addition to the maximum BET button DD8 described in the second embodiment, a 1-BET button is provided. As described above, when the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed once, “3” is selected as the number of inserted medals. On the other hand, when the 1-BET button is pressed once, “1” is selected as the number of inserted medals, and when the 1-BET button is pressed twice, “2” is selected as the number of inserted medals. When the BET button is pressed three times, “3” is selected as the number of medals inserted. When a BET button (maximum BET button DD8 or 1-BET button) is pressed, the number of medals necessary for one game (two or three in this embodiment) is inserted. The winning determination line described later is activated.

  Peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 1030 include stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R and a hopper mechanism HP. A circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 1030.

  The drive control board RU114 controls driving of stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, and 1049R provided corresponding to each reel (reels RL, RC, and RR). The reel position detection circuit 1050 detects a reference position (first reference position and second reference position) each time the reels RL, RC, and RR make a half turn by an optical sensor (sensor unit RU112) having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. (See FIG. 116).

  The stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, and 1049R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output pulses and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, and 1049R is transmitted to the reels RL, RC, and RR through a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time one pulse is output to the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R, the reels RL, RC, RR rotate at a constant angle.

  The main CPU 1031 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, and 1049R after detecting the reference position, so that the rotation angles of the reels RL, RC, and RR (mainly, the number of symbols of the reels) The position of each symbol arranged on the surface of the reels RL, RC, RR is managed.

  The hopper drive circuit 1041 controls the operation of the hopper mechanism HP. The payout completion signal circuit 1051 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 1040S provided in the hopper mechanism HP, and checks whether or not the medals discharged from the hopper mechanism HP have reached the payout number. To do.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 1070 constituted by the sub control device SS will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit.

  The sub control circuit 1070 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 1060, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 1060. The sub control circuit 1070 basically includes a sub CPU 1071, a sub ROM 1072, a sub RAM 1073, a rendering processor 1074, a rendering RAM 1075, a driver 1076, a DSP (digital signal processor) 1077, an audio RAM 1078, an A / D converter 1079, and an amplifier 1080. It is comprised including.

  The sub CPU 1071 controls output of video, sound, and light in accordance with a control program stored in the sub ROM 1072 in accordance with a command transmitted from the main control circuit 1060. The sub-RAM 1073 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 1060. The sub ROM 1072 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 1071 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 1060 and an effect registration task for extracting and registering effect contents (effect data) by extracting effect random numbers. , A projection mapping control task for controlling the display of the video by the display unit A based on the determined contents of the presentation, an LED control task for controlling the light output by the LED, a voice control task for controlling the sound output by the speakers DD25L and DD25R, etc. Is included.

  The data storage area stores a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video, and a sound data related to BGM and sound effects. A storage area, a storage area for storing LED data related to the light on / off pattern, and the like are included.

  In addition, the sub-control circuit 1070 includes a projector mechanism B2, a drive motor E25 constituting a front screen drive mechanism E2, a drive motor F24 constituting a reel screen drive mechanism F2, and a liquid crystal display device as peripheral devices whose operations are controlled. DD20, speakers DD25L and DD25R, and the LED board are connected.

  The projector mechanism B2 controls the light source, three liquid crystal panels corresponding to each of the three primary colors of light, red, green, and blue, a lens that expands and emits light transmitted through the liquid crystal panel, and the light source and liquid crystal panel. A transmissive liquid crystal projector. Based on an instruction from the sub CPU 1071, the control unit controls turning on and off of the light source, and controls to apply a driving voltage corresponding to the image data to each pixel of the liquid crystal panel.

  The sub CPU 1071 controls the projector mechanism B2 to emit light including an image from the lens, and thereby selects any one of a plurality of screens (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1). Video on the screen.

  As described in the second embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively.

  The sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor E25 to rotate the front screen mechanism E1 between the front exposure position and the front standby position, while controlling the drive motor F24 to expose the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel. It is rotated between the position and the reel standby position (see FIG. 53).

  When the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 51). .

  On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed, and the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed. Is displayed (see FIG. 50). On the other hand, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 (see FIG. 52). .

  If the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be disposed at the reel exposed position. Further, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be disposed at the front exposure position.

  The sub CPU 1071 executes the rotation operation of the front screen mechanism E1 on the condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 exists at the reel standby position, and the reel screen mechanism E1 on the condition that the front screen mechanism E1 exists at the front standby position. The rotation operation of the mechanism F1 is executed.

  A sensor mechanism CS (sensors CS1 to CS3) is connected to the sub control circuit 1070, and the sub CPU 1071 generates signals output from the sensors CS1 to CS3 by the same method as described in the second embodiment. Based on this, the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are appropriately managed. This prevents the screen mechanisms from interfering with each other.

  The sub CPU 1071, the rendering processor 1074, the drawing RAM 1075 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 1076 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device DD20.

  Further, the sub CPU 1071, the DSP 1077, the audio RAM 1078, the A / D converter 1079, and the amplifier 1080 output sounds such as BGM from the speakers DD25L and DD25R according to the sound data designated by the contents of the presentation.

  Further, the sub CPU 1071 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs via the LED board in accordance with the LED data specified by the production contents.

[Various data tables on the main side]
This completes the description of the circuit configuration of the pachislot machine. Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 1032 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Pattern arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table.

  The symbol arrangement table defines the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each reel (reel RL, RC, RR) and data (hereinafter referred to as symbol code) specifying the type of symbol arranged at each position. .

  In the symbol arrangement table, when the reference position (first reference position) is detected, the position of the symbol existing in the middle stage in the main display window DD4 is set to “0” in the order of advance in the rotation direction of the reels RL, RC, RR , “0” to “20” are assigned to the positions of the symbols. Therefore, by managing the number of symbols rotated after the reference position (first reference position) is detected, the symbols present mainly in the middle stage of the main display window DD4 by referring to the symbol arrangement table. It is possible to always manage the position and the type of symbol.

<Design combination table>
The symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR provided behind the main display window DD4 is stopped, the main display window DD4 is within the frame among the plural types of symbols of the reels RL, RC, RR. One symbol (three in total) is displayed in each of the upper, middle and lower areas. Here, a pseudo line (middle stage-middle stage-middle stage) formed by combining middle areas facing the reels RL, RC, RR of the main display window DD4 is a target line for determining whether or not a prize is won. It is defined as (winning determination line).

  When the symbol combination displayed on each reel (reel RL, RC, RR) along the winning determination line matches the symbol combination defined by the symbol combination table, it is determined that the winning combination is made and the medal is paid out. Privileges such as re-game operation and bonus game operation are given to the player.

  The symbol combination table defines a symbol combination, a display combination, and a payout number that are predetermined according to the type of privilege. The display combination is data for identifying a combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line.

  The display combination is represented as 1-byte data in which a unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit. For example, when the symbol “bell” of each reel (reel RL, RC, RR) is displayed along the winning determination line, “bell (00000010)” is determined as the display combination.

  Further, when a numerical value of 1 or more is determined as the payout number, medals are paid out. In the present embodiment, when a cherry, bell, or watermelon is determined as a display combination, medals are paid out. The number of payouts is defined according to the number of inserted sheets. Basically, a larger number of paid-out sheets is determined when the number of inserted sheets is small.

  In addition, when replay is determined as the display combination, replaying is performed. When BB is determined as the display combination, the bonus is activated. Although not shown, when the display combination (cherry in this embodiment) related to the operation of the ART is determined as the display combination, the operation in the ART gaming state is performed. If the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined by the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “losing”.

<Bonus operating table>
With reference to FIG. 150, the bonus operation time table will be described. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a bonus operating time table.

  The bonus operation time table defines data to be stored in various storage areas provided in the main RAM 1033 when the bonus operation is performed.

  The in-operation flag is data for identifying the type of bonus that is activated. In the present embodiment, BB (a combination continuous action device related to a first type special combination) and RB (a first type special combination) are provided as bonus types. The operation of RB is continuously performed while the operation of BB is performed.

  The operation of BB is ended when the medals that have reached the prescribed number are paid out. The operation of the RB is ended when a game that reaches the specified number of times is performed, when there is a winning that reaches the specified number of times, or when the operation of the BB ends. The bonus end number counter, the possible game number counter, and the possible winning number counter are data for managing whether or not the specified number of times or the specified number of times as a trigger end timing of the bonus has been reached.

  More specifically, numerical values defined by the bonus operation time table are stored in the respective counters, and the subtraction is performed through the operation of the bonus. As a result, the operation of the corresponding bonus is completed on condition that the value of each counter is updated to “0”.

<Internal lottery table>
The internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 shows an internal lottery table.

  The internal lottery table defines a data pointer and a lottery value according to the winning number. The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is data for designating an internal winning combination defined by an internal winning combination determination table described later. The data pointer is provided with a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer.

  In the present embodiment, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values corresponding to each winning number, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the data pointer) to which it is assigned will be determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

  FIG. 151 (a) shows an internal lottery table for a general gaming state. FIG. 151 (b) shows the internal lottery table for RB operation.

  Although not shown, in the present embodiment, an ART lottery state internal lottery table is provided. In the ART game state internal lottery table, the probability that a replay is determined as an internal winning combination (replay winning probability) is set higher than that in the general game state internal lottery table.

  In the present embodiment, the type of internal winning combination and the winning probability that are determined are varied by using different types of internal lottery tables depending on the situation such as whether the bonus or ART game state is activated or not. As a result, the expectation held by the player is undulated.

<Internal winning combination determination table>
With reference to FIG. 152, the internal winning combination determination table will be described. FIG. 152 shows an internal winning combination determination table.

  The internal winning combination determination table defines an internal winning combination in accordance with the data pointer. When the data pointer is determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

  The internal winning combination is data for identifying a combination of symbols of each reel (reels RL, RC, RR) permitted to be displayed along the winning determination line. Like the display combination, the internal winning combination is represented as 1-byte data in which a unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit. When the data pointer is “0”, the content of the internal winning combination is “lost”, which indicates that any display of symbol combinations defined by the symbol combination table described above is not permitted.

  FIG. 152 (a) shows a small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determining table. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines an internal winning combination relating to the payout of medals or an internal winning combination relating to the operation of replay. FIG. 152 (b) shows a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines internal winning combinations related to the operation of the bonus.

[Various storage areas on the main side]
This completes the description of the contents of the data table stored in the main ROM 1032. Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 1033 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
With reference to FIG. 153 (a), the configuration of the internal winning combination storing area will be described. FIG. 153 (a) is a diagram showing an internal winning combination storing area.

  The internal winning combination storing area stores the internal winning combination represented by the above-mentioned 1-byte data. When the bit is set to “1”, display of the corresponding symbol combination is permitted. When all bits are “0”, the content is lost.

  The main RAM 1033 is provided with a display combination storage area in which the display combination described above is stored. The configuration of the display combination storing area is the same as the configuration of the internal winning combination storing area. When “1” is set in the bit, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed along the winning determination line.

<Carry-over portion storage area>
The configuration of the carryover combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 (b) shows the carryover combination storage area.

  As a result of the aforementioned lottery, when an internal winning combination relating to the operation of the bonus is determined, this is stored in the carryover combination storage area. The internal winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the carryover combination) related to the operation of the bonus stored in the carryover combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the winning determination line. It has become. And while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, it is stored in the internal winning combination storage area regardless of the result of the lottery described above.

<Operation flag storage area>
With reference to FIG. 153 (c), the configuration of the operating flag storage area will be described. FIG. 153 (c) is a diagram showing the operating flag storage area.

  The operating flag storage area stores an operating flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operating flag, a unique bonus or ART gaming state is assigned to each bit. When the bit is “1”, the corresponding bonus or ART gaming state is activated. The state when all bits are “0” is defined as a general gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in this way, game states of a general game state, a BB game state (bonus game state), and an ART game state are provided.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of screens (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) are provided. Then, by rotating the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 and changing the arrangement position thereof, the relative positional relationship of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is changed. Can be made. Thereby, the screen on which the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed can be switched.

  In this specification, the relative positional relationship (screen arrangement state) of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is referred to as a screen state. In the present embodiment, such a screen state corresponds to the gaming state.

  Specifically, in the general gaming state, the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposed position. In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 51). A state in which the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposure position in this way is referred to as a normal screen state.

  In the BB gaming state, the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position. In this case, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed, and an image is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D (see FIG. 50). The state in which the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position is referred to as a bonus screen state.

  In the ART gaming state, the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position. In this case, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 (see FIG. 52). The state in which the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position is referred to as an ART screen state.

  As described above, the general gaming state and the normal screen state correspond, the BB gaming state and the bonus screen state correspond, and the ART gaming state and the ART screen state correspond. Then, when the game state is shifted, the screen state is switched from the screen state corresponding to the game state of the transfer source to the screen state corresponding to the game state of the transfer destination. Thereby, even if the gaming state shifts, the correspondence between the gaming state and the screen state is maintained.

[Main control processing]
This completes the description of the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 1033. Next, the contents of a program executed by the main CPU 1031 of the main control circuit 1060 will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 163.

<Main control processing>
First, with reference to FIG. 154, a main flowchart by the control of the main CPU 1031 will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing main control processing performed in the main control circuit.

  When the pachislot is powered on, first, the main CPU 1031 performs an initialization process (step S1). Next, the main CPU 1031 clears the designated storage area in the main RAM 1033 (step S2). For example, data stored in a storage area that needs to be erased for each game, such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area, is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 performs a medal acceptance / start check process which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 155A and 155B (step S3). In this process, input checks of the medal sensor 1005S and the start switch 1006S are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 extracts random values and stores them in a random value storage area provided in the main RAM 1033 (step S4). Next, the main CPU 1031 performs an internal lottery process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 157 (step S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on a random value. Next, the main CPU 1031 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 1070 (step S6). The start command includes a parameter for specifying an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 requests the start of rotation of all reels RL, RC, RR (step S7). When the start of rotation of all the reels RL, RC, RR is requested, the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R are driven by an interrupt process (FIG. 163 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1173 msec). Controlled, rotation of each reel RL, RC, RR is started.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 performs a reel stop control process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 158 (step S8). In this process, the input of the stop switches 1007LS, 1007CS, and 1007RS is checked, and the rotation of the corresponding reels RL, RC, and RR is stopped based on the timing when the stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R is pressed and the internal winning combination. Is done.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 searches for a combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line, and determines a payout number and the like based on the result (step S9). As a result of the search, if the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line matches the symbol combination defined by the symbol combination table, the corresponding display combination and the number of payouts are determined. Next, the main CPU 1031 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 1070 (step S10). The display command includes parameters that specify the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 performs medal payout processing (step S11). Based on the determined payout number, the hopper mechanism HP is driven and the credit number is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 sets the demo transition timer to ON (step S12). That is, the main CPU 1031 starts measuring the time elapsed from this point.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 performs a bonus operation check process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 159 (step S13). It is checked whether or not the bonus operation starts.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 performs a bonus end check process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 160 (step S14). It is checked whether or not to end the bonus operation with reference to various counters for managing the bonus end timing.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 executes an ART operation check process (step S15). The ART operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 executes an ART end check process (step S16). The ART end check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the process of step S16, the main CPU 1031 moves the process to step S2.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
Next, the medal acceptance / start check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 155A and 155B. FIG. 155A and FIG. 155B are flowcharts showing medal acceptance / start check processing performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the automatic insertion counter is 0 (step S31). When it is determined that the automatic insertion counter is 0, the medal passage permission is performed (step S32). The selector solenoid is driven, and the passage of medals in the selector is prompted.

  When determining that the automatic insertion counter is not 0, the main CPU 1031 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter (step S33). Next, the main CPU 1031 clears the automatic insertion counter (step S34). Steps S33 and S34 are processes for replaying.

  After step S32 or step S34, the main CPU 1031 sets 3 as the maximum value of the insertion number counter (step S35). Next, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the bonus operating flag is on (step S36). When determining that the bonus operating flag is on, the main CPU 1031 changes the maximum value of the insertion number counter (step S37). For example, the maximum value is changed to 2.

  The main CPU 1031 determines whether or not passage of medals has been detected after step S37 or when it is determined in step S36 that the bonus operating flag is not on (step S38). When the main CPU 1031 determines that the passage of medals has been detected, the main CPU 1031 turns off the demo transition timer (step S39). That is, the main CPU 1031 ends the elapsed time measurement started in step S12 in FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the insertion number counter has reached the maximum value (step S40). When the main CPU 1031 determines that the insertion number counter has not reached the maximum value, the main CPU 1031 increments the insertion number counter by 1 (step S41). Next, the main CPU 1031 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 1070 (step S42). The medal insertion command includes a parameter for specifying the number of inserted coins.

  When the main CPU 1031 determines in step S40 that the inserted number counter is the maximum value, the main CPU 1031 adds 1 to the credit counter (step S43). The main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the BET switch 1008S is on (step S44) after step S43, after step S42, or when it is determined that the passage of medals has not been detected in step S38.

  When determining that the BET switch 1008S is on, the main CPU 1031 turns off the demonstration transition timer (step S45). That is, the main CPU 1031 ends the elapsed time measurement started in step S12 in FIG. Then, the main CPU 1031 adds a numerical value corresponding to the BET button (maximum BET button DD8 or 1-BET button) detected to be pressed to the inserted number counter (step S46), and subtracts the numerical value from the credit counter. (Step S47).

  If it is determined in step S44 that the BET switch 1008S is not turned on, or after executing the process of step S47, the main CPU 1031 executes a process at the time of demo transition (step S48).

  Here, the demo transition process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a demo transition process performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the value of the demo transition timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 10 seconds) (step S201). The value of the demo transition timer indicates an elapsed time since the execution of step S12 in FIG.

  When determining that the value of the demo transition timer is less than the predetermined value, the main CPU 1031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the demo transition timer is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, the main CPU 1031 transmits a demo transition command to the sub control circuit 1070 (step S202). When the demo transition command is received (see step S338 in FIG. 166B), the sub-control circuit 1070 recognizes that the value of the demo transition timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and performs a demonstration effect (see FIG. 168). It becomes.

  After executing the process of step S202, the main CPU 1031 ends the present subroutine.

  In the above, the process at the time of demo transition performed in step S48 of FIG. 155B has been described with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S48, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the insertion number counter has reached the maximum value (step S49). When it is determined that the inserted number counter has not reached the maximum value, the process proceeds to step S38, whereas when it is determined that the inserted number counter has reached the maximum value, it is determined whether or not the start switch 1006S is ON ( Step S50).

  When the main CPU 1031 determines that the start switch 1006S is not on, the main CPU 1031 proceeds to step S38, while when the main CPU 1031 determines that the start switch 1006S is on, the main CPU 1031 prohibits medal passage (step S51). The selector solenoid is not driven, and medals are expelled. When this process ends, the medal acceptance / start check process ends.

<Internal lottery processing>
Next, an internal lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 determines the internal lottery table and the number of lotteries (step S61). The operating flag storage area is referred to, and the internal lottery table and the number of lotteries are determined according to whether or not the bonus is activated. The number of lotteries indicates the number of times that a lottery value is subtracted and a determination is made as to whether a digit has occurred for each winning number defined by the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 obtains a random value stored in the random value storage area and sets it as a determination random value (step S62). Next, the main CPU 1031 sets 1 as the initial value of the winning number (step S63).

  Next, the main CPU 1031 refers to the internal lottery table and acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number (step S64). Next, the main CPU 1031 subtracts the lottery value from the determination random number value (step S65). Next, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not a digit has been made (step S66). When the main CPU 1031 determines that the digit is not performed, the main CPU 1031 subtracts 1 from the number of lotteries and adds 1 to the winning number (step S67).

  Next, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the number of lotteries is 0 (step S68). When the main CPU 1031 determines that the number of lotteries is not 0, the process proceeds to step S64. On the other hand, when the number of lotteries is determined to be 0, the main CPU 1031 sets 0 as the small role / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer. Is set to 0 (step S69).

  When the main CPU 1031 determines in step S66 that a digit has been placed, the main CPU 1031 obtains a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer according to the current winning number (step S70). After step S70 or step S69, the main CPU 1031 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer (step S71).

  Next, the main CPU 1031 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (step S72).

  Next, the main CPU 1031 executes an ART lottery process (step S73). In this process, the main CPU 1031 performs lottery based on a random value when the internal winning combination stored in the internal winning combination storing area in step S72 is a predetermined internal winning combination. Thereby, whether or not to win the ART lottery is determined. When an ART lottery is won, after a predecessor effect is performed for a predetermined number of unit games, the state shifts to the ART gaming state.

  Specifically, when the main CPU 1031 wins the ART lottery, the main CPU 1031 sets a predetermined value in the precursor effect game number counter. The value of the indication effect game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games for which the indication effect is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 1033.

  In the unit game after the next time, the main CPU 1031 executes the precursor effect, and subtracts the value of the precursor effect game number counter by one each time the unit game is performed. Then, when the value of the indication effect game number counter becomes 0, the main CPU 1031 sets the ART ready flag on.

  When an internal winning combination that allows winning of a display combination related to the operation of the ART is internally won in a state where the ART ready flag is set to ON, a push order for stopping the display combination (stop button stop order) ) Is notified. The player can win a display combination related to the operation of the ART by operating the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R according to the notified pressing order. Then, when the display combination wins, the state shifts to the ART gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is 0 (step S74). When the main CPU 1031 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is 0, the main CPU 1031 refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table and acquires the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer (step). S75). Next, the main CPU 1031 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storage area (step S76).

  After determining that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not 0 after step S76 or in step S74, the main CPU 1031 takes a logical sum of the carryover combination storage area and the internal winning combination storage area, The result is stored in the internal winning combination storing area (step S77). That is, the internal winning combination relating to the bonus operation is carried over. When this process ends, the internal lottery process ends.

<Reel stop control process>
Next, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not an effective stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R has been pressed (step S101). When the main CPU 1031 determines that the effective stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R are not pressed, the main CPU 1031 waits until it is pressed.

  When the main CPU 1031 determines that a valid stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R has been pressed, the main CPU 1031 invalidates the operation of the corresponding stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R (step S102). The valid and invalid states of each stop button DD7 (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R) are managed in a predetermined storage area provided in the main RAM 1033.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 sets 5 as the number of checks (step S103). In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to “4”, when the stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R is pressed, the position of the symbol in the middle of the corresponding main display window DD4 is included. Up to the position of the 4th symbol from the beginning is the target of the check. That is, any of the five numerical values “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4” is determined as the number of sliding frames.

  Next, based on the internal winning combination, the main CPU 1031 performs a check including the position of the symbol in the middle of the main display window DD4 (hereinafter referred to as the stop start position) when the stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R is pressed. Among the positions of the symbols within the range of the number of times, the position of the symbol with the highest priority is searched (step S104). In this process, the position of the symbol that can display the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination along the winning determination line is determined as the position of the symbol with the highest priority.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 determines the number of sliding symbols based on the search result (step S105). The number of symbols from the stop start position to the symbol position with the highest priority is determined as the number of sliding symbols. Next, the main CPU 1031 shifts to waiting for a scheduled stop position (step S106). When shifting to waiting for the planned stop position, the driving of the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C and 1049R is controlled by an interrupt process described later, and waits for the position of the symbol with the highest priority to reach the middle stage of the corresponding main display window DD4. The rotation of the corresponding reels RL, RC, RR is stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 1070 (step S107). The reel stop command includes a parameter for specifying the type of the stopped reels RL, RC, RR and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not there is a stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R whose operation is valid (step S108). That is, it is determined whether there are any reels RL, RC, RR that are still rotating. When the main CPU 1031 determines that there are stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R that are effective in operation, the main CPU 1031 proceeds to step S101, while when it determines that there are no stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R that are effective in operation, the reel stop control is performed. End the process.

<Bonus activation check process>
Next, the bonus operation check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing bonus operation check processing performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the display combination is BB (step S121). When the main CPU 1031 determines that the display combination is BB, the main CPU 1031 refers to the bonus operation time table and performs the BB operation processing (step S122). In this process, the BB operating flag is turned on, and a predetermined value is set in the bonus end number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 clears the carryover combination storage area (step S123). Next, the main CPU 1031 transmits a bonus start command to the sub control circuit 1070 (step S124). When the bonus start command is received, the sub-control circuit 1070 recognizes that the BB gaming state has been activated, and switches the screen state to a screen state (bonus screen state) corresponding to the BB gaming state (step S328 in FIG. 166A). And step S330). When the process of step S124 ends, the bonus operation check process ends.

  When determining that the display combination is not BB in step S121, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the display combination is replay (step S125). When determining that the display combination is replay, the main CPU 1031 copies the value of the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion counter (step S126).

  When the main CPU 1031 determines in step S125 that the display combination is not replay, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the BB operating flag is on (step S127). When the main CPU 1031 determines that the BB operating flag is not on, the bonus operation check process is terminated. On the other hand, when the main CPU 1031 determines that the BB operating flag is on, whether or not the RB operating flag is on. Is determined (step S128).

  When the main CPU 1031 determines that the RB in-operation flag is on, the main CPU 1031 ends the bonus operation check process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 1031 determines that the RB in-operation flag is not on, the main CPU 1031 refers to the bonus operation time table. Time processing is performed (step S129). In this process, the RB operating flag is turned on, and predetermined values are set in the winning possible number counter and the possible gaming number counter. When this process ends, the bonus operation check process ends.

<Bonus end check process>
Next, the bonus end check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a bonus end check process performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the BB gaming state (step S141). The main CPU 1031 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the operating flag storage area of the main RAM 1033 (see FIG. 153 (c)). Specifically, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the BB gaming state by determining whether or not bit 0 of the operating flag storage area is “1”.

  When determining that the current gaming state is not the BB gaming state, the main CPU 1031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is the BB gaming state, the main CPU 1031 updates the value of the bonus end number counter (step S142). In this process, the main CPU 1031 subtracts the value determined as the payout number (see step S9 in FIG. 154) from the value of the bonus end number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the bonus end number counter is 0 (step S143). When the main CPU 1031 determines that the bonus end number counter is 0, the main CPU 1031 performs BB end time processing (step S144). In this process, the BB operating flag and the RB operating flag are turned off, and various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus are cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 transmits a bonus end command to the sub-control circuit 1070 (step S145). When the bonus end command is received, the sub control circuit 1070 recognizes that the BB gaming state has ended, and the screen state is switched to a screen state (normal screen state) corresponding to the general gaming state (Steps S331 and 331 in FIG. 166B). (See step S333). When the process of step S145 ends, the bonus end check process ends.

  When the main CPU 1031 determines that the bonus end number counter is not 0 in step S143, the main CPU 1031 updates the winning possible number counter or the possible gaming number counter (step S146). The possible game number counter is decremented by 1, and when there is a win, the possible pay number counter is decremented by one. Next, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the winning possible number counter or the possible gaming number counter is 0 (step S147).

  When the main CPU 1031 determines that the winning possible number counter or the possible game number counter is not 0, the main CPU 1031 ends the bonus end check process, while determining that the possible winning number counter or the possible game number counter is 0, Processing at the end of RB is performed (step S148). In this process, the RB operating flag is turned off, and the winning possible number counter and the possible gaming number counter are cleared. When this process ends, the bonus end check process ends.

<ART operation check process>
The ART operation check process performed in step S15 in FIG. 154 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing an ART operation check process performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not an ART transition symbol combination is displayed (step S221). In this process, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the symbol combination stopped and displayed along the winning determination line is a symbol combination corresponding to an ART act combination (a display combination related to the operation of the ART).

  When determining that the ART transition symbol combination is not displayed, the main CPU 1031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART transition symbol combination is displayed, the main CPU 1031 sets the ART operating flag to ON (step S222). In this process, the main CPU 1031 sets bit 2 of the operating flag storage area (see FIG. 153 (c)) to “1”.

  This activates the ART gaming state. The ART gaming state is a state in which a push order (stop button stop order) for winning an internal winning combination is notified, and a replay winning probability is relatively high. In the ART gaming state, when a predetermined push order (internal winning combination in which a winning is established by pressing a stop button in an appropriate order) is won internally, the push order corresponding to the push order is notified. Then, the player can stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the pressing order along the winning determination line by operating the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R according to the notified pressing order.

  After executing the process of step S222, the main CPU 1031 sets “50” in the ART game number counter (step S223). The value of the ART game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games executed in the ART game state, and is stored in the main RAM 1033.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 transmits an ART start command to the sub-control circuit 1070 (step S224). When the ART start command is received, the sub control circuit 1070 recognizes that the ART gaming state has been activated, and switches the screen state to a screen state (ART screen state) corresponding to the ART gaming state (step S334 in FIG. 166B). And step S335).

  After executing the process of step S224, the main CPU 1031 ends the present subroutine.

<ART end check process>
The ART end check process performed in step S16 of FIG. 154 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an ART end check process performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the ART gaming state (step S241). The main CPU 1031 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the operating flag storage area of the main RAM 1033 (see FIG. 153 (c)). Specifically, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the ART gaming state by determining whether or not bit 2 of the operating flag storage area is “1”.

  When determining that the current gaming state is not the ART gaming state, the main CPU 1031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is the ART gaming state, the main CPU 1031 subtracts 1 from the value of the ART game number counter (see step S223 in FIG. 161) (step S242). In this process, the main CPU 1031 causes the main RAM 1033 to store a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the ART game number counter stored in the main RAM 1033 as a new value of the ART game number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (step S243). When determining that the value of the ART game number counter is not 0, the main CPU 1031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the ART game number counter is 0, the main CPU 1031 sets the ART operating flag to OFF (step S244). In this process, the main CPU 1031 sets bit 2 of the operating flag storage area (see FIG. 153 (c)) to “0”. As a result, the ART gaming state ends.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 transmits an ART end command to the sub-control circuit 1070 (step S245). When the ART end command is received, the sub control circuit 1070 recognizes that the ART gaming state has ended, and switches the screen state to a screen state (normal screen state) corresponding to the general gaming state (steps S336 and 166B in FIG. 166B). (See step S337).

  After executing the process of step S245, the main CPU 1031 ends the present subroutine.

<Interrupt processing>
Next, an interrupt process (1.1173 msec) under the control of the main CPU 1031 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 saves registers (step S161). Next, the main CPU 1031 performs input port check processing (step S162). In this process, signals input from various switches such as stop switches 1007LS, 1007CS, and 1007RS are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 performs reel control processing (step S163). In this process, stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049L, 1049C, 1049L, 1049C, 1049C, 1049C, 1049C, 1049C, 1049C, 1049C, 1049C, 1049C, 1049C, 1049C The drive of 1049R is controlled. In addition, when the number of sliding pieces is determined, the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, and 1049R are configured to wait for the rotation of the corresponding reels RL, RC, and RR to continue for the number of sliding pieces and to decelerate and stop the rotation. Drive is controlled.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 performs a lamp and 7-segment drive process (step S164). Next, the main CPU 1031 restores the register (step S165). When this process ends, the interrupt process ends.

[Sub-control processing]
This completes the description of the contents of the program executed by the main CPU 1031 of the main control circuit 1060. Next, the contents of a program executed by the sub CPU 1071 of the sub control circuit 1070 will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166.

<Main board communication task>
A main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 1071 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task performed in the sub control circuit.

  First, the sub CPU 1071 performs a reception check on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 1060 (step S301). Next, when receiving a command, the sub CPU 1071 extracts the type of the command (step S302).

  Next, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (step S303). When the sub CPU 1071 determines that a command different from the previous command has not been received, the sub CPU 1071 proceeds to step S301. On the other hand, when determining that a command different from the previous command has been received, the sub CPU 1071 stores the command in the message queue (step S304). Move on.

<Direction registration task>
Next, an effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 1071 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing an effect registration task performed in the sub-control circuit.

  First, the sub CPU 1071 takes out a message from the message queue (step S311). Next, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not there is a message (step S312). When the sub CPU 1071 determines that there is a message, it copies the game information from the message (step S313). For example, various data, such as an internal winning combination, the types of reels RL, RC, and RR that have stopped rotating, a display combination, an operating flag, and the like specified by parameters are copied to a storage area provided in the sub RAM 1073.

  Next, the sub CPU 1071 performs an effect content determination process which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 166A and 166B (step S314). In this process, depending on the type of the received command, the contents of the effect are determined and the effect data is registered.

  The sub CPU 1071 registers animation data after step S314 or when it is determined in step S312 that there is no message (step S315). Next, the sub CPU 1071 registers sound data (step S316). Next, the sub CPU 1071 registers LED data (step S317). Registration of animation data, registration of sound data, and registration of LED data are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process. When this process ends, the process moves to step S311.

<Production content determination process>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 166A and 166B, a flowchart of the effect content determination process executed by the sub CPU 1071 will be described. FIG. 166A and FIG. 166B are flowcharts showing effect content determination processing performed in the sub-control circuit.

  First, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not it is time to receive a start command (step S321). When determining that the start command is received, the sub CPU 1071 extracts the effect random number, determines the effect number by lottery based on the internal winning combination, etc., and registers it (step S322). The production number is data for designating production contents to be executed this time.

  Next, the sub CPU 1071 registers the production data at the start based on the registered production number (step S323). The effect data is data specifying animation data, sound data, and LED data. When the effect data is registered, corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and effects such as video display are executed. When this process ends, the effect content determination process ends.

  Next, when determining that the start command is not received, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not the reel stop command is received (step S324). When the sub CPU 1071 determines that the reel stop command is received, the sub CPU 1071 registers the stop effect data based on the registered effect number and the type of the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R (step S325). When this process ends, the effect content determination process ends.

  Next, when determining that the reel stop command is not received, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not the display command is received (step S326). When determining that the display command is received, the sub CPU 1071 registers the display effect data based on the registered effect number (step S327). When this process ends, the effect content determination process ends.

  Next, when determining that the display command is not received, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not a bonus start command (see step S124 in FIG. 159) has been received (step S328). When determining that the bonus start command has been received, the sub CPU 1071 registers effect data for starting the bonus (step S329).

  Next, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state to a screen state (bonus screen state) corresponding to the BB gaming state (step S330).

  When the gaming state transitions to the BB gaming state, the transitioning gaming state is the general gaming state. In other words, in the ART gaming state, the reels RL, RC, and RR are controlled so that the transition condition to the BB gaming state (BB display) is not established, so that the BB gaming state can be changed only from the general gaming state. Transition. Therefore, the screen state before switching in step S330 is a screen state (normal screen state) corresponding to the general gaming state.

  In step S330, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor E25 to change the arrangement position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position. Thereby, the screen state is switched from the normal screen state to the bonus screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the bonus screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  After executing the process of step S330, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

  When determining in step S328 that a bonus start command has not been received, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not a bonus end command (see step S145 in FIG. 160) has been received (step S331). When determining that the bonus end command has been received, the sub CPU 1071 registers effect data for ending the bonus (step S332).

  Next, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state to a screen state (normal screen state) corresponding to the general gaming state (step S333). In this process, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor E25 to change the arrangement position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the bonus screen state to the normal screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the normal screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  After executing the processing of step S333, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

  When determining in step S331 that the bonus end command has not been received, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not an ART start command (see step S224 in FIG. 161) has been received (step S334).

  When determining that the ART start command has been received, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state to a screen state (ART screen state) corresponding to the ART gaming state (step S335).

  When the gaming state transitions to the ART gaming state, the transitioning gaming state is the general gaming state. That is, in the BB gaming state, the internal winning combination that allows the ART operating combination to win is not internally won, and the transition condition to the ART gaming state (display of the ART operating combination) is not established. Transitions only from the general gaming state. Therefore, the screen state before switching in step S335 is a screen state (normal screen state) corresponding to the general gaming state.

  In the BB gaming state, even if the ART operating combination is displayed, the ART gaming state may be set so that the ART gaming state is not activated, so that the BB gaming state is not shifted to the ART gaming state. Further, in the BB gaming state, the reel stop control is performed so that the ART operating combination is not displayed, so that the BB gaming state is not shifted to the ART gaming state.

  In step S335, the sub CPU 1071 first controls the drive motor E25 to change the arrangement position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position. Thereby, the screen state is switched from the normal screen state to the bonus screen state. Subsequently, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor F24 to change the arrangement position of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the bonus screen state to the ART screen state. In this way, the screen state is switched from the normal screen state to the ART screen state via the bonus screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the ART screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  After executing the process of step S335, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S334 that an ART start command has not been received, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether an ART end command (see step S245 in FIG. 162) has been received (step S336).

  When determining that the ART end command has been received, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state to a screen state (normal screen state) corresponding to the general gaming state (step S337). In this process, the sub CPU 1071 first controls the drive motor F24 to change the arrangement position of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the ART screen state to the bonus screen state. Subsequently, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor E25 to change the arrangement position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the bonus screen state to the normal screen state. Thus, the screen state is switched from the ART screen state to the normal screen state via the bonus screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the normal screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  After executing the processing of step S337, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

  When determining in step S336 that the ART end command has not been received, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not a demo transition command (see step S202 in FIG. 156) has been received (step S338).

  If it is determined that the demo transfer command has been received, the sub CPU 1071 sets demo video data (step S339). In this process, the sub CPU 1071 changes the current screen state from the demo video data stored in the sub ROM 1072 based on the screen state information (information indicating the current screen state) stored in the sub RAM 1073. The corresponding demo video data is determined to be data used for this demonstration performance. As a result, the demonstration video is displayed on any one of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. The demonstration video will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168.

  If it is determined in step S338 that the demo transfer command has not been received, or after executing the process of step S339, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

[Demo video]
The demo video will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. 167 and 168 are diagrams for explaining the demonstration video.

  FIG. 167 (a) and FIG. 168 (a) show demo video data used in the normal screen state. In FIG. 167 (a), a shaded area (area I) is an area corresponding to an image displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 in the normal screen state. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the demo video data used in the normal screen state is used in the demo video data (see FIG. 168 (b)) used in the bonus screen state and the ART screen state. Unlike the demo video data (see FIG. 168 (c)), the entire area I includes information indicating the video displayed on the screen.

  FIG. 167 (b) and FIG. 168 (b) show demo video data used in the bonus screen state. In FIG. 167 (b), a shaded area (area II) is an area corresponding to an image displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D in the bonus screen state. The area II is smaller than the area I. As shown in FIG. 168 (b), in the demo video data used in the bonus screen state, a part of the area I (shaded portion in the figure) is the screen. Does not contain information indicating the video displayed. The area corresponding to the shaded area in FIG. 168 (b) includes information whose pixel value is 0. The pixel value corresponds to the light transmittance of the pixel formed on the liquid crystal panel included in the projector mechanism B2. A pixel value of 0 indicates that the light transmittance is minimum, and the display surface of the screen corresponding to the region where the pixel value is 0 is black.

  FIG. 167 (c) and FIG. 168 (c) show demo video data used in the ART screen state. In FIG. 167 (c), a shaded area (area III) is an area corresponding to an image displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 in the ART screen state. The area III is smaller than the area I. As shown in FIG. 168 (c), in the demo video data used in the ART screen state, a part of the area I (the hatched portion in the figure) is the screen. Does not contain information indicating the video displayed. The area corresponding to the hatched portion in FIG. 168 (c) includes information whose pixel value is 0, as in FIG. 168 (b).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by using the demo video data as shown in FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (c) according to the screen state, the size of the video displayed on the screen is set according to the screen state. Are different.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(I-1) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
One or a plurality of screens (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the screen and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface of the screen by emitting light including the image from the projector (sub CPU 1071 for executing the process of step S339 in FIG. 166B);
By driving at least one of the screens (front screen mechanism E1 or reel screen mechanism F1) by a drive mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screen, a screen state indicating the arrangement state of the one or more screens is obtained. Screen state switching means (step S330 in FIGS. 166A and 166B) for switching from one screen state to another screen state among a plurality of screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state, and ART screen state). A sub CPU 1071) that executes the processes of step S333, step S335, and step S337,
The display control means (the sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S339 in FIG. 166B) displays a demo image corresponding to the current screen state among the plurality of screen states when a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied. Displaying on the display surface of the screen,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

(I-2) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
N (N is an integer of 2 or more) screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the N screens and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface irradiated with the light by emitting light including the image from the projector (sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S339 in FIG. 166B);
By driving at least one of the screens (the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1) with a driving mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screens, a screen state indicating the arrangement state of the N screens is changed to N Screen state switching means (step S330 in FIG. 166A and FIG. 166B) for switching from one screen state to the other screen state among the plurality of screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state, and ART screen state) A sub CPU 1071) that executes the processes of step S333, step S335, and step S337,
The N screens (front screen mechanism E1, fixed screen mechanism D, and reel screen mechanism F1) are referred to as a first screen to an Nth screen, and the N screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen) When the screen state and the ART screen state are expressed as the first screen state to the Nth screen state, the Kth screen state (K is an integer of 1 to N) is the light emitted from the projector. Is irradiated to the display surface of the Kth screen and the N screens are arranged so that the display surface is visible through the viewing area,
The display control means (the sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S339 in FIG. 166B), if a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, if the current screen state is the Kth screen state, the Kth screen state To display a demo image corresponding to the display screen of the Kth screen,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) has three screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state, and If the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, a demo video corresponding to the current screen state is displayed on the display surface of the screen.

  That is, the demo video displayed when the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied corresponds to the screen state when the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, a different demo video is displayed on the display surface of the screen depending on which of the three screen states is the screen state when the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible for the player to entertain each demonstration video according to the screen state, and it is possible to provide a demonstration video that makes it difficult for the player to get bored. Further, it is possible to make the player who viewed the demo video interested in which screen state the current screen state is.

  In the present specification, a video is composed of a large number of still images, and is synonymous with a moving image obtained by continuously changing a large number of still images over time.

(I-3) The gaming machine according to (I-1) or (I-2),
The display control means (the sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S339 in FIG. 166B)
An image having a different size according to the screen state is displayed on the display surface of the screen,
When the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, a demo image having a size corresponding to the current screen state is displayed on the display surface of the screen.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the size of the demonstration video displayed on the display surface of the screen varies depending on the screen state when the predetermined demonstration transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player who viewed the demo video can guess the current screen state through the size of the demo video.

(I-4) A gaming machine according to any one of (I-1) to (I-3),
When a predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted from one gaming state to another gaming state among a plurality of gaming states (general gaming state, BB gaming state, and ART gaming state). Game state transition means (step S122 in FIG. 159, step S144 in FIG. 160, step S222 in FIG. 161, and main CPU 1031 for executing the process in step S244 in FIG. 162),
Each of the plurality of screen states corresponds to one of the plurality of gaming states,
When the predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied, the screen state switching means (the sub CPU 1071 that executes the processes of steps S330, S333, S335, and S337 in FIGS. 166A and 166B) Switch from the screen state corresponding to the game state of the transfer source to the screen state corresponding to the game state of the transfer destination,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the demo video displayed when a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied corresponds to the screen state at that time. The screen state corresponds to the gaming state.

  For this reason, the demo video displayed when a predetermined demo transition condition is met corresponds to the gaming state at that time. Therefore, for example, when a player views a demo video displayed on a certain gaming machine, if the demo video corresponds to a gaming state advantageous to the player, Motivation can be given to playing games on the machine. According to the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to provide an opportunity for the player to play a game in this way, thereby achieving an effect of attracting customers.

  In the third embodiment, as a predetermined demo transition condition, the value of the demo transition timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, that is, a predetermined time (10 seconds) is left without performing a BET after a medal is paid out. The condition of passing was adopted. The predetermined demo transition condition is not limited to this example, and a conventionally known condition can be appropriately employed as the transition condition to the demo screen. Normally, the demo screen is shifted to when it is determined that no game is being played (waiting for customers). For example, in the pachislot machine, in addition to the conditions adopted in the third embodiment, after the automatic insertion by re-game, a predetermined time elapses without operating the start lever, and the C / P button is operated and credited. A condition that all medals are paid out and power is turned on (until BET is given) can be cited as a condition for shifting to the demo screen. In addition, in a pachinko machine, a predetermined time elapses without detecting the operation of the handle after the change of the symbol is stopped, and a predetermined time elapses without a winning at the start port after the change of the symbol is stopped. In addition, a condition that a state in which there is no suspension and no symbol change continues for a predetermined time can be cited as a condition for transition to the demo screen.

  In the third embodiment, it has been described that the screen state corresponds to the gaming state, but the screen state and the gaming state may not correspond to each other. In the present invention, the trigger for switching the screen state is not particularly limited. For example, the screen state can be switched when a bonus operating combination is determined as an internal winning combination or when an ART lottery is won. It is good. In this case, for example, when the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, or when the ART lottery is won, the bonus screen or ART is activated when the first screen state is switched to the second screen state. The screen may be switched from the second screen state to the third screen state.

  In the third embodiment, three screens (the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1) are described. However, the number of screens is not particularly limited, and one screen is provided. Or two, or four or more.

  In the third embodiment, an image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 in the normal screen state, an image is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D in the bonus screen state, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is displayed in the ART screen state. As described above, an image is displayed. That is, it has been described that the screen state and the screen on which the image is displayed have a one-to-one correspondence. However, in the present invention, the screen on which an image is displayed in one screen state may be the same as the screen on which an image is displayed in another screen state.

  For example, it is assumed that one screen has a plurality of display surfaces, and the display surface on which an image is displayed is changed to a plurality of display surfaces (for example, a front surface and a back surface by changing the arrangement position by driving the screen. ) May be switched between. For example, two screens (a front screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1) are provided (the fixed screen mechanism D is not provided) so that images can be displayed on both the front and back surfaces of the reel screen mechanism F1. You may comprise. In this case, the image is displayed on the same screen (reel screen mechanism F1) in the state where the image is displayed on the front surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 and the state where the image is displayed on the back surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. , Separate screen states.

  The screen display surface may be one and the screen arrangement state may be simply changed. For example, only one screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is provided (the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are not provided), and the screen state is switched by moving the fixed screen mechanism D back and forth. May be. In this case, an image is displayed on the same display surface in the state in which the fixed screen mechanism D is disposed in the front and the state in which the fixed screen mechanism D is disposed in the rear. However, these two states are , Separate screen states.

  In the third embodiment, the projector mechanism B2 is disposed inside the cabinet G so as to emit light forward, and the light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 is rearward using the mirror mechanism B3. It explained as irradiating the screen by reflecting. However, in the present invention, the projector may be arranged so as to emit light backward, or the light emitted from the projector may be irradiated onto the screen without using a mirror. For example, a projector may be installed not on the inside of a cabinet but on an open / close door, and light emitted from the projector toward the rear (toward the inside of the cabinet) may be directly irradiated on a screen without using a mirror. Good.

  In the third embodiment, the projector mechanism B2 is described as a transmissive liquid crystal projector. However, the projector type is not particularly limited, and a projector using a reflective liquid crystal panel (for example, LCOS (Liquid Crystal On). (Silicon) projector), a DLP (Digital Light Processing) type projector using DMD (Digital Micro Mirror Device), or a rear projector that projects from the back.

  In the third embodiment, the display contents of the demo video are the same in the normal screen state, the bonus screen state, and the ART screen state (see FIG. 168), but as shown in FIG. The display content of the demo video may be varied depending on the screen state.

  FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the demonstration video. FIG. 169 (a) shows the demo video data used in the normal screen state. FIG. 169 (b) shows demo video data used in the bonus screen state. FIG. 169 (c) shows demo video data used in the ART screen state.

  In FIG. 169, unlike FIG. 168, the display content of the demonstration video is different in the normal screen state, the bonus screen state, and the ART screen state.

  Thus, when the display content of the demonstration video differs depending on the screen state, the game state corresponding to the screen state may be suggested through the display content. For example, as a gaming state, a state in which a state advantageous to a player is activated is relatively high (a high probability state, for example, a state in which the probability of winning an ART lottery is high) and a state in which the probability is relatively low ( A low-probability state, for example, a state where the probability of winning an ART lottery is low), and in a screen state corresponding to a high-probability state, an image that indicates that the gaming state is a high-probability state ( For example, in a screen state corresponding to a low-probability state where a character image “high probability may be displayed” is displayed, an image suggesting that the gaming state is in a low-probability state (for example, the characters “low probability but good luck”) Image) may be displayed.

  In the third embodiment, the processing related to the operation and termination of the ART gaming state (the processing in step S73 in FIG. 157, FIG. 161, FIG. 162, etc.) has been described as being performed in the main control circuit 1060. These processes may be performed in the sub control circuit 1070.

  Further, in the third embodiment, in the ART gaming state, when a pushing order is determined as an internal winning combination, an image for notifying the pushing order necessary to win the pushing order (push order navigation image) ) Appears on the screen.

  That is, in step S322 in FIG. 166A, when the sub CPU 1071 determines that the predetermined push order has been won internally, the sub CPU 1071 executes a push order navigation effect for winning the push order. The push order navigation effect is an effect of displaying the push order navigation image on the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. The push order navigation image is an image for informing the push order (pressing order of the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R) for winning the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery. The sub ROM 1072 stores a plurality of push order navigation image data. Each push order navigation image data corresponds to an image for informing the push order for winning one internal winning combination. In step S322 of FIG. 166A, the sub CPU 1071 obtains the push order navigation image data corresponding to the push order for winning the push order from the plurality of push order navigation image data stored in the sub ROM 1072 this time. The data used for the production is determined. As a result, an image suggesting that the stop operation is performed in the pressing order is displayed on the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 as a pressing order navigation image.

  The notification of the pressing order in the ART gaming state is not limited to notification by image, and may be performed using sound or light.

  Moreover, what is notified in the ART gaming state is not limited to the order of pressing required to win the pressing order. In the ART gaming state, any information necessary for winning a predetermined combination may be notified. For example, when a plurality of internal winning combinations are set as push winning combinations and the appropriate order is predetermined for each internal winning combination, the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery may be notified. . If the player who knows the appropriate order for each internal winning combination can know the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery, the player can perform the stop operation in the appropriate order. Further, a winning may be established when a stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing, and the appropriate timing may be notified in the ART gaming state.

  In the present invention, the ART gaming state may be the AT gaming state and the RT gaming state, and the RT gaming state may be controlled by the main control circuit, while the AT gaming state may be controlled by the sub control circuit. . The RT gaming state is a state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than the general gaming state. The trigger for shifting to the RT gaming state is not particularly limited. For example, when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line, or a combination that triggers the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. In such a case, it is possible to shift to the RT gaming state. As described above with reference to the ART gaming state, the AT gaming state is a state in which information necessary for winning an internal winning combination (for example, the pressing order of stop buttons) is notified. A transition to the AT gaming state can be made when a predetermined lottery (AT lottery) is won.

  In this case, a plurality of states (probability states) having different probabilities of winning the AT lottery may be provided, and the screen state may be changed according to such a probability state. For example, a plurality of probability states are set to a first probability state, a second probability state, and a third probability state in descending order of the probability of winning an AT lottery. In the first probability state, the screen state is changed to the first screen state (for example, as in the normal screen state in the third embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 has the front exposure position). In the second probability state, the screen state is set to the front standby position as in the second screen state (for example, the bonus screen state in the third embodiment). And the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position), and in the third probability state, the screen The state is the third screen state (for example, the state where the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position as in the ART screen state in the third embodiment). ). In this case, even if the gaming state managed by the main control circuit does not shift (even when the general gaming state is continued), the screen state is switched.

  Further, the probability state and the screen state may not be made to correspond completely in a one-to-one manner. For example, even in a state where the probability of winning an AT lottery is low (first probability state and second probability state), the screen state corresponds to a state (third probability state) where the probability of winning an AT lottery is high with a predetermined probability. It may be switched to (third screen state). In this case, even if the screen state is the third screen state (a screen state having a high expectation for being the third probability state), there is a possibility that the probability of winning the AT lottery may be low. It can be said that the screen state is “a fake screen state”.

  Furthermore, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine, for example, the normal gaming state and the first screen state are associated with each other, the probability variation gaming state and the second screen state are associated with each other, and the short-time gaming state and the first screen state are associated with each other. A mode in which the three screen states are associated can be employed. When two game states (for example, probability variation game state and short-time game state) are activated simultaneously, the screen state corresponding to one game state (for example, short-time game state) is set in advance so that priority is given. It is good also to leave. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine having a so-called latent probability change, the current screen state is any screen state among a plurality of screen states by associating a high expectation level which is a probability change game state with a screen state. Depending on whether it is possible, the expectation of the latent probability change may be suggested.

  Note that the probability variation gaming state is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The short-time gaming state is (A) a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal gaming state, (B) a state in which the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and (C) a normal electric accessory. This is a state in which at least one of (A) to (C) is in a state in which the opening time is long.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The third embodiment has been described above. The fourth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions in the second embodiment and the third embodiment that are the same as those in the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

  In the third embodiment, it has been described that when a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, a demo video corresponding to the current screen state is displayed on the screen. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, the demo video is displayed in the ART screen state regardless of which screen state the current screen state is. That is, if the screen state at the time when the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied is not the ART screen state, the screen state is switched to the ART screen state, and then the demo video is displayed. Hereinafter, this point will be described.

  In the third embodiment, the description of the processing performed when the demonstration video is displayed and then returned to the normal game effect (when the predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied) is omitted. In this embodiment, this point will also be described.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, even when the start lever DD6 is operated while the screen state is switched, the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR is not started (the reel is locked). This point will also be described.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
The medal acceptance / start check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 170A and 170B. 170A and 170B are flowcharts illustrating medal acceptance / start check processing performed in the main control circuit.

  Processes other than step S1051 in FIG. 170B are the same as the processes in steps S31 to S51 in FIGS. 155A and 155B, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  In step S1051, the main CPU 1031 executes a demo cancellation process. The demo cancellation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Process during demo migration>
The demonstration transition process performed in step S1048 of FIG. 170B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing a demo transition process performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 executes the processing of step S1201 and step S1202, but since these processing are the same as the processing of step S201 and step S202 of FIG. 156, description thereof is omitted here.

  After executing the processing of step S1202, the main CPU 1031 sets the demo flag to ON (step S1203). The demo flag is a flag that is set when a predetermined demo transition condition is met.

  After executing the processing of step S1203, the main CPU 1031 ends this subroutine.

<Process at the time of demo cancellation>
The demo cancellation process performed in step S1051 in FIG. 170B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing a demo cancellation process performed in the main control circuit.

  The process at the time of demo cancellation in FIG. 172 is performed when it is determined in step S1049 in FIG. 170B that the insertion number counter has reached the maximum value, and in step S1050 it is determined that the start switch 1006S is on. That is, the demo cancellation process is a process performed when the start lever DD6 is operated after a BET (including automatic insertion) is performed.

  First, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the demonstration flag (see step S1203 in FIG. 171) is set to ON (step S1211). When determining that the in-demo flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 1031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 1031 determines that the demo flag is set on, the main CPU 1031 sets the demo flag off (step S1212).

  Next, the main CPU 1031 sets a demo cancellation flag to on (step S1213). The demo cancellation flag is a flag that is set when a predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the ART gaming state (step S1214). The main CPU 1031 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the operating flag storage area of the main RAM 1033 (see FIG. 153 (c)). Specifically, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the ART gaming state by determining whether or not bit 2 of the operating flag storage area is “1”.

  When determining that the current gaming state is not the ART gaming state, the main CPU 1031 sets the screen state return flag to ON (step S1215). The screen state return flag is a flag that is set when a predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied in a gaming state other than the ART gaming state. The fact that the screen state return flag is set to ON means that when the display of the demo video is terminated, the ART screen state is changed to the original screen state (the screen state when the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied). This means that the screen state needs to be restored. The screen state return flag is used to lock the reels RL, RC, RR while the screen state is switched (see FIG. 178).

  If it is determined in step S1214 that the current gaming state is not the ART gaming state, or after executing the processing of step S1215, the main CPU 1031 ends the present subroutine.

<Bonus activation check process>
Next, the bonus operation check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing a bonus operation check process performed in the main control circuit.

  Processing other than step S1125 is the same as the processing of step S121 to step S129 of FIG. 159, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  In step S1125, the main CPU 1031 sets a gaming state transition flag to ON. The gaming state transition flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state has transitioned, and the fact that the gaming state transition flag is set to ON means that the screen state needs to be switched as the gaming state transitions. ing. The game state transition flag is used to lock the reels RL, RC, and RR while the screen state is switched (see FIG. 178).

<Bonus end check process>
Next, the bonus end check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing a bonus end check process performed in the main control circuit.

  Processes other than step S1146 are the same processes as the processes of steps S141 to S148 in FIG. 160, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  In step S1146, the main CPU 1031 sets a gaming state transition flag to ON. The gaming state transition flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state has transitioned, and the fact that the gaming state transition flag is set to ON means that the screen state needs to be switched as the gaming state transitions. ing. The game state transition flag is used to lock the reels RL, RC, and RR while the screen state is switched (see FIG. 178).

<ART operation check process>
The ART operation check process performed in step S15 in FIG. 154 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing an ART operation check process performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 executes the processes of steps S1221 to S1223, but these processes are the same as the processes of steps S221 to S223 of FIG. 161, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  After executing the process of step S1223, the main CPU 1031 sets the gaming state transition flag to ON. The gaming state transition flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state has transitioned, and the fact that the gaming state transition flag is set to ON means that the screen state needs to be switched as the gaming state transitions. ing. The game state transition flag is used to lock the reels RL, RC, and RR while the screen state is switched (see FIG. 178).

  After executing the processing of step S1224, the main CPU 1031 ends this subroutine.

<ART end check process>
The ART end check process performed in step S16 in FIG. 154 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing an ART end check process performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 executes the processes in steps S1241 to S1244. Since these processes are the same as the processes in steps S241 to S244 in FIG. 162, description thereof is omitted here.

  After executing the process of step S1244, the main CPU 1031 sets the gaming state transition flag to ON. The gaming state transition flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state has transitioned, and the fact that the gaming state transition flag is set to ON means that the screen state needs to be switched as the gaming state transitions. ing. The game state transition flag is used to lock the reels RL, RC, and RR while the screen state is switched (see FIG. 178).

  After executing the processing of step S1245, the main CPU 1031 ends this subroutine.

<Interrupt processing>
Next, an interrupt process (1.1173 msec) under the control of the main CPU 1031 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 executes the processes of step S1161 and step S1162, but these processes are the same as the processes of step S161 and step S162 of FIG. 163, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  After executing the process of step S1162, the main CPU 1031 executes a timer update process (step S1163). In this process, the main CPU 1031 subtracts 1 from the value of the reel lock timer (see step S1265 in FIG. 178). Further, the main CPU 1031 adds 1 to the value of the demo transition timer (see step S12 in FIG. 154).

  Next, the main CPU 1031 executes reel control processing (step S1164). The reel control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 1031 executes the processing of step S1165 and step S1166. Since these processing are the same as the processing of step S164 and step S165 of FIG. 163, description thereof is omitted here.

<Reel control processing>
The reel control process performed in step S1164 of FIG. 177 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing a reel control process performed in the main control circuit.

  First, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the game state transition flag (see step S1125 in FIG. 173, step S1146 in FIG. 174, step S1224 in FIG. 175, and step S1245 in FIG. 176) is set to ON. (Step S1261).

  When determining that the gaming state transition flag is set to ON, the main CPU 1031 sets the gaming state transition flag to OFF (step S1262).

  On the other hand, when determining that the game state transition flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the screen state return flag (see step S1215 in FIG. 172) is set to ON (step S1263). ).

  When determining that the screen state return flag is set to ON, the main CPU 1031 sets the screen state return flag to OFF (step S1264).

  After executing the processing of step S1262 or step S1264, the main CPU 1031 sets a predetermined value in the reel lock timer (step S1265). Thereafter, the main CPU 1031 ends this subroutine.

  When determining in step S1263 that the screen state return flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 1031 determines whether or not the value of the reel lock timer is 0 (step S1266). The value of the reel lock timer is set to a predetermined value in the process of step S1265, and is decremented by 1 each time an interrupt process is performed (see step S1163 in FIG. 177).

  When determining that the value of the reel lock timer is 0, the main CPU 1031 controls the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR (step S1267). In this process, the main CPU 1031 drives the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, and 1049R to start the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR when the rotations of all the reels RL, RC, and RR are requested. Control. Thereby, when the reels RL, RC, and RR are locked, the lock is released.

  When determining in step S1266 that the value of the reel lock timer is not 0, or after executing the processing of step S1267, the main CPU 1031 ends the present subroutine.

<Production content determination process>
The effect content determination process performed in step S314 in FIG. 165 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing effect content determination processing performed in the sub-control circuit.

  First, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not a start command (see step S6 in FIG. 154) has been received (step S1321).

  If it is determined that the start command has been received, the sub CPU 1071 executes a screen state change process at the time of gaming state transition (step S1322). The screen state changing process at the game state transition will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 1071 executes screen state return processing at the time of demo cancellation (step S1323). The screen state return processing at the time of demo cancellation will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 1071 executes the processing of step S1324 to step S1333, but these processing are the same as the processing of step S322 to step S329 of FIG. 166A and the processing of step S331 to step S332 of FIG. 166B. The description here is omitted.

  In FIG. 166A, after executing the process of step S329, the sub CPU 1071 performs a process of switching the screen state (step S330). However, in FIG. 179, after executing the process of step S1331, the sub CPU 1071 This subroutine ends. In FIG. 166B, after executing the process of step S332, the sub CPU 1071 performs a process of switching the screen state (step S333). In FIG. 179, after executing the process of step S1333, the sub CPU 1071 This subroutine ends.

  When determining in step S1332 that the bonus end command has not been received, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not a demo transition command (see step S1202 in FIG. 171) has been received (step S1334).

  If it is determined that a demo transition command has been received, the sub CPU 1071 executes a screen transition process at the time of demo transition (step S1335). The screen state changing process at the time of demo transition will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 1071 sets demo video data (step S1336). In this processing, the sub CPU 1071 determines the demo video data stored in the sub ROM 1072 as data used for this demonstration effect. The demo video data is data corresponding to the ART screen state (see FIG. 183 (a)). By executing the processing in step S1336, a demonstration video is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1.

  If it is determined in step S1334 that the demo migration command has not been received, or after the processing of step S1336 has been executed, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

<Screen state change process at game state transition>
With reference to FIG. 180, the game state transition screen state change process performed in step S1322 of FIG. 179 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing a screen state change process at the game state transition performed in the sub-control circuit.

  First, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not the gaming state is different from the previous time (step S1401). Since the start command received in step S1321 of FIG. 179 includes information indicating the flag stored in the operating flag storage area (see FIG. 153 (c)) of the main RAM 1033, by receiving the start command, The sub CPU 1071 can recognize the gaming state. In step S1401, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not the gaming state indicated by the information included in the start command received this time is different from the gaming state indicated by the information included in the previously received start command.

  When determining that the gaming state is not different from the previous one, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the gaming state is different from the previous one, the sub CPU 1071 stops the emission of light from the projector mechanism B2 (step S1402). In this process, the sub CPU 1071 transmits an instruction to turn off the light source to the control unit of the projector mechanism B2.

  Next, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state to a screen state corresponding to the game state of the transfer destination (step S1403).

  That is, when the gaming state shifts from the general gaming state to the BB gaming state, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state from the normal screen state to the bonus screen state. Specifically, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor E25 to change the arrangement position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position. Thereby, the screen state is switched from the normal screen state to the bonus screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the bonus screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  Further, when the gaming state shifts from the BB gaming state to the general gaming state, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state from the bonus screen state to the normal screen state. Specifically, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor E25 to change the arrangement position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the bonus screen state to the normal screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the normal screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  Further, when the gaming state shifts from the general gaming state to the ART gaming state, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state from the normal screen state to the ART screen state. Specifically, the sub CPU 1071 first controls the drive motor E25 to change the arrangement position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position. Thereby, the screen state is switched from the normal screen state to the bonus screen state. Subsequently, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor F24 to change the arrangement position of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the bonus screen state to the ART screen state. In this way, the screen state is switched from the normal screen state to the ART screen state via the bonus screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the ART screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  Further, when the gaming state shifts from the ART gaming state to the general gaming state, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state from the ART screen state to the normal screen state. Specifically, the sub CPU 1071 first controls the drive motor F24 to change the arrangement position of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the ART screen state to the bonus screen state. Subsequently, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor E25 to change the arrangement position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the bonus screen state to the normal screen state. Thus, the screen state is switched from the ART screen state to the normal screen state via the bonus screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the normal screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  After executing the process of step S1403, the sub CPU 1071 restarts the emission of light from the projector mechanism B2 (step S1404). Although not shown, the sub CPU 1071 measures the time that has elapsed since the execution of the process of step S1402 by executing the process of step S1402 and then setting the emission resumption timer to ON. In the process of step S1404, the sub CPU 1071 transmits an instruction to turn on the light source to the control unit of the projector mechanism B2 after waiting for the value of the emission resumption timer to reach a predetermined value.

  After executing the processing of step S1404, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

<Screen status recovery process when demo is canceled>
With reference to FIG. 181, the demo state cancellation screen state return processing performed in step S <b> 1323 of FIG. 179 will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the screen state return processing at the time of demo cancellation performed in the sub-control circuit.

  First, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not it is time for demo cancellation (whether or not a predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied) (step S1421). When the predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied, the start command received in step S1321 in FIG. 179 includes information indicating the demo cancellation flag (see step S1213 in FIG. 172). The CPU 1071 can recognize that a predetermined demo cancellation condition has been established. In step S1421, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not the start command received in step S1321 in FIG. 179 includes information indicating the demo cancellation flag.

  When determining that it is not time to cancel the demo, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being canceled, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the ART gaming state (step S1422). Since the start command received in step S1321 of FIG. 179 includes information indicating the flag stored in the operating flag storage area (see FIG. 153 (c)) of the main RAM 1033, by receiving the start command, The sub CPU 1071 can recognize the current gaming state.

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is the ART gaming state, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is not the ART gaming state, the sub CPU 1071 stops the emission of light from the projector mechanism B2 (step S1423). In this process, the sub CPU 1071 transmits an instruction to turn off the light source to the control unit of the projector mechanism B2.

  Next, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state to a screen state corresponding to the current gaming state (step S1424).

  That is, when the current gaming state is the general gaming state, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state from the ART screen state to the normal screen state. Specifically, the sub CPU 1071 first controls the drive motor F24 to change the arrangement position of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the ART screen state to the bonus screen state. Subsequently, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor E25 to change the arrangement position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the bonus screen state to the normal screen state. Thus, the screen state is switched from the ART screen state to the normal screen state via the bonus screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the normal screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  When the current gaming state is the BB gaming state, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state from the ART screen state to the bonus screen state. Specifically, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor F24 to change the arrangement position of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the ART screen state to the bonus screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the bonus screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  After executing the process of step S1424, the sub CPU 1071 restarts the emission of light from the projector mechanism B2 (step S1425). Although not shown, the sub CPU 1071 measures the time that has elapsed since the execution of the process of step S1423 by turning on the emission resumption timer after executing the process of step S1423. In the process of step S1425, the sub CPU 1071 transmits an instruction to turn on the light source to the control unit of the projector mechanism B2 after waiting for the value of the emission resumption timer to reach a predetermined value.

  After executing the processing of step S1425, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

<Screen status change process during demo transition>
The demo transition screen state changing process performed in step S1335 of FIG. 179 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing a screen state changing process at the time of demonstration transition performed in the sub control circuit.

  First, the sub CPU 1071 determines whether or not the current screen state is the ART screen state (step S1441). The sub CPU 1071 can recognize the current screen state based on the screen state information (information indicating the current screen state) stored in the sub RAM 1073.

  When determining that the current screen state is the ART screen state, the sub CPU 1071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current screen state is not the ART screen state, the sub CPU 1071 stops the emission of light from the projector mechanism B2 (step S1442). In this process, the sub CPU 1071 transmits an instruction to turn off the light source to the control unit of the projector mechanism B2.

  Next, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state to the ART screen state (step S1443).

  That is, when the current screen state is the normal screen state, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state from the normal screen state to the ART screen state. Specifically, the sub CPU 1071 first controls the drive motor E25 to change the arrangement position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position. Thereby, the screen state is switched from the normal screen state to the bonus screen state. Subsequently, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor F24 to change the arrangement position of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the bonus screen state to the ART screen state. In this way, the screen state is switched from the normal screen state to the ART screen state via the bonus screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the ART screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  When the current screen state is the bonus screen state, the sub CPU 1071 switches the screen state from the bonus screen state to the ART screen state. Specifically, the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor F24 to change the arrangement position of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. As a result, the screen state is switched from the bonus screen state to the ART screen state. Then, the sub CPU 1071 stores information indicating that the current screen state is the ART screen state in the sub RAM 1073.

  After executing the process of step S1443, the sub CPU 1071 restarts the emission of light from the projector mechanism B2 (step S1444). Although not shown, the sub CPU 1071 measures the time that has elapsed since the execution of the process of step S1442 by setting the emission restart timer to ON after executing the process of step S1442. In the process of step S1444, the sub CPU 1071 transmits an instruction to turn on the light source to the control unit of the projector mechanism B2 after waiting for the value of the emission resumption timer to reach a predetermined value.

  After executing the processing of step S1444, the sub CPU 1071 ends this subroutine.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(II-1) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
One or a plurality of screens (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the screen and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface of the screen by emitting light including the image from the projector (the sub CPU 1071 that executes the processes of steps S1325 and S1336 in FIG. 179);
By driving at least one of the screens (front screen mechanism E1 or reel screen mechanism F1) by a drive mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screen, a screen state indicating the arrangement state of the one or more screens is obtained. Screen state switching means (step S1403 in FIG. 180, FIG. 181 in FIG. 181) for switching from one screen state to the other screen state among a plurality of screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state, and ART screen state). And a sub CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1424 and step S1443 of FIG.
The screen state switching means is
When a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, if the current screen state is a screen state other than a specific screen state (ART screen state), the screen state is changed from the current screen state to the specific screen state. A demo state switching screen state switching means (sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S1443 in FIG. 182);
The display control means includes
When the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, demo image display control means for displaying a demo image corresponding to the specific screen state on the display surface of the screen (sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S1336 in FIG. 179). With
The screen state switching means further includes
After the screen state is switched to the specific screen state by the screen state switching means at the time of transition to the demo, a predetermined demo is displayed while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control means. When the release condition is satisfied, the demo state screen state switching unit (in step S1424 of FIG. 181) restores the screen state from the specific screen state to the screen state before being switched by the demo state screen state switching unit. A sub-CPU 1071) for executing processing,
The display control means further includes
When the predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control means, the display of the demo image is terminated on the display surface of the screen. Providing effect image display control means (sub CPU1071 that executes the process of step S1325 in FIG. 179) for displaying effect images;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

(II-2) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
N (N is an integer of 2 or more) screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the N screens and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface irradiated with the light by emitting light including the image from the projector (sub-CPU 1071 that executes the processes of steps S1325 and S1336 in FIG. 179);
By driving at least one of the screens (the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1) with a driving mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screens, a screen state indicating the arrangement state of the N screens is changed to N Screen state switching means (step S1403 in FIG. 180, FIG. 181 in FIG. 181) for switching from one screen state to another screen state among the screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state, and ART screen state). And a sub CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1424 and step S1443 of FIG.
When the N screens are expressed as a first screen to an Nth screen, and the N screen states are expressed as a first screen state to an Nth screen state, the Kth screen state (K is 1 to N) are arranged such that the N screens are arranged so that the light emitted from the projector is irradiated onto the display surface of the Kth screen and the display surface is visible through the viewing area. The state
The screen state switching means is
When a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, if the current screen state is a screen state other than a specific screen state (ART screen state), the screen state is changed from the current screen state to the specific screen state. A demo state switching screen state switching means (sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S1443 in FIG. 182);
The display control means includes
When the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, demo image display control means for displaying a demo image corresponding to the specific screen state on the display surface of the screen (sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S1336 in FIG. 179). With
The screen state switching means further includes
After the screen state is switched to the specific screen state by the screen state switching means at the time of transition to the demo, a predetermined demo is displayed while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control means. When the release condition is satisfied, the demo state screen state switching unit (in step S1424 of FIG. 181) restores the screen state from the specific screen state to the screen state before being switched by the demo state screen state switching unit. A sub-CPU 1071) for executing processing,
The display control means further includes
When the predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control means, the display of the demo image is terminated on the display surface of the screen. Providing effect image display control means (sub CPU1071 that executes the process of step S1325 in FIG. 179) for displaying effect images;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) has three screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state, and , A screen state for ART), and when a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, if the current screen state is a screen state other than a specific screen state (ART screen state), the screen state Are switched from the current screen state to a specific screen state (ART screen state). On the other hand, when a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, a demo video corresponding to a specific screen state (ART screen state) is displayed on the display surface of the screen. Accordingly, when a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, the demo video is displayed in a specific screen state (ART screen state) regardless of which screen state is the current screen state. Become. Thereby, the player's interest in a specific screen state (ART screen state) can be increased.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined demo release condition is satisfied while the demo video is displayed, the screen before being switched to a specific screen state (ART screen state). The screen state is restored to the state. On the other hand, when a predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied while the demo video is being displayed, the display of the demo video is terminated and the effect image is displayed. Thereby, when the predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied, the effect can be resumed in the original screen state (the screen state at the time when the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied).

(II-3) The gaming machine of (II-1) or (II-2),
When a specific condition is satisfied, a game state transition means (step S1222 in FIG. 175) is executed to shift the game state to a specific game state (ART game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A main CPU 1031),
The screen state switching means (the sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S1403 in FIG. 180) switches the screen state to the specific screen state when the specific condition is satisfied.
It is characterized by that.

  As described above, the demonstration video is displayed in a specific screen state (ART screen state). According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the specific screen state (ART screen state) is: Appears when certain conditions are met. The specific condition is a condition for shifting to a specific game state (ART screen state). However, such a condition is not normally satisfied frequently during the progress of the game. In this sense, the specific screen state (ART screen state) is a rare screen state and can be said to be a great attraction in the gaming machine. According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to appeal the charm of the gaming machine to the player by displaying the demonstration video in such a rare screen state (ART screen state). it can. Thereby, the effect of attracting customers can be achieved.

  In the fourth embodiment, a condition that the start lever DD6 is operated after a BET is performed is adopted as a predetermined demo cancellation condition. The predetermined demo cancellation condition is not limited to this example, and a conventionally known condition can be appropriately adopted as a return condition from the demo screen. Normally, a transition is made from the demonstration screen to the normal game effect when it is determined that the game has been resumed. For example, in a pachislot machine, conditions such as a BET operation being performed and a start lever being operated (starting operation being performed) can be cited as conditions for returning from the demo screen. In addition, in pachinko gaming machines, the conditions that a steering wheel operation is detected, that a winning at the start opening occurs, and that a game ball has passed a specific area are detected by a sensor are demonstrated. It can be mentioned as a return condition from the screen.

  Further, the specific gaming state in the present invention is not limited to the ART gaming state. As the specific gaming state in the present invention, a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a gaming state in which a relatively large amount of gaming media can be given to the player) can be adopted as appropriate. For example, in a pachislot machine, a regular bonus (RB), a big bonus (BB), a high RT gaming state, a high probability ART state (a state where the probability of winning an ART lottery) is adopted as a specific gaming state. Also good. In a pachinko gaming machine, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a probability variation state (probability change), a short time gaming state (short time), or the like may be adopted as a specific gaming state.

(III-1) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
One or a plurality of screens (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the screen and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface of the screen by emitting light including the image from the projector (the sub CPU 1071 that executes the processes of steps S1325 and S1336 in FIG. 179);
By driving at least one of the screens (front screen mechanism E1 or reel screen mechanism F1) by a drive mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screen, a screen state indicating the arrangement state of the one or more screens is obtained. Screen state switching means (step S1403 in FIG. 180, FIG. 181 in FIG. 181) for switching from one screen state to the other screen state among a plurality of screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state, and ART screen state). And a sub CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1424 and step S1443 of FIG.
The screen state switching means is
When a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, if the current screen state is a screen state other than a specific screen state (ART screen state), the screen state is changed from the current screen state to the specific screen state. A demo state switching screen state switching means (sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S1443 in FIG. 182);
The display control means includes
When the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, demo image display control means for displaying a demo image corresponding to the specific screen state on the display surface of the screen (sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S1336 in FIG. 179). With
The screen state switching means further includes
After the screen state is switched to the specific screen state by the screen state switching means at the time of transition to the demo, a predetermined demo is displayed while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control means. When the release condition is satisfied, the demo state screen state switching unit (in step S1424 of FIG. 181) restores the screen state from the specific screen state to the screen state before being switched by the demo state screen state switching unit. A sub-CPU 1071) for executing processing,
The display control means further includes
When the predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control means, the display of the demo image on the display surface of the screen is terminated, The projector is controlled so that the state in which the screen state is restored by the screen state switching unit at the time of demo cancellation becomes difficult to see through the viewing area, and the screen before being switched by the screen state switching unit at the time of demo transition Waiting for the screen state to return to the state, effect image display control means for displaying the effect image on the display surface of the screen (steps S1423 and S1425 in FIG. 181 and step S1325 in FIG. 179 are executed) Sub CPU 1071)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied, the screen state is restored to the original screen state (the screen state at the time when the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied). The effect image is displayed after waiting. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the effect after restart is performed in the original screen state, and it is possible to prevent the effect after restart from being performed in a specific screen state (ART screen state). As a result, when the effect after resumption is not to be performed in a specific screen state (ART screen state), the effect content and the screen state are not matched, resulting in an inappropriate effect being performed. Can be avoided.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, a state in which the screen state is restored to the original screen state (the screen state at the time when the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied) is the viewing area (upper display window UD1). ), The projector mechanism B2 is controlled so as to be difficult to view. If the screen state is changed (the screen is moving), there is a possibility that the player may be given a crafty impression. In the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, According to this, it is possible to prevent exposure of a scene that can be seen as such a rough work.

  If the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied and the current screen state is a specific screen state (ART screen state), the screen state is not switched. Even when the condition is satisfied, it is not necessary to restore the screen state. Therefore, in this case, after the display of the demo image is finished, the effect image is displayed immediately, and the state in which the screen state is restored becomes difficult to view through the visual recognition area (upper display window UD1). There is no need to control the projector mechanism B2.

(III-2) The gaming machine of (III-1),
The effect image display control means (steps S1423 and S1425 in FIG. 181 and sub CPU 1071 that executes the process in step S1325 in FIG. 179)
When the predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control means, the emission of light from the projector is stopped, and then the demo transition is performed. Waiting for the screen state to return to the screen state before being switched by the screen state switching means, resuming the emission of light from the projector and displaying the effect image on the display surface of the screen,
In the visual recognition area (upper display window UD1), a smoke process is performed for making it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the main body.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the emission of light from the projector mechanism B2 is temporarily stopped when a predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied. Thereby, since the inside of the cabinet G which accommodates the screen becomes dark, it is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize how the screen state is changing (the screen is moving). In addition, since the visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) is subjected to the smoke process, the interior of the darkened cabinet G can be made more difficult to see.

(III-3) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
One or a plurality of screens (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the screen and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface of the screen by emitting light including the image from the projector (the sub CPU 1071 that executes the processes of steps S1325 and S1336 in FIG. 179);
By driving at least one of the screens (front screen mechanism E1 or reel screen mechanism F1) by a drive mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screen, a screen state indicating the arrangement state of the one or more screens is obtained. Screen state switching means (step S1403 in FIG. 180, FIG. 181 in FIG. 181) for switching from one screen state to the other screen state among a plurality of screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state, and ART screen state). And a sub CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1424 and step S1443 of FIG.
The screen state switching means is
When a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, if the current screen state is a screen state other than a specific screen state (ART screen state), the screen state is changed from the current screen state to the specific screen state. A demo state switching screen state switching means (sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S1443 in FIG. 182);
The display control means includes
When the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, the projector is controlled so that it is difficult to visually recognize through the viewing area that the screen state is switched to the specific screen state by the screen state switching means during the demo transition. , Waiting for the screen state to be switched to the specific screen state, and displaying the demo image corresponding to the specific screen state on the display surface of the screen (step S1442 and step S1442 in FIG. 182) S1444, and a sub CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1336 of FIG.
The screen state switching means further includes
After the screen state is switched to the specific screen state by the screen state switching means at the time of transition to the demo, a predetermined demo is displayed while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control means. When the release condition is satisfied, the demo state screen state switching unit (in step S1424 of FIG. 181) restores the screen state from the specific screen state to the screen state before being switched by the demo state screen state switching unit. A sub-CPU 1071) for executing processing,
The display control means further includes
When the predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control means, the display of the demo image is terminated on the display surface of the screen. Providing effect image display control means (sub CPU1071 that executes the process of step S1325 in FIG. 179) for displaying effect images;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, the demonstration video is displayed after the screen state is switched to a specific screen state (ART screen state). Done. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the demonstration video is displayed in a specific screen state (ART screen state), and the demonstration video is displayed in a screen state other than the specific screen state (ART screen state). It can be prevented from being performed. As a result, when the demonstration video display is not to be performed in a screen state other than a specific screen state (ART screen state), an inappropriate effect is performed because the effect content and the screen state do not match. Can be avoided.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, it is difficult to visually recognize how the screen state is switched to the specific screen state (the screen state for ART) through the visual recognition area (upper display window UD1). The projector mechanism B2 is controlled. If the screen state is changed (the screen is moving), there is a possibility that the player may be given a crafty impression. In the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, According to this, it is possible to prevent exposure of a scene that can be seen as such a rough work.

  Note that when a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied and the current screen state is a specific screen state (ART screen state), the screen state is not switched. Accordingly, in this case, the demonstration image is immediately displayed, and it is difficult to visually recognize the state in which the screen state is switched to the specific screen state (ART screen state) through the viewing area (upper display window UD1). Thus, it is not necessary to control the projector mechanism B2.

(III-4) The gaming machine of (III-3),
The demo image display control means (step S1442 and step S1444 in FIG. 182 and sub CPU 1071 that executes the process in step S1336 in FIG. 179)
When the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, after the emission of light from the projector is stopped, the screen state switching means at the time of demo transition waits for the screen state to be switched to the specific screen state, Resuming the emission of light from the projector and displaying a demo image corresponding to the specific screen state on the display surface of the screen,
In the visual recognition area (upper display window UD1), a smoke process is performed for making it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the main body.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, emission of light from the projector mechanism B2 is temporarily stopped when a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied. Thereby, since the inside of the cabinet G which accommodates the screen becomes dark, it is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize how the screen state is changing (the screen is moving). In addition, since the visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) is subjected to the smoke process, the interior of the darkened cabinet G can be made more difficult to see.

  In the present invention, the method of making it difficult to visually recognize the state in which the screen state is switched through the visual recognition area (display window) is not limited to the method of stopping the emission of light from the projector. A black image may be projected while the button is turned on, or an image having a color similar to the color of the screen (for example, white) may be projected.

  In addition, smoke processing may be performed on the display window. For example, a panel made of an acrylic holder, a glass plate, or the like may be attached to the display window, and a film with low transparency may be attached to the panel. Moreover, it is good also as processing these so that the transparency of an acrylic holder or glass plate itself may become low. If such a smoke panel is provided, when the emission of light from the projector is stopped, the internal space where the screen is arranged can be further darkened, and the screen state is changing (screen It is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the state of movement).

  Further, while the screen state is being switched, the front of the screen is closed with a shutter, so that the state of the screen state changing (the screen is moving) may be physically invisible. .

  FIG. 183 (b) is a diagram showing a shutter accessory. The shutter accessory 2000 is provided in front of the front exposure position in the front screen mechanism E1, and includes a right door 2000a and a left door 2000b. Each of the right door 2000a and the left door 2000b is configured to be able to slide on the rail in the left-right direction by being driven by a motor. When the right door 2000a moves to the left and the left door 2000b moves to the right, the right door 2000a and the left door 2000b are in contact with each other (the state shown in FIG. 183 (b), that is, the closed state). Then, the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) disposed behind the shutter accessory 2000 cannot be viewed through the upper display window UD1.

  The motor is controlled so that such a shutter accessory 2000 is closed at the timing (for example, step S1402 in FIG. 180, step S1423 in FIG. 181 and step S1442 in FIG. 182) at which the switching of the screen state starts. The screen state is changed by controlling the motor so that the screen state is opened at the timing when the switching of the screen state ends (for example, step S1404 in FIG. 180, step S1425 in FIG. 181 and step S1444 in FIG. 182). It is possible to create a situation in which the player cannot visually recognize the state (the screen is moving).

  Note that the shutter accessory is an accessory frequently employed in gaming machines, and a conventionally known configuration can be appropriately employed.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied, emission of light from the projector mechanism B2 is temporarily stopped. As a result, the display of the demonstration video is completed. After that, when the emission of light from the projector mechanism B2 is resumed, a video (see FIG. 183 (c)) related to the effect during the game is displayed with the return to the normal game effect from the demo screen.

  FIG. 183 (c) is a diagram for describing a video related to a game effect (game effect video). In FIG. 183 (c), images of the sun, mountains and waves are shown. In this video, the wave state changes over time.

  If a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied while such a video is being displayed, the display of the game effect video is interrupted and the demo video is displayed (see FIG. 183 (a)). Thereafter, when a predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied, the display of the demo video is terminated, and the display of the effect video during the game is resumed.

  Here, when the display of the effect video during the game is interrupted, the state of the video at that time (in the example of FIG. 183 (c), the wave state) is stored, and when returning to the game effect, the memory is stored. The display of the effect video during the game may be resumed from the played state (wave state).

(IV-1) Symbol display means (reels RL, RC, RR and main display window DD4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (start lever DD6 and start switch 1006S) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal lottery means (main CPU 1031 for executing the process of FIG. 157) for determining an internal winning combination;
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for performing symbol display on the symbol display means (the process in step S7 in FIG. 154 and the process in FIG. 178 are executed. Main CPU 1031),
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, and stop switches 1007LS, 1007CS, 1007RS) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, a stop control means for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variation display is performed by the fluctuation control means (Main CPU 1031 that executes the processing of FIG. 158);
A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
One or a plurality of screens (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the screen and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface of the screen by emitting light including the image from the projector (the sub CPU 1071 that executes the processes of steps S1325 and S1336 in FIG. 179);
By driving at least one of the screens (front screen mechanism E1 or reel screen mechanism F1) by a drive mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screen, a screen state indicating the arrangement state of the one or more screens is obtained. Screen state switching means (step S1403 in FIG. 180, FIG. 181 in FIG. 181) for switching from one screen state to the other screen state among a plurality of screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state, and ART screen state). And a sub CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1424 and step S1443 of FIG.
The screen state switching means is
When a predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, if the current screen state is a screen state other than a specific screen state (ART screen state), the screen state is changed from the current screen state to the specific screen state. A demo state switching screen state switching means (sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S1443 in FIG. 182);
The display control means includes
When the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied, demo image display control means for displaying a demo image corresponding to the specific screen state on the display surface of the screen (sub CPU 1071 that executes the process of step S1336 in FIG. 179). With
The screen state switching means further includes
After the screen state is switched to the specific screen state by the screen state switching means at the time of transition to the demo, a predetermined demo is displayed while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control means. When the release condition is satisfied, the demo state screen state switching unit (in step S1424 of FIG. 181) restores the screen state from the specific screen state to the screen state before being switched by the demo state screen state switching unit. A sub-CPU 1071) for executing processing,
The display control means further includes
When the predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control means, the display of the demo image is terminated on the display surface of the screen. Providing effect image display control means (sub CPU1071 that executes the process of step S1325 in FIG. 179) for displaying effect images,
The predetermined demo cancellation condition includes detecting the start command signal output from the start command means,
The fluctuation control means (main CPU 1031 that executes the process of FIG. 178)
When the predetermined demo release condition is satisfied while the demo image is displayed on the display surface of the screen by the demo image display control unit, the screen state is restored by the screen state switching unit at the time of demo release. Wait for the time required to start, and start the variable display of the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the predetermined demo cancellation condition includes the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means (a start operation is performed by the player). When a predetermined demo cancellation condition is satisfied while the demo video is displayed (including a start operation performed by the player), the original screen is changed from the specific screen state (ART screen state). Waiting for the time required for the screen state to return to the state (the screen state at the time when the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied), the symbol variation display (reel RL, RC, RR rotation) is started. The That is, the reels RL, RC, RR are locked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol variation display (reel RL, RC, RR rotation) from being performed before the production is resumed in the original screen state, and the symbol variation display (reel RL, RC). , Rotation of RR) and a situation in which there is a deviation in the correspondence between the production and the production can be avoided.

  If the predetermined demo transition condition is satisfied and the current screen state is a specific screen state (ART screen state), the screen state is not switched. Even when the condition is satisfied, it is not necessary to restore the screen state. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to lock the reels RL, RC, RR.

(V-1) symbol display means (reels RL, RC, RR, and main display window DD4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (start lever DD6 and start switch 1006S) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal lottery means (main CPU 1031 for executing the process of FIG. 157) for determining an internal winning combination;
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for performing symbol display on the symbol display means (the process in step S7 in FIG. 154 and the process in FIG. 178 are executed. Main CPU 1031),
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, and stop switches 1007LS, 1007CS, 1007RS) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, a stop control means for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variation display is performed by the fluctuation control means (Main CPU 1031 that executes the processing of FIG. 158);
A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
One or a plurality of screens (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the screen and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface of the screen by emitting light including the image from the projector (the sub CPU 1071 that executes the processes of steps S1325 and S1336 in FIG. 179);
By driving at least one of the screens (front screen mechanism E1 or reel screen mechanism F1) by a drive mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screen, a screen state indicating the arrangement state of the one or more screens is obtained. Screen state switching means (step S1403 in FIG. 180, FIG. 181 in FIG. 181) for switching from one screen state to the other screen state among a plurality of screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state, and ART screen state). A sub CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1424 and step S1443 of FIG. 182;
When a predetermined gaming state transition condition is established, the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state among a plurality of gaming states (general gaming state, BB gaming state, and ART gaming state). And a gaming state transition means (the main CPU 1031 that executes the processing of step S1122 in FIG. 173, step S1144 in FIG. 174, step S1222 in FIG. 175, and step S1244 in FIG. 176).
The screen state switching means is
Game state transition screen state switching means (FIG. 180) for switching the screen state from the first screen state of the plurality of screen states to the second screen state when the predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied. Sub-CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1403 of FIG.
The fluctuation control means (main CPU 1031 that executes the process of FIG. 178)
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected after the predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, the screen state switching means during the game state transition causes the second screen from the first screen state. Waiting for the time required for the screen state to switch to the screen state to elapse, and starting the variable display of the symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

(V-2) symbol display means (reels RL, RC, RR, and main display window DD4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (start lever DD6 and start switch 1006S) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal lottery means (main CPU 1031 for executing the process of FIG. 157) for determining an internal winning combination;
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for performing symbol display on the symbol display means (the process in step S7 in FIG. 154 and the process in FIG. 178 are executed. Main CPU 1031),
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, and stop switches 1007LS, 1007CS, 1007RS) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, a stop control means for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variation display is performed by the fluctuation control means (Main CPU 1031 that executes the processing of FIG. 158);
A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
N (N is an integer of 2 or more) screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the N screens and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface irradiated with the light by emitting light including the image from the projector (sub-CPU 1071 that executes the processes of steps S1325 and S1336 in FIG. 179);
By driving at least one of the screens (the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1) with a driving mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screens, a screen state indicating the arrangement state of the N screens is changed to N Screen state switching means (step S1403 in FIG. 180, FIG. 181 in FIG. 181) for switching from one screen state to another screen state among the screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state, and ART screen state). A sub CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1424 and step S1443 of FIG. 182;
When a predetermined gaming state transition condition is established, the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state among a plurality of gaming states (general gaming state, BB gaming state, and ART gaming state). And a gaming state transition means (the main CPU 1031 that executes the processing of step S1122 in FIG. 173, step S1144 in FIG. 174, step S1222 in FIG. 175, and step S1244 in FIG. 176).
When the N screens are expressed as a first screen to an Nth screen, and the N screen states are expressed as a first screen state to an Nth screen state, the Kth screen state (K is 1 to N) are arranged such that the N screens are arranged so that the light emitted from the projector is irradiated onto the display surface of the Kth screen and the display surface is visible through the viewing area. The state
The screen state switching means is
When the predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied, the screen state switching means for switching the gaming state from the first screen state of the N screen states to the second screen state (FIG. A sub CPU 1071) that executes the process of step S1403 of 180;
The fluctuation control means (main CPU 1031 that executes the process of FIG. 178)
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected after the predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, the screen state switching means during the game state transition causes the second screen from the first screen state. Waiting for the time required for the screen state to switch to the screen state to elapse, and starting the variable display of the symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied, the first gaming state (for example, the general gaming state) is changed to the second gaming state (for example, the ART gaming state). And the gaming state shifts. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) has three screen states (normal screen state, bonus screen state). If the predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, the screen state is changed from the first screen state (for example, the normal screen state) to the second screen state. (For example, ART screen state). When a start command signal output from the start command means is detected after a predetermined game state transition condition is established (a start operation is performed by the player), a first screen state (for example, a normal screen) The display of the symbol change (reel RL, RC, RR rotation) starts after the time required to switch the screen state from the (state) to the second screen state (for example, the ART screen state) has elapsed. Is done. That is, the reels RL, RC, RR are locked.

  Normally, in a gaming machine, when a start operation is performed by a player and symbol variation display (reel RL, RC, RR rotation) is started, symbol variation display (reel RL, RC, RR rotation) Production is performed in conjunction with. Here, after the predetermined game state transition condition is established, before the screen state is switched from the first screen state (for example, the normal screen state) to the second screen state (for example, the ART screen state). If the symbol variation display (reel RL, RC, RR rotation) is started, the correspondence between the symbol variation display (reel RL, RC, RR rotation) and the production may be shifted. . In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, after the time required for switching the screen state elapses, the symbol variation display is started (the reels RL, RC, RR are locked). Therefore, this situation can be avoided.

  The “game state” is a concept that includes not only the game state controlled by the main control circuit but also the game state (effect state) controlled by the sub control circuit. The gaming state controlled by the main control circuit includes a general gaming state (normal gaming state), a BB gaming state, an ART gaming state, an RT gaming state, and the like. The gaming state controlled by the sub-control circuit includes an ART gaming state, an AT gaming state, an ART lottery high probability state (a state with a high probability of winning an ART lottery), and an ART lottery low probability state (the probability of winning an ART lottery). Low state), an ART lottery state suggestion state (for example, a state in which an effect that is highly likely to be an ART lottery high probability state or a state in which an effect that is unlikely to be an ART lottery high probability state is performed), an effect stage ( For example, the type of effect performed in the normal gaming state) can be given.

  In the fourth embodiment, the time required for switching the screen state differs depending on the screen state before switching and the screen state after switching. That is, for example, as described above, when switching from the normal screen state to the ART screen state, first, the normal screen state is switched to the bonus screen state, and then the bonus screen state is changed to the ART screen state. Therefore, the time required for switching from the normal screen state to the ART screen state is necessarily longer than the time required for switching from the normal screen state to the bonus screen state.

  As described above, when the time required for switching the screen state differs depending on the screen state before switching and the screen state after switching, the reel is locked only for the time corresponding to the time required for switching the screen state. It is good to do. For example, the value set in the reel lock timer in step S1265 of FIG. 178 may be a value corresponding to the screen state before switching and the screen state after switching.

The following specific examples can be given. When the screen state before switching and the screen state after switching are the following (i) to (iii), the following time is required for switching the screen state.
(I) When the screen state before switching is the normal screen state (bonus screen state) and the screen state after switching is the bonus screen state (normal screen state): 0.5 seconds (ii) Before switching When the screen state is the bonus screen state (ART screen state) and the screen state after switching is the ART screen state (bonus screen state): 0.3 seconds (iii) The screen state before switching is normal When the screen state (ART screen state) and the screen state after switching is the ART screen state (normal screen state): 0.8 seconds

  The correspondence relationship between the screen state before switching and the screen state after switching and the time required for switching the screen state is stored in the main ROM 1032. When the screen state is switched (for example, when it is determined in step S1261 in FIG. 178 that the gaming state transition flag is set to ON, or in step S1263, the screen state return flag is set to ON. The main CPU 1031 identifies a time (required time) required for the screen state to be switched based on the screen state before the switching and the screen state after the switching, and is substantially the same as the required time. A value corresponding to (or a time slightly longer than the required time) is set in the reel lock timer. Thereby, for example, in the case of (i), the reels RL, RC, RR can be locked for a time of about 0.5 to 0.7 seconds, and in the case of (ii), 0. The reels RL, RC, RR can be locked for a time of about 3 to 0.5 seconds. In the case of (iii) above, the reels RL, RC, RR are only for a time of about 0.8 to 1.0 seconds. Can be locked.

  When the reel is locked in this way, the emission of light from the projector may be resumed as the reel starts to rotate. For example, when it is determined in step S1266 in FIG. 178 that the value of the reel lock timer is 0, the main CPU 1031 transmits a reel lock release command to the sub control circuit 1070. In step S1404 in FIG. 180 or step S1425 in FIG. 181, the sub CPU 1071 transmits an instruction to turn on the light source to the control unit of the projector mechanism B2 when receiving the reel lock release command. Thereby, the light emission from the projector mechanism B2 can be resumed at the timing when the reels RL, RC, RR are unlocked and the reels RL, RC, RR start to rotate.

  In such a configuration, even if a start operation is performed, the reel does not rotate and no image is projected by the projector, so that the player operates the start lever effectively. There is a possibility of falling into anxiety that it may not be. Therefore, even when the reel is locked and the emission of light from the projector is stopped, notification devices other than the projector, such as lamps and speakers, can be configured to be controlled regardless of the lock time. desirable.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment has been described above. Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment to the fourth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the parts in the second embodiment to the fourth embodiment that are applicable in the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

<Structure of reel screen mechanism F1>
First, the structure of the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 184 is a diagram schematically showing the structure of the reel screen mechanism. Specifically, FIG. 184 (a) is a front view schematically showing an exploded state of the reel screen mechanism F1. FIG. 184 (b) is a side view schematically showing a state in which the constituent members of the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed. FIG. 184 (c) is a front view schematically showing a state in which the constituent members of the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (a), the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen member F1001, a flexible substrate F1002, and a support member F1003, and these are integrated.

  The LED 1000 is installed on the flexible substrate F1002. In FIG. 184 (a), only 20 LEDs 1000 are shown for convenience, but actually, a large number of LEDs 1000 are arranged in a matrix (lattice) on the flexible substrate F1002.

  A number of through holes 1001 are formed in the reel screen member F1001. As shown in FIG. 184 (b), the light emitted from the LED 1000 passes through the through hole 1001 and is emitted to the outside of the reel screen mechanism F1. The same number of through holes 1001 as the number of LEDs 1000 are formed at positions corresponding to the positions where the LEDs 1000 are provided (see FIG. 184 (c)).

  Of the light emitted from the LED 1000, the light emitted toward the vicinity of the front surface passes through the through hole 1001 and becomes visible through the upper display window UD1. On the other hand, the light emitted from the LED 1000 toward the side cannot pass through the reel screen member F1001.

  The screen paint similar to that described in the second embodiment is applied to a portion of the reel screen member F1001 where the through hole 1001 is not formed. Thereby, the projection surface 1001a is formed. Moreover, the pattern is formed in the back surface (surface on the opposite side to the surface adhere | attached with the flexible substrate F1002) of support member F1003 similarly to 2nd Embodiment.

  The flexible substrate F1002 has flexibility and can be deformed into a desired shape. As in the second embodiment, the flexible substrate F1002 is also curved as shown in FIG. 184 (b) in accordance with the reel screen member F1001 and the support member F1003 being formed in an arc shape when viewed from the side.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is integrated by the reel screen member F1001 and the flexible substrate F1002 being screwed together and the flexible substrate F1002 and the support member F1003 being bonded together with an adhesive. The method of fixing each constituent member is not particularly limited. For example, a light guide member may be provided between the reel screen member F1001 and the flexible substrate F1002 and assembled through the light guide member.

  The wiring for electrically connecting the flexible substrate F1002 and the relay substrate CK (or the sub-control device SS) does not interfere with the operation of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the arm member that constitutes the reel screen drive mechanism F2. The display unit A is arranged along the F21 (refer to FIG. 62) from the rear rear side of the support member F1003 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position so that it is difficult for the player to see. It arrange | positions so that it may extend in a back direction.

<Production using reel screen mechanism F1>
Subsequently, an effect using the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing an effect using the reel screen mechanism.

  In the fifth embodiment, the correspondence relationship between the game state and the screen state is different from that in the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment.

  In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the screen state when the gaming state is the general gaming state is described as the state where the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position (normal screen state). . This also applies to the fifth embodiment.

  In the third and fourth embodiments, the screen state when the gaming state is the BB gaming state is such that the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position. It was described as being in a state (bonus screen state). On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position (the bonus screen in the third and fourth embodiments). (State) is a screen state (ART screen state) when the gaming state is the ART gaming state.

  In the third and fourth embodiments, the screen state when the gaming state is the ART gaming state is such that the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position. It was described as being in a state (ART screen state). In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position (the ART screen in the third and fourth embodiments). (State) is a screen state (ART additional screen state) when the game state is an ART addition game state.

  The ART added gaming state is a state for increasing (adding) the number of ART games, and is activated when an MB (not shown) wins in the ART gaming state. In the ART addition game state, when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line, the number of ART games is added. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the ART state is activated during the ART game state (the MB wins internally).

  FIG. 185 shows an effect performed when the screen state is switched from the ART screen state to the ART additional screen state.

  In the fifth embodiment, the ART screen state is a state in which the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position. Further, the ART addition screen state is a state in which the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position. Therefore, when the screen state is switched from the ART screen state to the ART addition screen state, the reel screen mechanism F1 moves from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position.

  Further, as described above, an image is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D in the ART screen state. Further, in the ART addition screen state, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1. Accordingly, as the reel screen mechanism F1 moves from the reel standby position toward the reel exposure position, the fixed screen mechanism D is gradually covered by the reel screen mechanism F1.

  Based on the above, reference is made to FIG. In the ART gaming state, when the MB is won internally (when the transition condition to the ART additional screen state is satisfied), as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the fact that there is a possibility of transition to the ART additional gaming state is notified. An image of the content is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Thereafter, when the drive motor F24 is driven, the reel screen mechanism F1 disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D (reel standby position) passes over the fixed screen mechanism D, and then the fixed screen mechanism D It appears forward and gradually descends (see FIG. 53). FIG. 185 (b) and FIG. 185 (c) show the situation at that time.

  In FIG. 185 (b), the reel screen mechanism F1 appears in front of the fixed screen mechanism D, and the lower part of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the upper part of the display surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. And LED1000 provided in the part which covers the fixed screen mechanism D among the display surfaces of the reel screen mechanism F1 is light-emitting.

  On the display surface of the fixed screen mechanism D that is not covered by the reel screen mechanism F1, an image showing that the character is playing is displayed. On the other hand, a black image is displayed on the portion of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that covers the fixed screen mechanism D.

  In FIG. 185 (c), as time elapses from the time shown in FIG. 185 (b), the reel screen mechanism F1 moves downward to cover the fixed screen mechanism D on the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. The area of the existing portion is increased as compared with FIG. 185 (b).

  Similarly to FIG. 185 (b), the LED 1000 provided on the portion of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 covering the fixed screen mechanism D emits light, but the fixed screen of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. As the area of the portion covering mechanism D increases, the number of LEDs 1000 that emit light is increased as compared with FIG. 185 (b).

  Similarly to FIG. 185 (b), a black image is displayed on the portion of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that covers the fixed screen mechanism D. On the other hand, a character image notifying that it is determined to shift to the ART addition game state is displayed on a portion of the display surface of the fixed screen mechanism D that is not covered by the reel screen mechanism F1.

  As described above, in FIG. 185, the case of shifting to the ART addition game state has been described, but even when the ART addition game state is not shifted, by controlling the operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 and the light emission of the LED 1000, FIG. It is also possible to perform the same effect (Gass effect that suggests shifting to the ART addition game state).

  For example, it is assumed that the ART addition gaming state is triggered by winning a lottery (ART addition transition lottery) performed in the sub-control circuit when an MB is internally won in the ART gaming state. The above-described gasse effect is performed when the MB is won internally in the ART gaming state but is not won the ART addition transfer lottery. In this case, in FIG. 185 (b), an image showing a state in which the left character loses to Janken is displayed. Thereafter, the drive motor F24 is controlled so that the reel screen mechanism F1 descending in front of the fixed screen mechanism D returns to the original position (reel standby position). In this case, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be moved once to the reel exposure position and then returned to the reel standby position, or the operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is stopped halfway before reaching the reel exposure position. It is also possible to return to the reel standby position.

  In addition, there is no particular limitation on the transition timing to the ART addition screen state, when a predetermined combination is won internally, when a predetermined combination wins, when a specific time is reached, or by a player with an effect button A transition opportunity such as a case where the player is operated, or a case where an ART addition lottery performed in these cases is won can be appropriately adopted.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has the following features.

(VI-1) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A light emitting device (reel screen mechanism F1) provided with a light emitting means (LED1000) capable of emitting light;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the screen and the light emitting device and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface of the screen by emitting light including the image from the projector (sub CPU 1071 for executing processing for displaying the image shown in FIG. 185);
By driving the screen or the light emitting device with a driving mechanism, one of the screen and the light emitting device covers a part of the other when the inside of the main body is viewed through the visual recognition area. Drive control means for operating the screen or the light emitting device so that the relative positions of the two change depending on the state (sub CPU 1071 for executing processing for operating the reel screen mechanism F1 as shown in FIG. 185);
A light emission control means for causing the light emission means to emit light (a sub CPU 1071 that executes a process for causing the LED 1000 to emit light as shown in FIGS. 185 (b) and 185 (c)),
The display control means includes
Controlling the projector so that the visibility when the light emitted from the light emitting means is viewed through the visual recognition area does not deteriorate due to the image projected by the projector;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

(VI-2) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
A plurality of screens (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the plurality of screens and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface irradiated with the light by emitting light including the image from the projector (sub-CPU 1071 that executes the processes of steps S1325 and S1336 in FIG. 179);
By driving at least one of the screens (the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1) with a driving mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screen, a screen state indicating the arrangement state of the plurality of screens is changed to a plurality of screen states. Screen state switching means (step S1403 in FIG. 180, step in FIG. 181) for switching from one screen state to another screen state among the screen states (normal screen state, ART screen state, and ART overlay screen state) A sub-CPU 1071) that executes S1424 and the process of step S1443 in FIG. 182;
The plurality of screens include a first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) and a second screen (reel screen mechanism F1),
The plurality of screen states include a first screen state (ART screen state) and a second screen state (ART overlay screen state),
In the first screen state (ART screen state), the light emitted from the projector is irradiated on the display surface of the first screen, and the display surface is visible through the viewing area. The plurality of screens are arranged,
In the second screen state (ART addition screen state), the light emitted from the projector is irradiated on the display surface of the second screen, and the display surface is visible through the viewing area. The plurality of screens are arranged in
In the second screen state, the first screen and the second screen are arranged so that the display surface of the second screen covers the display surface of the first screen from the front,
The second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LED1000) capable of emitting light,
The screen state switching means is
The screen state is switched from the first screen state to the second screen state by driving the first screen or the second screen by a drive mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screen,
The gaming machine further includes:
While the screen state is switched from the first screen state to the second screen state by the screen state switching means, the relative position of the first screen and the second screen changes. Accordingly, as the area of the portion of the display surface of the second screen that covers the display surface of the first screen increases, the number of light emitting means that emit light that can be visually recognized through the visual recognition region increases. Emission control means for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emission means so as to increase sequentially (sub CPU 1071 for executing processing for causing the LED 1000 to emit light as shown in FIGS. 185 (b) and 185 (c)),
The display control means includes
While the screen state is switched from the first screen state to the second screen state by the screen state switching means, the display surface of the first screen is covered among the display surfaces of the second screen. The portion including the monochrome screen is irradiated with light including a single color image, or the portion of the display surface of the second screen that covers the display surface of the first screen is not irradiated with light. So as to control the projector,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is driven by the drive mechanism (drive motor F24), and the arrangement position of the screen changes, so that the first screen The screen state is switched from the screen state (ART screen state) to the second screen state (ART additional screen state). In the first screen state (ART screen state), the light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 is applied to the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D), and the display surface is a viewing area (upper display window). UD1) is visible, and in the second screen state (ART overlay screen state), the light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 irradiates the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). In addition, the display surface is visible through the viewing area (upper display window UD1). That is, when the screen state is switched from the first screen state (ART screen state) to the second screen state (ART additional screen state), the target irradiated by the projector mechanism B2 is the first screen (fixed). The display surface of the screen mechanism D) is switched to the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). In the second screen state (ART addition screen state), the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is covered from the front by the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). Accordingly, while the screen state is switched from the first screen state (ART screen state) to the second screen state (ART additional screen state), the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is changed. While gradually covering the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D), the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) appears at a position that can be viewed through the viewing area (upper display window UD1). It will be done.

  On the other hand, the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 1000), and the first screen state (ART screen state) to the second screen state (ART addition screen). The second screen is changed as the relative position of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) changes while the screen state is switched to the state). As the area of the portion of the display surface of the (reel screen mechanism F1) covering the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) increases, it can be viewed through the visual recognition region (upper display window UD1). The light emission of the plurality of light emitting means (LED1000) is controlled so that the number of light emitting means (LED1000) during the light emission increases sequentially. It is. As a result, the state in which the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) appears at a position that can be viewed through the viewing area (upper display window UD1) and the light emission by the light emitting means (LED1000) are linked. Thus, it is possible to produce a novel and attractive effect in which an effect using the screen (the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1) and an effect using the light emitting means (LED1000) are integrated.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, while the screen state is switched from the first screen state (ART screen state) to the second screen state (ART addition screen state), Projector mechanism B2 so that light including a black image is irradiated to a portion of the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) covering the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D). Is controlled.

  Specifically, information including a pixel value corresponding to an area covering the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) in the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is 0 is included. Based on the image data, an instruction is transmitted from the sub CPU 1071 to the control unit of the projector mechanism B2 to apply a drive voltage corresponding to the image data to each pixel of the liquid crystal panel. As a result, a black image is displayed on the portion of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that covers the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Accordingly, since the light emitted from the LED 1000 stands out when the periphery of the LED 1000 becomes black due to the black image, the visibility when the light emitted from the LED 1000 is viewed through the viewing area (upper display window UD1) is improved by the projector mechanism. It will not be reduced by the image projected by B2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect using the LED 1000 from being disturbed by the image effect using the projector mechanism B2 (rather, the black image makes the light emission from the LED 1000 stand out). Can be created effectively.

  In the present invention, light transmission in each pixel corresponding to a region covering the display surface of the first screen (for example, fixed screen mechanism D) in the display surface of the second screen (for example, reel screen mechanism F1). It is desirable to control the projector so that the rates are all the same. In this case, the image projected from the projector is an image composed of only one color (monochromatic image).

  For example, while the screen state is switched from the first screen state (ART screen state) to the second screen state (ART additional screen state), the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is changed. Among them, the projector may be controlled such that light including a white image is irradiated to a portion covering the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D). In this case, a full-color LED may be adopted as the light emitting means, and the color of light emitted from the full-color LED may be made different according to the degree of expectation to shift to the ART game state (a game state advantageous to the player). For example, when the expectation level for shifting to the ART addition game state is high, the reel screen mechanism may appear while emitting red light from the full-color LED.

  Further, while the screen state is switched from the first screen state (ART screen state) to the second screen state (ART additional screen state), the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is changed. Among them, the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) of the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is irradiated while irradiating light to the portion not covered by the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). The light source or lens of the projector may be controlled so that light is not applied to the portion covering the display surface.

  In the fifth embodiment, as the area of the portion of the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) covering the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) increases, the viewing region (upper side) The number of light emitting means (LEDs 1000) that are emitting light that can be visually recognized through the display window UD1) sequentially increases. For this reason, as the reel screen mechanism F1 moves downward, the LEDs 1000 installed on the lower side of the reel screen mechanism F1 sequentially emit light (in the example of FIG. 185, the five rows arranged in the lowermost row are arranged side by side. After causing the LEDs 1000 to emit light, the projector mechanism B2 is controlled so that the five LEDs 1000 juxtaposed in the second row from the bottom emit light.

In the present invention, when LEDs are juxtaposed in a matrix (N rows), the LEDs juxtaposed in the Kth row from the bottom are driven by a second screen (for example, reel screen mechanism F1). It is possible to control to emit light when a predetermined time (T _K ) has elapsed since the start of the operation (T _{K + 1} > T _K is satisfied).

  However, in the present invention, after the second screen (for example, the reel screen mechanism F1) starts moving, a predetermined timing before appearing in front of the first screen (for example, the fixed screen mechanism D). It is good also as making all LED light-emit simultaneously. Also in this case, as the reel screen mechanism moves, the number of light emitting LEDs that can be visually recognized through the visual recognition area sequentially increases.

  In the present invention, the LED may not be provided over the entire surface of the reel screen mechanism. For example, as the reel screen mechanism moves downward, the LED is installed on the lower side of the reel screen mechanism. In view of the sequential light emission, the LED may be provided only in an area below a predetermined line on the display surface of the reel screen mechanism.

  The light emitting means in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it can emit light, and may be a fluorescent tube, a light bulb or the like. The reel screen mechanism F1 corresponds to the light emitting device in the present invention. The light-emitting device in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as a light-emitting means (light source) is provided. For example, a liquid crystal display or an accessory with electrical decoration may be used. When a liquid crystal display is employed as the light emitting device, the display surface of the liquid crystal display may be a flat surface or a curved surface like the reel screen mechanism F1.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment has been described above. The sixth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment to the fifth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the parts in the second embodiment to the fifth embodiment where the description applies also in the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

  The configuration of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the sixth embodiment is as described in the second embodiment, and the projection surface F1a is formed by applying a screen coating material. The LED as in the fifth embodiment is not provided.

  The correspondence relationship between the gaming state and the screen state in the sixth embodiment is the same as in the fifth embodiment.

<Production using fixed screen mechanism D and reel screen mechanism F1>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, an effect using the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. FIG. 186 and FIG. 187 are views showing effects using the fixed screen mechanism and the reel screen mechanism.

  As shown in FIG. 186 (a), when the MB is won internally in the ART gaming state (when the condition for transitioning to the ART additional screen state is satisfied), it is notified that there is a possibility of transition to the ART additional gaming state. An image of the content is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D. This is the same as in the fifth embodiment.

  Thereafter, when the drive motor F24 is driven, the reel screen mechanism F1 disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D (reel standby position) passes over the fixed screen mechanism D, and then the fixed screen mechanism D It appears forward and gradually descends (see FIG. 53). FIG. 186 (b), FIG. 187 (a), and FIG. 187 (b) show the situation at that time.

  In FIG. 186 (b), the reel screen mechanism F1 appears in front of the fixed screen mechanism D, and the lower part of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the upper part of the display surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. On the display surface of the fixed screen mechanism D that is not covered by the reel screen mechanism F1, an image showing that the character is playing is displayed. On the other hand, on the part of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that covers the fixed screen mechanism D, the Janken result (par and goo) is displayed.

  Note that a dotted line indicates a boundary between a portion of the display surface of the fixed screen mechanism D that is not covered by the reel screen mechanism F1 and a portion of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that covers the fixed screen mechanism D. However, the dotted line is shown for convenience of explanation, and such a dotted line is not actually visible.

  In FIG. 187 (a), as time elapses from the time shown in FIG. 186 (b), the reel screen mechanism F1 moves downward to cover the fixed screen mechanism D on the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. The area of the existing portion is increased as compared with FIG. 186 (b). In the portion of the display surface of the fixed screen mechanism D that is not covered by the reel screen mechanism F1, an image is displayed that shows that the character is making a piece as a result of winning the game. On the other hand, a character image indicating that the character has won is displayed on a portion of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that covers the fixed screen mechanism D.

  In FIG. 187 (b), as time elapses from the time shown in FIG. 187 (a), the reel screen mechanism F1 moves further downward to cover the fixed screen mechanism D on the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. The area of the portion is further increased as compared with FIG. 187 (a).

  On the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that covers the fixed screen mechanism D, a character image notifying that it is determined to shift to the ART addition game state is displayed. In addition, an image showing a state where the ceiling is falling from above is displayed. An image showing a state in which the character making a piece in FIG. 187 (a) is crushed by the ceiling falling from above on the portion of the display surface of the fixed screen mechanism D that is not covered by the reel screen mechanism F1. Is displayed.

  As described above, in the effects shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the reel screen mechanism F1 is covered by the reel screen mechanism F1 on the display surface of the fixed screen mechanism D in conjunction with the lowering of the reel screen mechanism F1 while covering the fixed screen mechanism D. The image to be displayed on the portion that is not covered and the portion of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that covers the fixed screen mechanism D is changed over time.

  186 and 187 describe the case of shifting to the ART added gaming state. However, even when the ART does not shift to the added gaming state, the reel screen mechanism F1 and the reel of the display surface of the fixed screen mechanism D are displayed. By controlling the image display in the portion not covered by the screen mechanism F1 and the portion of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that covers the fixed screen mechanism D, the same effects (ART as in FIGS. 186 and 187) It is also possible to perform a gaze effect that suggests a transition to the added gaming state.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(VII-1) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector and different from the first screen;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the first screen and the second screen and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable, and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
When the first screen or the second screen is driven by a driving mechanism, the second screen is a part of the first screen when the inside of the main body is viewed through the viewing area. Drive control means (FIG. 186 and FIG. 186) for operating the first screen or the second screen so that the relative positions of the first screen and the second screen change in a state of covering the screen. As shown in FIG. 187, a sub CPU 1071) that executes processing for operating the reel screen mechanism F1;
Moving image data storage means (sub-ROM 1072) capable of storing moving image data corresponding to moving images displayed on the display surface of the screen;
Based on the moving image data stored in the moving image data storage unit, the first screen or the second screen is operated by the drive control unit by emitting light including an image from the projector. A portion of the display surface of the first screen that is not covered by the display surface of the second screen and / or the display of the first screen of the display surface of the second screen. Display control means for displaying a moving image in a portion covering the surface (sub CPU 1071 for executing processing for displaying an image shown in FIGS. 186 and 187);
The drive control means and the display control means are
A change in the relative position of the first screen and the second screen with time, a portion of the display surface of the first screen that is not covered by the display surface of the second screen, and / or Alternatively, the first screen or the first screen may be synchronized with a temporal change of a moving image displayed on a portion of the display surface of the second screen that covers the display surface of the first screen. 2 to control the operation of the screen and the display of moving images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, when the inside of the main body (cabinet G) is viewed through the viewing area (upper display window UD1), the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is the first. The relative position between the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is changed in a state where a part of the screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is covered. The second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) operates. Of the change in the relative position of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) over time and the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) The portion not covered by the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) and the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) among the display surfaces of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) The operation of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) and the display of the moving image are controlled so that the change with time of the moving image displayed on the portion covering the screen is synchronized. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform an attractive production in which the operation of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) and the display of the moving image cooperate, and the fun of the game can be greatly improved.

  Moreover, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the portion of the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that is not covered by the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). Change with time of image to be displayed and change with time of image to be displayed on a portion of the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) covering the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D). Are synchronized with each other so that the images displayed on each are integrated. Thus, a novel moving image (see FIGS. 186 and 187) in which the display of these images and the movement of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) are linked can be provided.

  The moving image data (movie data) corresponding to such a moving image is stored in the sub ROM 1072. The sub CPU 1071 starts projecting a moving image from the projector mechanism B2 based on the moving image data stored in the sub ROM 1072 at the timing when the reel screen mechanism F1 starts to cover the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, a moving image as shown in FIGS. 186 and 187 is not covered by the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) in the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D). And it can display on the part which has covered the display surface of the 1st screen (fixed screen mechanism D) among the display surfaces of the 2nd screen (reel screen mechanism F1).

  Various modes can be considered as a method for recognizing the timing at which the sub CPU 1071 starts projecting a moving image. For example, the projection of the moving image may be started from the projector mechanism B2 when a predetermined time has elapsed after the drive of the reel screen mechanism F1 is started. In this case, it is considered that the sub CPU 1071 recognizes that the reel screen mechanism F1 has reached a position where the reel screen mechanism F1 starts to cover the fixed screen mechanism D when a predetermined time has elapsed after the drive of the reel screen mechanism F1 is started. You will be jealous. Further, since the sub CPU 1071 can grasp the current position of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from the origin position (reel standby position) of the reel screen mechanism F1, the number of steps is set to a predetermined number. When it reaches, projection of a moving image may be started from the projector mechanism B2. In this case, when the number of steps reaches a predetermined number, it is considered that the sub CPU 1071 recognizes that the reel screen mechanism F1 has reached the position where the fixed screen mechanism D starts to be covered.

A moving image is composed of a large number of still images, and a number of still images are continuously changed over time. Here, the moving image is composed of N still images, and is expressed as a first still image to an Nth still image in the order of projection. In this case, it is assumed that the number of steps projecting a still image of the K upon reaching a S _K, correspondence between the still image to be projected and the projection timing (still images of the K) (S _K) If the image display is controlled based on this, the driving of the reel screen mechanism F1 and the display of the moving image can be more reliably synchronized.

  In the present invention, the mode in which the operation of the screen and the display of the moving image are synchronized is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 186 and 187. For example, in FIGS. 186 and 187, an image of a predetermined color (black color) is displayed on a portion of the display surface of the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) covering the display surface of the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D). Image) may be displayed, and the area of the area where the black image is displayed may be gradually increased in conjunction with the movement of the reel screen mechanism F1. In this way, it is possible to express how the character is crushed by the reel screen mechanism F1 (black image).

  In addition, a sun-shaped object (a sun-shaped object) with a screen coating applied on its surface draws an arc from the left to the right in front of the first screen (for example, the fixed screen mechanism D). In such a case, the solar shaped object is always projected on the surface (display surface) of the solar shaped object while the solar shaped object is moving. And the display of the orange image may be synchronized. Further, when a moon-shaped object (a moon-shaped object) having a screen coating applied on its surface moves in front of the first screen (for example, the fixed screen mechanism D), You may synchronize operation | movement of a lunar shape object and the image display on the surface (display surface) of a lunar shape so that a shape may change (for example, full moon-> half moon-> crescent moon).

[Seventh Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment has been described above. The seventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the second to sixth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment to the sixth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions in the second embodiment to the sixth embodiment where the description applies also in the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

  The configuration of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the seventh embodiment is basically the same as that described in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, no mention was made as to whether the LED 1000 is a full-color LED or a white LED. However, the LED 1000 in the seventh embodiment is a white LED (white light-emitting diode).

  Specifically, the LED 1000 (white LED) in the seventh embodiment has a structure in which a yellow phosphor is covered with a blue LED. A part of blue light emitted from the blue LED excites the phosphor to emit yellow light, and this and blue light are mixed to become white light. A conventionally known configuration can be adopted as the white LED, and the white LED is not limited to a combination of a blue LED and a yellow phosphor. For example, a combination of an ultraviolet light emitting LED and a white phosphor can be used. Good.

  In the seventh embodiment, an effect is performed using such an LED 1000 (white LED) and a color image.

<Production using reel screen mechanism F1>
An effect using the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 188 to 191 are diagrams for explaining the effects using the reel screen mechanism.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 188 to 191 are performed in the ART gaming state. The correspondence relationship between the gaming state and the screen state in the seventh embodiment is the same as in the second to fourth embodiments, and an image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 in the ART gaming state (ART screen state). The

  In FIG. 188 (a), the letter 1101 "C" is shown in the reel screen mechanism F1.

  FIG. 188 (b) is an enlarged view of the character 1101. FIG. As described in the fifth embodiment, a large number of LEDs 1000 are juxtaposed in a matrix (lattice) on the reel screen mechanism F1 (flexible substrate F1002). Of the large number of LEDs 1000, the LED 1000 shown in FIG. 188 (b) emits light, thereby forming a letter 1101 "C".

  Thereafter, similarly, the LED 1000 emits light so as to form a character 1102 “H” (see FIG. 189 (a)), and the LED 1000 emits light so as to form a character 1103 “A” (FIG. 189 (b)). )), The LED 1000 emits light so as to form the letter 1104 “N”, the LED 1000 emits light so as to form the letter 1105 “C”, and the LED 1000 emits light so as to form the letter 1106 “E”. (See FIG. 189 (c)).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), the colored characters 1201 to 1206 are visible. The colored characters 1201 to 1206 have an appearance in which each of the characters 1101 to 1106 is colored in blue. In FIG. 190 (a), blue is indicated by diagonal lines.

  Such colored characters 1201 to 1206 are visible when the blue image 1301 shown in FIG. 190B is displayed over the entire display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. A hatched portion in FIG. 190 (b) is a blue portion.

  The colored characters 1201 to 1206 having a blue appearance indicate that the degree of expectation for shifting to the ART addition game state is not so high. The ART addition game state is as described in the fifth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(VIII-1) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2);
A screen (reel screen mechanism F1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector and provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LED 1000) capable of emitting light;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the screen and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable and provided with a visual recognition area (upper display window UD1) where the display surface of the screen can be visually recognized;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface of the screen by emitting light including the image from the projector (sub CPU 1071 for executing processing for displaying the image shown in FIG. 190B);
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the light emission means (sub CPU 1071 for executing processing for causing the LED 1000 to emit light as shown in FIG. 188 (b)),
The display control means includes
Displaying an image including a color other than the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means in an area including the installation location of the light emitting means emitting light under the control of the light emission control means;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the white LED (LED1000) is installed in the reel screen mechanism F1. And when white LED (LED1000) is light-emitting, the image (blue image) containing colors other than white is displayed on the area | region containing the installation location of light-emitting white LED (LED1000). Therefore, when the light emitted from the white LED (LED 1000) is viewed through the visual recognition area (upper display window UD1), an appearance is produced in which the color of the light is colored blue by a blue image. It will be. In this way, by cooperating the light emission of the white LED (LED 1000) and the display of the color image, it is possible to produce a novel and attractive effect and improve the entertainment of the game. Further, normally, full-color LEDs are expensive, but according to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to perform colorful effects using relatively inexpensive white LEDs.

(VIII-2) The gaming machine of (VIII-1),
The light emission control means includes
Controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means so that a character is formed when a plurality of light emitting means emitting light are connected by virtual lines,
The display control means includes
Displaying an image including a color other than the color of light emitted from the light emitting means in the region including the character;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, characters 1101 to 1106 are formed when a plurality of light emitting white LEDs (LED 1000) are connected by virtual lines (see FIGS. 188 and 189). A blue image 1301 (see FIG. 190B) is displayed in an area including 1101 to 1106 (the entire display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1). Accordingly, it is possible to show the player that the characters colored in blue are highlighted by the light emission of the white LED (LED 1000) (see FIG. 190 (a)). Through such colored characters 1201 to 1206, it is possible to provide a variety of effects, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, the blue image 1301 is displayed in the area including the characters 1101 to 1106. In the present invention, the color of the image displayed in the area including the character is not particularly limited, and an image of any color other than the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be displayed. For example, the color of the image displayed in the area including characters may be changed according to the degree of expectation for shifting to the ART addition gaming state (the gaming state advantageous to the player), and the degree of expectation for shifting to the ART addition gaming state When is high, a yellow or red image may be displayed. When the color image is composed of only one color, the projector may be controlled so that the light transmittance in each pixel corresponding to the area including the character is the same.

  In the present invention, the color image may include a plurality of colors. For example, an image including a plurality of colors (for example, a rainbow image in which a plurality of colors are arranged in a rainbow shape) is displayed when there is a high expectation level for shifting to an ART addition gaming state (a gaming state advantageous to the player). It is good as well.

  In the present invention, the color of light emitted from the light emitting means is not limited to white. For example, if a red LED (green LED) is employed as the light emitting means, the color of light emitted from the light emitting means is red (green), and in this case, the color image includes a color other than red (green). It becomes.

  In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the blue image 1301 is displayed over the entire display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 (see FIG. 190B). In the present invention, the region for displaying a color image is not particularly limited as long as it includes a character formed when a plurality of light emitting white LEDs are connected by virtual lines. As long as the location where the white LED emits and the area where the color image is displayed overlap, the white light emitted from the white LED can be colored.

  For example, a color image (for example, the blue image in FIG. 191 (a)) is formed in one rectangular area (area where a predetermined character string (for example, “CHANCE”) is formed) smaller than the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. 1401) may be displayed. Further, a color image (for example, the blue image in FIG. 191 (b)) is displayed on each of a plurality of rectangular regions (the same number as the number of characters to be formed, or 6 when a character string “CHANCE” is formed). 1501-1506) may be displayed. The color image may be displayed in a circular or elliptical area instead of the rectangular area as shown in FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b). Further, a character image (an image having a character shape) with a color (for example, colored character images 1601 to 1606 in FIG. 191 (c)) may be displayed as a color image. In any of the cases shown in FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (c), since the portion where the white LED emits light and the area where the color image is displayed overlap, the white light emitted from the white LED is colored. As a result, colored characters 1201 to 1206 as shown in FIG. 190 (a) can be visually recognized. As described above, various modes are conceivable as the region for displaying the color image, but the region for displaying the color image preferably includes all the places where the white LED emitting light is installed.

  In FIG. 191, a blue image is indicated by a hatched portion, but a white image may be projected on a portion other than the hatched portion of the display surface of the reel screen mechanism F1, and light is not irradiated. It is good as well.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 191 (b) and 191 (c), when a color image is displayed in a plurality of areas, the color image may be displayed in the plurality of areas at the same time. An image may be displayed. In the case where color images are sequentially displayed one by one, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation for shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player depending on whether or not a color image is displayed in the last region. For example, after displaying a color image sequentially in five areas corresponding to five characters other than “E” constituting “CHANCE”, and displaying a color image in an area corresponding to “E”. When the color image is displayed in the area corresponding to “E”, the degree of expectation for shifting to a game state advantageous to the player may be high.

  In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that characters 1101 to 1106 are formed when a plurality of white LEDs (LED 1000) that emit light are connected by virtual lines. In the present invention, what is formed when a plurality of white LEDs emitting light are connected by virtual lines is not limited to characters, and may be graphics or symbols, or characters, graphics, symbols, etc. It may be a combination.

  In the seventh embodiment, the LED 1000 is described as being installed inside the reel screen mechanism F1. Thus, since the amount of light emitted to the outside of the screen can be suppressed by burying the LEDs inside the screen, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzling. But in this invention, LED may be exposed to the exterior of a screen and may be installed directly on the surface of the screen.

  The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. In the embodiment described above, the case where the present invention is mainly applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described. However, the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, etc.). .

  The first embodiment to the seventh embodiment of the present invention have been described above, but only specific examples are illustrated, and the present invention is not particularly limited. The specific configuration of each unit and the like is appropriately changed in design. Is possible. The effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are only the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

  Further, in the above detailed description, the characteristic portions have been mainly described so that the present invention can be easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the detailed description above, but can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application is various. The terms and terminology used in the present specification are used to accurately describe the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. Moreover, it would be easy for those skilled in the art to infer other configurations, systems, methods, and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in this specification. Accordingly, the description of the claims should be regarded as including an equivalent configuration without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. The purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical contents and essence of this application by patent offices and general public institutions, and engineers belonging to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms or technical terms. It is intended to be able to make a quick determination through a simple survey. Accordingly, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the claims. Moreover, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the specific effects of the present invention, it is desired that the interpretation should be made with sufficient consideration of the literatures already disclosed.

  The above detailed description includes processing executed by a computer. The above explanations and expressions are given for the purpose of enabling those skilled in the art to understand the most efficiently. In this specification, each process used to derive one result should be understood as a process without self-contradiction. In each process, transmission / reception, recording, and the like of electrical or magnetic signals are performed. In the processing in each processing, such a signal is expressed by bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but these are used only for convenience of explanation. There is a need. In addition, the processes in each process may be described in expressions common to human actions, but the processes described in this specification are executed by various devices in principle. Further, other configurations required for performing each processing are obvious from the above description.

1 gaming machine 21 cabinet A display unit B irradiation light device C screen device D fixed screen mechanism E1 front screen mechanism F1 reel screen mechanism UD upper door mechanism DD lower door mechanism

Claims (2)

A symbol display means capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols;
Start command means for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Internal lottery means for determining an internal winning combination triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means;
Triggered by detecting the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for displaying a fluctuation of symbols in the symbol display means,
Stop command means for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, a stop control means for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variation display is performed by the fluctuation control means When,
A projector capable of projecting an image;
One or a plurality of screens having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body that houses the screen and has an opening on the front surface;
An openable / closable door attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable, and provided with a visual recognition area capable of visually recognizing the display surface of the screen;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface of the screen by emitting light including the image from the projector;
By driving at least one of the screens by a driving mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screens, the screen state indicating the arrangement state of the one or more screens is changed to one screen state of the plurality of screen states. Screen state switching means for switching to another screen state,
Game state transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state of the plurality of gaming states when a predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied;
The screen state switching means is
A gaming state transition screen state switching means for switching the screen state from the first screen state of the plurality of screen states to the second screen state when the predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied;
The fluctuation control means includes
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected after the predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, the screen state switching means during the game state transition causes the second screen from the first screen state. Waiting for the time required for the screen state to switch to the screen state to elapse, and starting the variable display of the symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that. A symbol display means capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols;
Start command means for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Internal lottery means for determining an internal winning combination triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means;
Triggered by detecting the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for displaying a fluctuation of symbols in the symbol display means,
Stop command means for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, a stop control means for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variation display is performed by the fluctuation control means When,
A projector capable of projecting an image;
N screens (N is an integer of 2 or more) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body that houses the N screens and has an opening on the front surface;
An openable / closable door attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable, and provided with a visual recognition area capable of visually recognizing the display surface of the screen;
Display control means for displaying the image on the display surface irradiated with the light by emitting light including the image from the projector;
The screen state indicating the arrangement state of the N screens is changed to one screen state of the N screen states by driving at least one of the screens by a driving mechanism and changing the arrangement position of the screens. Screen state switching means for switching to another screen state,
Game state transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state of the plurality of gaming states when a predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied;
When the N screens are expressed as a first screen to an Nth screen, and the N screen states are expressed as a first screen state to an Nth screen state, the Kth screen state (K is 1 to N) are arranged such that the N screens are arranged so that the light emitted from the projector is irradiated onto the display surface of the Kth screen and the display surface is visible through the viewing area. The state
The screen state switching means is
Game state transition screen state switching means for switching the screen state from the first screen state of the N screen states to the second screen state when the predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied. ,
The fluctuation control means includes
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected after the predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, the screen state switching means during the game state transition causes the second screen from the first screen state. Waiting for the time required for the screen state to switch to the screen state to elapse, and starting the variable display of the symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.